JP7788973B2 - Cooking appliance and cooking system - Google Patents

Description

This disclosure relates to a cooking device that heats an object to be heated, such as a pot, placed on a top plate, and a cooking system that uses the cooking device.

Cooking appliances are broadly divided into three types based on the environment in which they are used.
One type is the so-called "built-in type," which is installed inside kitchen furniture such as a kitchen counter. The second type is the "freestanding type," which is placed in a designated location on kitchen furniture like a gas stove (also called a "gas-burning table"). The third type is the small, portable "tabletop type," which is placed in any location on a dining table or similar.

Many "built-in" cooking appliances come with multiple heat sources and are popular for their ability to handle a variety of cooking methods. However, because they are installed inside kitchen furniture, the external dimensions must be designed to conform to standard kitchen furniture standards, meaning there is significantly less design freedom compared to "freestanding" or "tabletop" appliances, making it difficult to create a practical product.

A typical built-in cooking appliance has multiple heating ports located on top of the main body, which perform induction heating, and a grill chamber (also called an "oven chamber" or "heating chamber," but hereafter referred to collectively as the "heating chamber") inside the main body, which introduces microwaves from a microwave heating source into the heating chamber to cook (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Appliances like this, which have multiple heating sources with different heating principles, are called combined cooking appliances.

JP 2022-117570 A (Page 1, FIG. 29) JP 2015-158345 A (Page 1, FIG. 15) JP 2019-053950 A (page 3, FIG. 1) JP 2013-213663 A (page 10, FIG. 7)

As proposed in the above-mentioned Patent Document 1, in the case of a combined heating cooker, the number of heating means and input operation units increases to multiple, and the task of the user individually setting one cooking menu becomes more complicated.
Therefore, as shown in Patent Document 2, it has been proposed to transmit recipe data from a smartphone (communication terminal) to each heat source of a cooking appliance, and to cook using the recipe data.
However, setting recipe data in a cooking appliance via a communication terminal requires the user to carefully consider the timing of communication between the cooking appliance and the communication terminal and the selection of the heat source to be used. Furthermore, in the case of a cooking menu that uses multiple heating means in combination, there is a possibility that the cooking process may involve multiple steps, which raises concerns that the user may be confused about how to operate the input operation unit. However, the above-mentioned patent documents 1 and 2 do not adequately address these issues. This can lead to user confusion and the risk of data communication failure for the cooking menu. In other words, it is necessary to provide timely notifications to the user depending on the connection status between the cooking appliance and the communication terminal.

In addition, in the cooking system described in Patent Document 3, when the communication terminal and the cooking appliance are within a communication range, the communication state is automatically connected. Therefore, even if there is no intention to use the cooking appliance, if a person with a communication terminal capable of transmitting information for controlling the cooking appliance enters the communication range, there is a risk that the control information for the cooking appliance will be unintentionally transmitted to the cooking appliance.
Furthermore, Patent Document 4 proposes a configuration in which setting information is sent from a communication terminal (information terminal) to a heating appliance at each stage of two of the cooking procedures (steps), and a display unit of the communication terminal indicates that it is time to send the setting information. However, even in Patent Document 4, the cooperation relationship between the heating cooker and the communication terminal is not fully considered, and there is still room for improvement in terms of the configuration of the heating cooker and the method of providing the setting information.

The first objective of the present disclosure is to provide a highly convenient cooking appliance and cooking system that allows users to set various cooking menus on the cooking appliance from a communication terminal by improving user operability.

The cooking device according to the first disclosure includes:
an input operation unit;
A heating means;
a communication unit that wirelessly communicates with the outside;
A notification means;
a control device that executes cooking using recipe data acquired from an external source via the communication unit,
the control device acquires the recipe data in two stages, a first part for setting a cooking step 1 using the heating means, and a second part for setting a cooking step 2 using the heating means;
The control device
(1) a notification step 1 in which the notification means performs a specific notification A that identifies the input operation unit related to the first part;
(2) after the notification step 1, a notification step 2 in which the notification means performs a specific notification B that identifies the input operation unit related to the second part;
(3) a confirmation step 1 of transmitting selection information A when the input operation unit notified by the specific notification A is operated;
(4) a confirmation step 2 of transmitting selection information B when the input operation unit notified in the notification step 2 is operated;
To carry out
The input operation unit has a plurality of specific input keys,
the control device starts a reception restriction period of the recipe data from the time when the specific input key is operated, and the reception restriction period ends when both the first part and the second part are acquired or when a cooking operation is started;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

The cooking device according to the second disclosure includes:
an input operation unit having a specific input key A and a specific input key B;
A heating means;
a communication unit that wirelessly communicates with the outside;
A notification means;
a control device that executes cooking using the recipe data acquired via the communication unit,
the control device acquires the recipe data in two stages, a first part for setting a cooking step 1 by the heating means, and a second part for setting a cooking step 2 by the heating means;
The control device
(1) after the notification means notifies that the recipe data relating to the first part can be acquired, when the specific input key A is operated, the process proceeds to a step of acquiring setting information A of the first part;
(2) proceeding to a step of acquiring setting information B for the second part when the specific input key B is operated after the notification means notifies that the recipe data for the second part can be acquired;
The input operation unit has a plurality of specific input keys,
the control device starts a reception restriction period of the recipe data from the time when the specific input key is operated, and the reception restriction period ends when both the first part and the second part are acquired or when a cooking operation is started;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

The cooking system according to the third disclosure includes:
a cooking device having a plurality of input operation units and a communication function;
a communication terminal connected to the cooking appliance by wireless communication,
The communication terminal
(1) The first screen and the second screen are displayed sequentially on the terminal display unit;
(2) The first screen displays recipe data relating to the selected food in the order of a first display portion relating to cooking step 1 and a second display portion relating to cooking step 2;
(3) When the first display portion displayed on the first screen is selected, the display is switched to the second screen displaying information specifying the input operation unit to be used in the cooking process 1;
(4) The second screen displays input keys for transmitting setting information A related to the cooking step 1 of the recipe data,
(5) When the input key is operated, the setting information A related to the cooking process 1 selected on the first screen is transmitted to the cooking device.
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

The cooking system according to the fourth disclosure includes:
a cooking device having a display unit, a plurality of specific input keys provided in an input operation unit, and a communication function;
a communication terminal connected to the cooking appliance by wireless communication,
The communication terminal has a recipe selection unit that displays recipe data related to the food to be cooked on a terminal display unit,
The communication terminal
(1) The first screen and the second screen are sequentially displayed on the terminal display unit;
(2) The first screen displays the recipe data of the food to be cooked that is the target of the recipe data in the order of a first display portion relating to cooking step 1 and a second display portion relating to cooking step 2;
(3) The first screen displays an input key for transmitting advance notice information 1 to notify that the cooking process 1 displayed on the first screen has been selected;
(4) When a transmission process is performed using the transmission input key, the display is switched to the second screen,
When the cooking appliance receives the advance notice information 1, the cooking appliance displays information specifying the specific input key corresponding to the cooking process 1 on the display unit, and when the specific input key displayed on the display unit is operated, the cooking appliance issues selection information A.
When the communication terminal receives the selection information A, the communication terminal becomes capable of transmitting setting information A related to the cooking process 1 to the cooking appliance;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

The cooking device according to the fifth disclosure is
a first heating means and a second heating means;
an individual operation unit dedicated to one of the heating means;
a common operation unit for the first heating means and the second heating means;
a communication unit that wirelessly communicates with the outside;
A notification means;
a control device that executes cooking using the recipe data acquired via the communication unit,
the individual operation unit has a first specific input key,
the shared operation unit has a second specific input key,
The control device
(1) a notifying step of identifying one of the first specific input key or the second specific input key and notifying the identified one by the notifying means;
(2) a confirmation step of transmitting selection information specific to the first specific input key or the second specific input key, when the first specific input key or the second specific input key specified by the notification means is operated;
Execute the following in sequence.
the control device has a function of acquiring the recipe data necessary for executing one cooking menu in two stages, a first stage for setting a cooking process 1 using the first heating means, and a second stage for setting a cooking process 2 using the second heating means;
the control device transmits the selection information in response to an operation of the first specific input key or the second specific input key specified in the notifying step;
the control device starts a reception restriction period of the recipe data from the time when the first specific input key and the second specific input key are operated, and the reception restriction period ends when a cooking operation is started;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

This disclosure provides a cooking device that can be linked to a communications terminal to support a wide variety of cooking methods, contributing to more efficient input operations and reduced input load for users, and a cooking system that uses the cooking device.

1 is a configuration diagram 1 of a heating and cooking system showing a first embodiment of the present disclosure. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the cooking device of FIG. 1 in an installed state; FIG. 3 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . FIG. 3 is a schematic plan view of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is an enlarged plan view of a central display unit and a central operation unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2. FIG. 3 is an enlarged plan view of a left display unit, a left heating power display unit, and a left operation unit of the cooking appliance shown in FIG. 2. FIG. 3 is an enlarged plan view of a right display unit, a right heating power display unit, and a right operation unit of the cooking appliance shown in FIG. 2. FIG. 3 is an enlarged plan view of a central display unit, a central operation unit, and a central heating status display unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2. FIG. 3 is an enlarged plan view showing an example of operation of the central display unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2; FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of a control device and an input operation unit (central operation unit) of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is an explanatory diagram showing all the types of control menus that can be selected by the central operation unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 2; FIG. 3 is a control menu classification table for the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the storage structure of various cooking control menus for the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 and the correspondence between the menus and input keys; FIG. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the central display unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 in a combined cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the input operation unit and the central display unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 in a combined cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the input operation unit and the central display unit in the cooking device shown in the figure when in a combined cooking mode. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the input operation unit and the central display unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 in a combined cooking mode. FIG. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the input operation unit and the central display unit in the cooperative cooking mode of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2 . FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the input operation unit and the central display unit in the cooperative cooking mode of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the input operation unit and the central display unit in the cooperative cooking mode of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2; FIG. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 of a modified example showing the display contents of the input operation unit and the central display unit in the cooperative cooking mode of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display contents of the input operation unit and the central display unit in the cooperative cooking mode of the heating cooker shown in FIG. 2, and a display example of the cooperative cooking menu. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the central display unit in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 in a cooperative cooking mode; FIG. 3 is a table showing various cooperative cooking menus in a cooperative cooking mode in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram showing a first example of operation of the cooperative preheating cooking mode among the cooperative cooking modes shown in FIG. 25 . FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram showing a second example of operation of the cooperative preheating cooking mode among the cooperative cooking modes shown in FIG. 25 . FIG. 26 is a step explanatory diagram showing the operation of the cooperative cooking mode shown in FIG. 25 . 26 is a flowchart 1 showing the operation of the cooperative cooking mode shown in FIG. 25 . 3 is an explanatory diagram showing permission conditions and determination results before transitioning to a cooperative cooking mode in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . FIG. 3 is a flowchart 1 showing an operation of acquiring recipe data from an external source in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is a flowchart showing main input steps for three cooking modes after the main power is turned on in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . 3 is a flowchart 1 showing an input process after the main power is turned on in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . 34 is a flowchart 1 showing an input process in the case of a cooperative cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 33. 34 is a flowchart 1 showing an input process in the case of a combined cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 33. 34 is a flowchart 1 showing an input process in the case of a single cooking mode in the heating cooker shown in FIG. 33. 3 is a flowchart showing main input steps when cooking by acquiring recipe data for three cooking modes after the main power is turned on in the cooking device shown in FIG. 2 . 34 is a flowchart 1 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data from an external source in the cooking device shown in FIG. 33 . 34 is a flowchart 2 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data from an external source in the cooking device shown in FIG. 33 . 34 is a flowchart showing the basic operation of the control device in a voice input mode in the cooking appliance shown in FIG. 33 . 34 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition of the initial standby screen of the central display unit at the time of start-up in the cooking appliance shown in FIG. 33 . 34 is an explanatory diagram of the central display section showing the state before cooking by the first heating means is started in the cooking device shown in FIG. 33; FIG. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the operation steps of the control device of the cooking device from the time recipe data is acquired until the cooking process is completed. FIG. 1 is an enlarged plan view showing the central operation unit and the central display unit when recipe data is acquired and cooking is performed in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an enlarged plan view showing the central operation unit and the central display unit when recipe data is acquired and cooking is performed in the collaborative cooking mode. FIG. 2 is an enlarged plan view 2 showing the central operation unit and the central display unit when recipe data is acquired and cooking is performed in the cooperative cooking mode. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing a chronological relationship between cooking steps of a cooperative cooking menu and operations of an input operation unit when recipe data is acquired from an external device in the heating cooker of the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the relationship between the cooking steps of a cooperative cooking menu and the operation of the input operation unit in chronological order in the heating cooker of the first embodiment. 1 is a time chart 1 for explaining the entire recipe data obtainable period and control operation in the cooperative cooking mode in the cooking device of the first embodiment. 1 is a time chart 1 for explaining the entire recipe data obtainable period and control operation in a composite cooking mode in the cooking device of the first embodiment. 50 is a time chart showing a first modification of the time chart shown in FIG. 49; 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the input operation unit and the central display unit when recipe data for the cooperative cooking mode is acquired in the heating cooker of the first embodiment. FIG. 50 is a time chart showing a second modification of the time chart shown in FIG. 49; 10 is a flowchart showing the operation of displaying food ingredients and nutritional components before transitioning to heat cooking operation in the linked cooking mode using recipe data acquired from an external source. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the main internal configuration of a communication terminal (information processing terminal) used in the heating and cooking system of the first embodiment. 56 is a flowchart 1 showing the operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal device) shown in FIG. 55. 56 is a flowchart 2 showing the operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal device) shown in FIG. 55. 56 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking device after receiving data from the communication terminal (information processing terminal) shown in FIG. 55. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the recipe data display screen and cooking steps of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) shown in FIG. 55. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) shown in FIG. 55. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) shown in FIG. 55. 3 and 4 showing the display operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) shown in FIG. 55. 1 is a time chart 1 showing the cooperative operation between a communication terminal (information processing terminal) and a cooking appliance in the cooking system of the first embodiment. 10 is a time chart 2 showing the cooperative operation between the communication terminal (information processing terminal device) and the cooking device in the cooking system of the first embodiment. 10 is a time chart 3 showing the cooperative operation between the communication terminal (information processing terminal) and the cooking appliance in the cooking system of the first embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing the operation of the cooking appliances in a cooperative cooking mode in the cooking system of the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is an enlarged plan view of the central display unit, central operation unit, and central heating status display unit of a cooking device used in the cooking system of the second embodiment. An explanatory diagram showing the display content on the terminal display unit of the communication terminal used in the heating and cooking system shown in Figure 67. FIG. 68 is a block diagram illustrating the relationship between the control device and the central operating unit of the cooking device shown in FIG. 67. A plan view of the central display unit, central operating unit, left and right operating units, and central heating status display unit of the heating cooker shown in Figure 67. An enlarged plan view of the central display unit, central operation unit, and central heating status display unit of the heating cooker shown in Figure 67. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a display on the cooking device that indicates that recipe data for one cooking menu has been received from a communication terminal. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a display on the cooking device that indicates that recipe data for one cooking menu has been received from the communication terminal. FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display contents on the terminal display unit of the communication terminal used in the cooking system shown in FIG. 67. FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing a modified example of the display content on the terminal display unit shown in FIG. 74. FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing the display contents on the terminal display unit shown in FIG. 74. FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram 3 showing the display contents on the terminal display unit shown in FIG. 74. 11 is a time chart showing, in chronological order, the operations between a cooking appliance and a communication terminal used in the cooking system of the third embodiment. An enlarged plan view showing the operating state of the central display unit, central operation unit, and central heating status display unit of the heating cooker shown in Figure 78. 79 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking device shown in FIG. 78. FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) shown in FIG. 78. 79 is a time chart showing the operation of the cooking device shown in FIG. 78 in chronological order. 79 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking device shown in FIG. 78 in chronological order.

The cooking system according to the present disclosure will be described below with reference to the drawings. In the following description, directional terms (e.g., "up," "down," "right," "left," "front," "rear," etc.) are used to facilitate understanding, but these are for explanatory purposes only. In addition, in each drawing, items with the same reference numerals are the same or equivalent, and this applies throughout the entire specification.

Furthermore, in the following description, a composite cooking device equipped with a plurality of types of heating means will also be simply referred to as a "cooking device."
Cooking appliances with a cooking space such as an inner pot, such as a rice cooker equipped with a single heating means (e.g., an induction heating coil or a sheath heater), are also referred to as heating cookers. For example, even if such rice cookers have only one heating means, they can cook multiple types of food, such as regular white rice or porridge, and may also have several or more cooking methods. Such rice cookers are equipped with multiple input keys (e.g., touch keys or push button keys) that allow users to select various food items and cooking modes, and improving operability for users (US) is one of their challenges.

In the following explanation, when we say "a heated object placed on the top plate," it means both cases where a heated object such as a pot is placed directly on the top surface of the top plate 3 (described below) and heated, and cases where a heated object is placed on a support member such as a trivet positioned above the top plate, such as a gas burner, and heated.

In the first embodiment, the "second heating means" HM2 refers to a heat source for heating the food placed inside the heating chamber 6 (described below). It may also use radiant heat or steam.

In embodiment 1, a magnetron is used as the microwave heating source, but there are no restrictions on the microwave oscillation principle or method, and it may also be a microwave oscillator using a semiconductor element. Multiple heating sources may also be provided.

In this embodiment 1, the "third heating means" HM3 is called "third" to indicate the difference from the second heating means HM2, but does not imply a superiority or inferiority relationship with the first heating means HM1.
In addition, in embodiment 1, a heat source using a radiant electric heat source (sheath heater, mica heater, carbon heater, ceramic heater, infrared heater, radiant heater, etc.) is used, but a heat source that generates heat in other forms or methods may also be used.

The third heating means HM3 is capable of cooking in a single heating chamber 6. It may be a combination of multiple heating sources with different heating principles, such as a heating source consisting of an electric heater and a gas combustor (burner). An induction heating source may also be used as the heating source for heating the heating chamber 6. It may also be a steam generator (boiler) (not shown) that supplies high-temperature steam (such as superheated steam).

Furthermore, the third heating means HM3 may be either a heat source that heats the wall surface of the heating chamber 6 from the outside, or a heat source that is installed in the internal space of the heating chamber 6 and heats the atmosphere in the internal space to a high temperature.
In addition, a heat-generating element that becomes hot by induction heating may be placed in the heating chamber, and this heat-generating element may heat the wall surface of the heating chamber 6 from the outside, or may heat the air inside the heating chamber 6.

A typical example of the induction heating coil (IH coil) referred to in this embodiment 1 is one made by bundling approximately 30 thin copper or aluminum wires of approximately 0.1 mm to 0.3 mm, twisting several of these bundles together, and winding them into a spiral. Alternatively, there is also one made by winding approximately 1,000 to 1,500 wires of approximately 0.05 mm. There is also a proposal to use a ring-shaped conductor made of a flat conductive material. All of these configurations correspond to the "IH coil" that is the main part of the first heating means HM1 (induction heating source).

In this embodiment 1, "coordinated cooking" refers to cooking that uses two or more heating sources that heat a single item (including food, meat, vegetables, etc.) in different locations and whose heating operation conditions can be set independently.

The above-mentioned "coordinated cooking" refers to the use of multiple heating methods with a time lag. For example, in the process of completing a single cooking step, the food is preheated using a microwave heating source, then moved to another location, where it is heated using an induction coil to complete the cooking process. This is a type of "coordinated cooking" as defined here.

Another type of "cooperative cooking" is to heat the food inside the heating chamber 6 using a gas burner, then move the food onto the top plate 3 and heat it again using the gas burner or induction heating source to improve the cooking quality.

The "voice input mode" refers to a control mode in which the user US inputs by speaking, without touching or pressing the buttons or operation surfaces of the input switches (input keys).
The types of "voice input mode" include "voice input mode 1" and "voice input mode 2".

The "voice input mode 1" is selected by operating an input key (hereinafter referred to as a "dual-purpose key") that supports both voice input and touch (including pressing) input.
The "voice input mode 2" is selected by operating an input key 180 dedicated to voice input (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a "voice input dedicated key"), which will be described later.

When an input operation unit has multiple input keys, including the "dual-purpose key," and the mode is changed to "voice input mode 1" using the dual-purpose key, there are two cases: one in which the input functions of (some of) the input keys other than the dual-purpose key (e.g., 156M) are temporarily disabled (this control pattern is called "voice input mode 1A"), and one in which they are not disabled (this control pattern is called "voice input mode 1B"). Both cases fall under the category of "voice input mode 1" as defined here.

When the "dedicated voice input key" 180 is pressed while performing touch input using an input key (e.g., 153M or 153L) on one input operation unit, "voice input mode 2" is selected. In this case, after voice input mode 2 is selected, there are two cases: one in which the input functions of (some of) the input keys (e.g., 156M) other than the dedicated voice input key 180 are temporarily disabled (this control pattern is referred to as "voice input mode 2A"), and one in which they are not disabled (this control pattern is referred to as "voice input mode 2B"). Both cases fall under the category of "voice input mode 2" as defined here.

In this embodiment 1, there are three input operation units 15 in total: a central operation unit 15M, a left operation unit 15L, and a right operation unit 15R.
The central operation unit 15M may be called a "common operation unit." The left operation unit 15L and the right operation unit 15R may be called "individual operation units."

A specific input key refers to an input means (selection means) that emits a specific signal (selection information: 202) described below, and includes touch input keys, push button switches, non-contact switches, dial switches, etc. In linked cooking mode KM1, there are at least two types of selection information: "selection information A" for cooking process 1 and "selection information B" for cooking process 2. If there are three cooking processes, the selection information for cooking process 3 is called "selection information C."

The individual operation units 15L and 15R are respectively provided with first specific input keys 152L and 152R which constitute a part of the specific input keys.
The shared operation unit 15M has a second specific input key 153M. In the first embodiment, the input key 154M is also set as the second specific input key, but it is sufficient if at least one specific input key is provided in one input operation unit (in this case, the shared operation unit 15M).

In this embodiment 1, "specific notification of the input operation unit" (including specific notification A and specific notification B) refers to notifying the user of the presence, name, other identification information, etc. of a specific input means (touch input key, push button switch, non-contact input switch, etc.) in the input operation unit 15 by visual information, audio information, etc. Here, "notification" includes display by characters or figures, display by light emission (including flashing), and even audio guidance.
Specifically, this includes informing the user of the existence of the specific input means, for example, the three specific input keys (152L, 152R, and 153M), and information prompting the user to perform the input operation.

When each of the three specific input keys (152L, 152R, and 153M) is operated, it generates individual selection information (202A, 202B, and 202C) corresponding to the specific input key. In other words, since each of the three specific input keys (152L, 152R, and 153M) generates different selection information (202A, 202B, and 202C), the control device 40 can uniquely identify which specific input key has been operated in the input key identification unit 15A of the input operation unit 15. For example, the selection information of the specific input key 152L is 202A. The selection information of the specific input key 152R is 202B.
This allows the control device 40 to determine which specific input keys (152L, 152R, and 153M) have been operated for input, based on the input information from the input operation unit 15. If the specific input keys themselves do not have the function of generating unique selection information A (202A, 202B, 202C), the input operation unit 15 on which the specific input keys are located may assign a unique identification number (code) to each specific input key and transmit the identification information of each specific input key to the control device 40.
In the following explanation, the representative symbol for selection information A is 202. In other words, the symbol 202 encompasses all of the selection information 202A to 202C, and may refer to any one of them. When distinguishing between cooking steps, the selection information for cooking step 1 will be referred to as "selection information A," and the selection information for cooking step 2 will be referred to as "selection information B."

When recipe data CD is acquired and heating cooking is performed by operating the individual operation units 15L, 15R, the first specific input keys 152L, 152R are selected to select a first cooking program from the memory device 42 of the control device 40, which will be described later. This "first cooking program" drives the first heating means HM1 to perform induction heating cooking.
Individual cooking menus belonging to the first cooking program are displayed on the left display section 16L and the right display section 16R, respectively. As described below, the first specific input keys 152L and 152R also serve as keys pressed to select a control menu to be implemented by the left and right heating ovens 4L and 4R. However, the first specific input keys 152L and 152R may be replaced with other input keys (e.g., 153R and 153L) that also serve as input keys for selecting the left and right heating ovens 4L and 4R. The first specific input keys 152L and 152R may also serve as input keys 154L, 154R, 155L, and 155R that instruct the increase or decrease of heating time, heat power, etc.

When recipe data CD is acquired and the common operation unit 15M is operated to cook by heating, the second specific input key 153M (154M) is selected to select a second cooking program from the memory device 42 of the control device 40 described later.
This "second cooking program" performs cooking by driving two groups of the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the third heating means HM3 in combination. Specifically, it can perform individual cooking menus belonging to the "cooperative cooking mode" KM1, which will be described later.

This cooperative cooking mode KM1 has two or more cooking processes. A cooking menu can be selected using the central operation unit 15M while viewing the central display unit 16M. Note that before starting cooking in cooperative cooking mode KM1, input keys other than the second specific input key 153M are also used to set control conditions (heat power, heating time, etc.).
By selecting and operating the second specific input key 153M, a second cooking program is selected from the memory device 42 of the control device 40, and identification information 167 such as the name of a cooking menu that can be executed by the second cooking program can be displayed on the display unit 16.

The "second cooking program" also includes cooking by independently driving the first heating means HM1, the second heating means HM2, and the third heating means HM3. For example, it is possible to perform induction heating in a specific heating port (central heating port 4C) or to perform cooking using only microwave heating in the heating chamber 6.

"Recipe data" CD refers to data used in controlling the cooker 1 to heat and cook one food item.
One form of recipe data CD includes data specifying the heating means, data specifying the heating process and order, and control conditions during heating (including, but not limited to, heat power, target temperature, heating and cooking time, etc.).

Another form of the recipe data CD does not include data specifying the heating means or data specifying the heating steps or order, but includes only some of the data required to execute a cooking menu (e.g., hamburger steak).
For example, when cooking using the collaborative cooking mode described below, this does not include information specific to the heating means that executes one cooking menu (including information indicating the attributes of the heating means and information about the heating port, etc.), information about the cooking process, information indicating the order in which the heating means are driven, etc.
In this case, the data mainly consists of instructions and data (hereinafter referred to as "commands" or "command data") that determine control conditions such as heating capacity, heating time, etc. In this case, if the recipe data CD held in the cooking appliance 1 is configured on the assumption that one serving of food is to be cooked, for example, the cooking appliance may be adapted to two or four servings, etc., by changing the control conditions (for example, one parameter, the heating time) using a built-in program in response to an external command.

Furthermore, among the recipe data CD, when the heating cooking process is composed of two steps, cooking step 1 and cooking step 2, for example, in the case where the first heating means HM1 is used in cooking step 1, the recipe data for the linked cooking mode KM1 is acquired by the heating cooker 1 in two stages: a first part M1 that sets the operation content of cooking step 1 to be used in cooking step 1, and a second part M2 that sets cooking step 2 that uses the second heating means HM2.
That is, it is composed of two parts: a first part M1 that sets cooking process 1 using the first heating means HM1, and a second part M2 that sets cooking process 2 using the second heating means HM2. Note that even in the case where the second heating means HM1 is used in cooking process 1, the cooking appliance 1 similarly acquires the "setting information" for cooking process 1 and cooking process 2 separately.

In the following explanation, the "setting information" refers to information that is provided to the cooking appliance 1 to set the control details (of the heating means) according to recipe data CD, which will be explained in detail later. For convenience of explanation, the setting information for cooking step 1 may be referred to as "setting information A," and the setting information for cooking step 2 may be referred to as "setting information B."

In the following embodiments, the above-mentioned forms of recipe data CD will not be particularly distinguished from each other.
The "display screen" referred to in the following embodiments includes a liquid crystal display screen using a liquid crystal display element (liquid crystal panel) and a display screen using other light-emitting methods (organic EL panel, etc.).
It also includes "pop-up screens" that automatically appear within the display screen. A "pop-up" is a separate window that automatically appears (starts up and begins displaying) on the screen of an Internet browser (also called a "web browser").
For example, in the terminal display unit (display screen) 216 of the communication terminal 200 described later, a first screen 216A, a second screen 216B, etc. will be described, but these may also be configured as pop-up screens.

Embodiment 1.
(1. Configuration of the cooking system)
A first embodiment according to the present disclosure is shown in FIGS. 1 to 63. FIG.
Referring to FIG.
The cooking system of the first embodiment is configured to include a cooker 1, a smartphone 200 (also called a high-function communication terminal, but hereinafter referred to as a "communication terminal") having a function for wireless communication with the cooker 1, and a cloud server 300. Note that the communication terminal 200 may be a device other than a smartphone, such as a tablet terminal or a personal computer with a communication function. In the first embodiment, all of these devices are collectively referred to as the communication terminal 200.

The communication terminal 200 communicates wirelessly with a wireless router 340 (Figure 2) installed in the house (not shown) where the cooking appliance 1 is used, using a communication method such as Wi-Fi (registered trademark).

The cooking appliance 1 can acquire at least the recipe data CD1 through wireless communication 330 with the communication terminal 200. The recipe data CD2 acquired by the cooking appliance 1 via a cloud server (to be described later) will be described later.
The communication terminal 200 performs wireless communication 330 with the cooking appliance 1 using a communication method such as Bluetooth (registered trademark).

The communication terminal 200 accesses the cloud server 330 in an external space via the wireless router 340 (Figure 2) and a network NW such as the Internet. The cloud server 300 has at least one recipe data providing server 301.

The recipe data providing server 301 is equipped with a recipe DB (database) 302 that stores data on recipes for performing various cooking methods, and the communication terminal 200 accesses a recipe providing site operated by the recipe data providing server 301 and acquires (downloads) various recipe data CD1 from the recipe DB 302.

As will be explained in detail later, the recipe data CD1 includes commands (command data) that specify the heating means and control conditions (including, but not limited to, at least one of heat, heating time, temperature, etc.) so that a specific food item (e.g., hamburger steak) can be cooked in the cooking appliance 1. However, as mentioned above, it may also be just unique data that identifies the recipe data CD1.

In the following explanation, recipe data (also referred to as "cooking execution data") may be described using symbols such as CD1, CD2, etc. However, the contents of the recipe data do not necessarily differ depending on the symbol; in some cases, they may be the same. These symbols (CD1, CD2) are used based on the entity that sent the recipe data, making it easier to understand. When using a unified reference symbol for recipe data, "CD" will be used.

The cooking appliance 1 shown in Figure 1 comprises a first heating means HM1 located below a top plate 3 (described in Figure 2 and subsequent figures) that covers the top surface of the cooking appliance 1, a second heating means HM2 that supplies microwaves to the inside of a heating chamber 6 (see Figure 3) formed inside the cooking appliance 1, and a third heating means HM3 that is located inside or outside the heating chamber 6 and raises the temperature of the internal space of the heating chamber 6 to heat it.

If the upper surface of the top plate 3 is defined as the "first location," then induction heating means is used as the first heating means HM1 to heat the object to be heated (a magnetic metal pot) placed in this first location. Alternatively, a gas combustion device equipped with a gas burner for heating a pot made of magnetic or non-magnetic metal corresponds to the first heating means HM1.

If we define the enclosed space located away from the first location as the "second location," then the interior of the heating chamber 6 (see Figure 3) would be that second location.

The cooking appliance 1 has the ability to execute a "single cooking mode" KM3, which drives the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 independently.

The cooking appliance 1 has the function of executing a "combined cooking mode" KM2, which cooks a single food item by simultaneously driving the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3, or by driving one of them first and then automatically driving the other. Even when the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 are operating simultaneously, whether the heating ends at the same time or at different times is a single operating pattern belonging to the "combined cooking mode" KM2.

The "combined cooking mode" KM2 has at least three patterns: a pattern in which the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 are driven simultaneously from the beginning (RG control mode 1); a pattern in which the third heating means HM3 starts driving after the second heating means HM2 (RG control mode 2); and a pattern in which the third heating means HM3 is driven first, and then the driving of the second heating means HM3 is automatically switched over to. In RG control modes 1 to 3, the switching of the heating means is performed automatically when cooking begins in the heating chamber 6 (see Figure 3).

Unlike the linked cooking mode KM1 described below, the "combined cooking mode" KM2 does not have a "cooking menu" corresponding to a specific food item (e.g., hamburger steak). In other words, a "control menu" is provided for each pattern for driving the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3. A single control pattern can accommodate multiple food items (e.g., thawing meat or boiling vegetables).

For example, one of the "control menus" is the aforementioned "RG control mode 1." In the RG control mode (RG combined cooking mode), a variety of dishes can be cooked. One of the "control menus," for example, the aforementioned "RG control mode 1," is controlled by recipe data that defines that control mode, but is not set for each specific dish being cooked.

In other words, the operating pattern in which two or more heating sources (the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3) are operated in a predetermined sequence is the composite cooking mode KM2, which has multiple "control menus."

In contrast to this, the cooperative cooking mode KM1 with a cooperative cooking menu applies recipe data (corresponding to specific foods) to heat and cook foods placed inside the heating chamber 6 and above the top plate 3 in a predetermined order.
That is, the contents of the recipe data are different between the composite cooking mode KM2 and the cooperative cooking mode KM1.

In the following description, when a type of control mode, such as a drive pattern of a heat source, is indicated, it is called a "control menu." For example, "thawing" is one of the control menus.
On the other hand, when specifying the food to be cooked, the name of the dish, etc., it is called a "cooking menu." For example, "hamburger steak" is one of the cooking menus.

The cooking appliance 1 has the ability to execute a "cooperative cooking mode" KM1 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven with a time difference determined depending on the operation of the user US.

The "cooperative cooking mode" KM1 has a pattern in which cooking step 1 is performed by the first heating means HM1, and a pattern in which cooking step 1 is performed by the second heating means HM2.
For example, to move from cooking step 1 by the first heating means HM1 to cooking step 2, the food to be cooked is moved into the heating chamber 6, and then the second heating means HM2 is started to be driven, so there is a "heating pause period P3" (transition period TR) during which no heating operation is performed between cooking step 1 and cooking step 2. This heating pause period P3 will be described with reference to Figures 45 and 46.

In this "cooperative cooking mode" KM1, the recipe data CD is prepared for each specific food to be cooked (for example, hamburger steak, roast beef, or gratin).
The recipe data CD specifies the heating means to be used, the order in which the heating means are operated, and the control conditions of the heating means (including at least one of heat power, heating time, temperature, etc.) for cooking process 1 (first part M1) and cooking process 2 (second part M2).

The recipe data CD is stored in both the cooking appliance 1 and the recipe DB 302. The type of recipe data CD in the recipe DB and the type of recipe data CD stored in the cooking appliance 1 do not have to be the same. For example, recipe data CD for new linked cooking modes KM1 may be added sequentially to the recipe DB 302, and recipe data CD for composite cooking menus may be accumulated sequentially.

When the cooking appliance 1 acquires the recipe data CD for executing the cooperative cooking mode KM1 from the communication terminal 200, the data is a single cooking menu unit selected by the user US on the communication terminal 200. This is not limited to the "cooperative cooking mode" KM1, but is also common to the "combined cooking mode" KM2 and the "single cooking mode" KM3.

In other words, in the heating cooker 1, for example, a control menu called "warming" can be selected in the composite cooking mode KM2, but the recipe data CD provided to the heating cooker 1 from the communication terminal 200 is not in units of such control menus, but in units of cooking menus.
Therefore, although the control menu for microwave heating and the like includes various control menus such as "warm,""manualmicrowave,""pre-boil leafy vegetables,""pre-boil root vegetables," and "thaw meat," which will be described later, the communication terminal 200 does not provide recipe data CD for each of these control menus. For example, in the case of thawing, the communication terminal 200 provides recipe data (including identification information) such as "thawing XX meat," which specifies the object to be heated.

As described above, the communication terminal 200 requests the recipe data providing server 301 to provide recipe data CD for the desired food to be cooked, and downloads the recipe data CD1 corresponding to the desired recipe (see Figure 1).

The communication terminal 200 can transmit recipe data CD2 corresponding to one recipe, which is generated by the recipe data providing server 301 and acquired from the server 301, to the cooking appliance 1 (see FIG. 1).
In order to use this recipe data acquisition function, the user US of the cooking appliance 1 accesses the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) and installs an application for selecting recipes (hereinafter referred to as the "recipe selection app") on the communication terminal 200.

When the user US installs the recipe selection app, they perform an operation to register identification information, such as the model name of the cooking appliance, as an initial setting. This registration allows them to obtain recipe data CD corresponding to the rated specifications of the cooking appliance 1 (such as the heating capacity of each heating means HM1 to HM3) from the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301).

The user US also uses the recipe selection app to pair the communication terminal 200 with the cooking appliance 1, establishing direct wireless communication 330BT between the communication terminal 200 and the cooking appliance 1. This wireless communication 330BT may use a near field communication (NFC) method.

In FIG. 2, 330WF indicates wireless communication between the communication terminal 200 and the wireless router 340. The communication method for wireless communication 330T between the communication terminal 200 and the cooking appliance 1 uses Bluetooth (registered trademark), which is a short-range wireless communication standard. Furthermore, wireless communication 330WF between the communication terminal 200 and the wireless router 340 uses a wireless LAN communication method such as Wi-Fi (registered trademark).

Although not shown in FIG. 1, in the cooking system of this embodiment 1, recipe data CD (corresponding to one recipe) created by the user US can be sent to the recipe providing site (recipe data providing server 301) using the communication terminal 200, temporarily stored in the recipe DB 302, and then provided to the cooker 1. In other words, even if the communication terminal 200 is located far away from the house in which the cooker 1 is installed (for example, while away from home), the recipe data CD of the communication terminal 200 can be conveniently stored in the recipe data providing server 301.

A wireless router 340 (see Figure 2) may be interposed between the cooking appliance 1 and the cloud server 300.

In the first embodiment, there are cases where the recipe data CD is described as being "acquired" or "restricted from being acquired," so this point will be explained.
The phrase "restricting acquisition" does not mean that recipe data CD (specific information constituting all or part of it) cannot enter the cooker 1 from outside via the communication unit 51, which will be described later. In the cooker 1, the communication unit 51 first receives the recipe data CD from outside and temporarily stores it in an appropriate storage area in the storage device 41 (described in FIG. 10). At that time, the contents of the data (attributes, presence or absence of identification information 167, etc.) are analyzed. However, if the data was transmitted from outside during the "period during which acquisition is restricted" as described above, it will not be used in the subsequent execution of the cooking menu (i.e., cooking process) and will be automatically deleted within a short period of time (at least when the main power switch 20 is turned off).

In the following explanation, when describing networks such as the aforementioned Internet lines, the unified symbol "NW" will be used.

The "device identification information" of the cooking appliance 1 is unique information used to identify the cooking appliance 1. Specifically, this information is important information required when communicating information, and includes the MAC address, the manufacturer name of the cooking appliance 1, the model name, the type number, the serial number, etc.

The cloud server 300 has a function of acquiring information about the current status of the cooking appliance 1, such as operation, stoppage, and standby state, via the network NW.
The cloud server 300 is connected to the target cooking appliance 1 using the device identification information.

The cloud server 300 includes an information providing server (not shown) in addition to the recipe database 302 , and transmits useful information to the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal 200 .
The cooking appliance 1 executes a process of periodically (for example, every 5 minutes) performing wireless communication with the cloud server 300, separate from communication with the communication terminal 200. If it determines during the periodic communication that there is some abnormality in the status information (described later) on the cooking appliance 1 side, this triggers a process of notifying or querying the cloud server 300 each time to obtain information for maintaining appropriate operation. If no abnormality is found, the process automatically returns to the process of repeatedly executing periodic communication.

The information server (not shown) may be, for example, a server installed by an external organization such as an earthquake information provider in a specific region or an electric power company, or it may be a server provided by the manufacturer of the cooking appliance 1.

The cloud server 300 stores and memorizes control application software that enables remote control of the cooking appliance 1. The communication terminal 200, which will be described in detail later, can access the cloud server 300 and download (load) the control application software to achieve the remote control described above.

The communication terminal 200 in this first embodiment has the function of transmitting and receiving signals via short-range communication when placed within a few centimeters of (or even in contact with) the input/output unit of the cooking appliance 1. This short-range communication refers to an international standard technology for wireless communication known as Near Field Communication (abbreviated as NFC).

In this NFC communication, a so-called wireless tag (NFC tag) is embedded in the induction cooking appliance 1 .
On the other hand, it is also possible to send control data from the communication terminal 200 side to the NFC storage unit of the cooking appliance 1, and control the cooking appliance 1 in accordance with the control data.

Next, FIG. 2 will be described.
Reference numeral 600 denotes kitchen furniture in which the cooking appliance 1 and the like are installed. Reference numeral 600D denotes a water inlet for a water supply provided in the kitchen furniture 600.
Reference numeral 340 denotes a wireless router capable of wireless communication with the cooking appliance 1. This wireless router 340 also serves as an access point to a network NW such as the Internet.

The cooking appliance 1 has a top plate 3 covering its upper surface, on which an object to be heated (such as a pot made of magnetic metal) is placed, and induction heating is performed using an induction coil 9 (reference numerals 9C, 9L, and 9R shown in Figures 3 and 4). Specifically, the top plate 3 has a left heating port 4L, a right heating port 4R, and a center heating port 4C.

An exhaust vent cover 5 is provided on the rear side (back side) of the top plate 3. The exhaust vent cover 5 is made of punched metal or a lattice-shaped metal member with countless small through-holes, allowing for ventilation throughout and low airflow resistance. Exhaust air released from inside the cooking appliance 1 passes through the exhaust vent cover 5 and exits the cooking appliance 1.

A door (heating door) 7 is provided on the front of the main body 2 of the cooking appliance 1, opening and closing the front opening of the heating chamber 6 (see Figure 3) located inside the main body 2. The door 7 is provided with a handle 8 for opening and closing it.

(2. Detailed configuration of the cooking device)
Next, a specific configuration of the cooking device 1 will be described with reference to FIGS.
Fig. 3 is a schematic vertical cross-sectional view of the cooking appliance 1 according to embodiment 1, as viewed from the side. As shown in Fig. 3, an induction heating coil 9L (hereinafter referred to as "left IH coil") serving as left induction heating means is provided below the left heating port 4L.

As shown in Figure 3, this cooking device 1 is a built-in induction cooking heater that is incorporated into kitchen furniture 600 that has a cooking table on top. Cooking device 1 has a main body 2 and a top plate 3 installed on top of main body 2. Top plate 3 is exposed above the kitchen countertop that forms the top surface of kitchen furniture 600.

The top plate 3 is composed, for example, of a heat-resistant glass plate and a metal frame attached around the periphery of the glass plate. Three heating ports 4 are provided on the top surface of the top plate 3: the left heating port 4L, the right heating port 4R, and the central heating port 4C.

The left heating port 4L, right heating port 4R, and center heating port 4C indicate the area where a metal cooking container such as a pot or frying pan (also referred to as the "heated object" N for the first heating means HM1) is placed. Guide marks (not shown) that serve as guides for placing the heated object are printed on the top surface of the top plate 3 for the left heating port 4L, right heating port 4R, and center heating port 4C.

Cooking appliance 1 has a top plate 3 that covers the upper surface, on which an object to be heated N (not shown) (such as a pot made of magnetic metal) is placed, and induction heating is performed by an IH coil 9. Reference numeral 32 denotes a bottom wall surface that divides the interior of cooking appliance 1 into two independent spaces, an upper space and an lower space.
33 is an installation space located above the bottom wall surface 32 inside the heating cooker 1, and the IH coil 9 (9C, 9L, 9R) is housed at a position corresponding to (directly below) the three heating ports 4L, 4R, 4C.

In other words, a right IH coil 9R serving as a right induction heating means is provided below the right heating port 4R, and a central IH coil 9C serving as a central induction heating means is provided below the central heating port 4C.

These IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R are circular heating coils made by winding thin conducting wire, such as copper or aluminum wire, and generate a high-frequency magnetic field when a high-frequency current is supplied to them. This inductively heats the metal cooking vessels (objects to be heated N) placed over the left heating port 4L, right heating port 4R, and center heating port 4C.

The heating means, including the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R and their drive circuits (high-frequency power supply circuits such as inverter circuits, not shown), may be referred to as the induction heating source or first heating means HM1. In the following description, unless there is a particular contradiction, the term "first heating means" HM1 will be used consistently.

A temperature sensor group 30 (see Figure 10) consisting of multiple temperature sensors (not shown) is mounted near the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R to detect the temperature of the top plate 3 and cooking vessel (heated object N). One temperature sensor 30A (not shown) constitutes one sensor in the temperature sensor group 30. The temperature sensor referred to here may be either or both a contact-type temperature sensor such as a thermistor and a non-contact temperature sensor such as an infrared sensor.

The heating chamber 6 is located inside the main body 2, below the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R. The heating chamber 6 is surrounded by metal walls such as stainless steel, and is a space for heating the food (foodstuffs) contained within the heating chamber 6.

The food to be cooked may be placed on a heat-resistant plastic container, a porcelain or heat-resistant glass dish, or may be placed inside a container and placed in the heating chamber 6; in such cases, the dish or container may be referred to as the "heated container." However, because these containers are not induction heated by the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R, even if they are placed on the heating port 4 of the top plate 3, they are not referred to as the "heated object" N of the IH coils 9C, 9L, and 9R.

A horizontally long rectangular opening (not shown) is formed in the front of the heating chamber 6 for inserting and removing the food to be cooked. This opening in the front of the heating chamber 6 is covered by a door 7 that can be opened and closed freely. The door 7 is supported by the main body 2 so that it can rotate freely via a hinge and an arm (not shown). This allows the door 7 to open forward to a horizontal position with its lower end as the fulcrum (center of rotation). The door 7 may also be pulled forward integrally with a support member (a structure such as a shelf, not shown) that supports the heated container from below, via a slide rail (not shown).

The door 7 is provided with an open/close detector 10 for detecting whether the door 7 is open or closed. The open/close detector 10 is, for example, a microswitch or an infrared sensor. A microwave oscillator 11 is provided behind the heating chamber 6 to heat the food placed in the heating chamber 6. The microwave oscillator 11 is, for example, composed of a magnetron, and irradiates microwaves into the heating chamber 6 to heat the food placed in the heating chamber 6, a process known as microwave heating.

The heating means including the microwave oscillator 11 and its drive circuit (a high-frequency power supply circuit such as an inverter circuit, not shown) may be referred to as the second heating means HM2.

The heating chamber 6 is also equipped with an upper radiant heat heating means 12a and a lower radiant heat heating means 12b, which heat the food from above and below using so-called heaters. The upper radiant heat heating means 12a is located on the ceiling wall surface on the outside or inside of the heating chamber 6, while the lower radiant heat heating means 12b is located on the inside or outside wall surface of the heating chamber 6, and both are sheath heaters.

Other types of radiant heat heating means (e.g., mica heaters, carbon heaters, etc.) may also be installed outside the heating chamber 6. Figure 3 shows an example in which the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b are both installed in close contact with the outer wall surface of the heating chamber 6.

The heating means, including the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b, and their drive circuits (not shown), may be referred to as the third heating means HM3. The upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b may be collectively referred to as the "radiant heat heating means," in which case the reference numeral "12" is used.

In addition, the heating chamber 6 is provided with an infrared sensor 13 as a non-contact temperature sensor to detect the temperature of the food being cooked inside the heating chamber 6 without contact. The temperature range detected by this infrared sensor 13 is set to, for example, -20°C to 100°C. This allows the degree of heating of the food to be detected accurately in real time, for example in 1°C increments. This infrared sensor 13 also constitutes one sensor in the group of temperature sensors 30 (see Figure 16).

The heating chamber 6 is also provided with a contact-type temperature sensor (e.g., a thermistor sensor) 14, which is an interior temperature sensor that detects the ambient temperature inside the heating chamber 6 or the wall temperature of the heating chamber 6.

The thermistor sensor 14 detects temperature by detecting changes in electrical resistance, and therefore the upper limit of the temperature it can detect is approximately 250°C. This thermistor sensor 14 also constitutes one sensor in the temperature sensor group 30. Note that this thermistor sensor 14 may be installed in two locations, near the bottom and ceiling of the heating chamber 6, as shown in Figure 3.

Next, FIG. 4 will be described.
Fig. 4 is a top view of the cooking appliance 1 according to embodiment 1. As shown in Fig. 4, a left operating unit 15L, a central operating unit 15M, and a right operating unit 15R are provided on the front side of the upper surface of the top plate 3 of the cooking appliance 1. These three operating units may be collectively referred to as "input operating units," in which case the reference numeral 15 is used.

At the rear of the left operating unit 15L, central operating unit 15M, and right operating unit 15R are the left heating power display unit 17L, central display unit 16M, right heating power display unit 17R, left display unit 16L, right display unit 16R, and central heating status display unit 17M.

The left display unit 16L, the center display unit 16M, and the right display unit 16R may be collectively referred to as the "display unit," in which case the reference numeral 16 is used. The center display unit 16M has a horizontally long LCD display screen.

The left heating power display unit 17L and right heating power display unit 17R display the heating power level using light-emitting elements (such as LEDs) and do not have a display screen.

The left heating power display unit 17L, right heating power display unit 17R, and center heating status display unit 17M may be collectively referred to as the "heat power display units," in which case the reference number 17 will be used.

Also, adjacent to the right operating unit 15R is a button (key) 20A for operating the main power switch 20 (see Figure 10). The main power switch 20 turns the main power supply of the cooking appliance 1 on and off. The button (key) that is pressed to turn the power on and off is the operating button 20A.

When the main power supply of the cooking appliance 1 is OFF, pressing the operation button 20A for, for example, a few seconds will turn the main power supply ON. Also, when the main power supply of the cooking appliance 1 is ON, pressing the operation button 20A for, for example, a few seconds will turn the main power supply OFF.

Next, FIG. 5 will be described.
5, an input key 180 for selecting a voice input mode is located at the right end of the central operation unit 15M. This input key 180 may be a mechanical switch, or may be a touch-type input switch input key like input keys 153M to 159M described later.

When the input key 180 for selecting this voice input is pressed once, the next input can be made by voice.
When this input key 180 is pressed, the state switches to "voice input mode 2."
However, this input key 180 cannot be used to select the heating means or the heating port (first heating means HM1) by voice.

Therefore, input key 180 must be operated immediately after touching input key 153L ("short press") to select heating port 4L, for example. In other words, if input key 153L is "long pressed," it will switch to voice input mode 2, but if it is "short pressed" instead of "long pressed," pressing input key 180 afterwards will switch to voice input mode 2 from that point on.

When input key 180 is subsequently operated after touching any one of input keys 153M, 154M, or 155M on central operation unit 15M, the operation switches to "voice input mode 2," and the input processing unit (input restriction unit) 70 in control device 40 places voice signal analysis unit 58 (see FIG. 10) in an input standby state. Note that touching input key 180 does not affect the input functions of five keys: input key 153M, heating operation start input key 151M, stop input key 152M, and input keys 153L and 153R on left and right operation units 15L and 15R. Furthermore, "voice input mode 2" set by input key 180 is canceled when a cooking operation is started on left heating port 4L or right heating port 4R.

As described above, the "voice input mode 2" set by inputting this input key 180 differs from the "voice input mode 1" set according to the touch pattern of specific (touch-type) input keys such as the various touch-type input keys 153M, 154M, 155M, etc., as described below.

When the input key 180 is pressed, "voice input mode 2" is activated from that moment. In other words, "voice input mode 2" is entered. Then, as explained in Figure 10, when a voice signal is received from the voice signal receiving unit 56, the voice signal analyzing unit 58 analyzes the content of the voice one by one and outputs the analysis results to the heating control unit 43.

The input key 180 that selects voice input may limit the "range in which touch input is disabled" to just the central operation unit 15M. In this way, when the input key 180 is pressed, the input function of specific (touch-type) input keys, such as the various touch-type input keys 154M-159M arranged on the central operation unit 15M, as described below, is disabled. The device then transitions to an input standby state in which it can accept voice commands from the user US. Note that once the heating operation has begun, touch input cannot be disabled using this input key 180, so there are no restrictions on input of various input keys (for example, a stop command using 152M) during the heating operation.

21M is a (central) light-emitting element that constitutes part of the light-emitting unit 21. When the input function of the input key 180 or other input keys 153M, 154M, 151M, 152M, etc. is enabled, each light-emitting element 21M emits light. The light continues to emit light until the input function is disabled. Each light-emitting element 21M is equipped with one or more light-emitting elements 27 (see Figure 10) such as LEDs, which are driven by the light-emitting control unit 26 (see Figure 10).

As will be explained in detail later, the light-emitting unit 21 includes, in addition to the (center) light-emitting unit 21M, a (right) light-emitting unit 21R corresponding to the right operating unit 15R and a (left) light-emitting unit 21L corresponding to the left operating unit 15L.
These light emitting sections 21 have the function of indicating that the input function of the input key is valid and prompting the user to operate one of the input keys.
This light-emitting unit 21 also serves as a "key specifying unit." That is, in order to perform a linked operation with communication terminal 200, which will be described later, light-emitting unit 21 has a function of displaying, by light emission, an input key to be operated (for example, 152L in FIG. 6) immediately after receiving "advance notice information 1" 201 (described in FIGS. 59 and 60) from communication terminal 200. This point will be described in FIG. 61.

Here, the notice information 201 sent from the communication terminal 200 includes the notice information 1, as well as notice information 2 and notice information 3. However, notice information 1 refers to information about cooking step 1, notice information 2 refers to information about cooking step 2, and notice information 3 refers to information about cooking step 3. These will be explained in more detail later when explaining the recipe data CD for the collaborative cooking mode KM1.

In the central operation unit 15M, adjacent to the left of the input key 153M, an input key 151KP for setting functions is located. The function of this input key 151KP will be explained later.

In this embodiment 1, the input mode in which the user US controls the cooking appliance 1 by pressing with a fingertip or the like (including light contact) is referred to as the "touch input mode." For this reason, the various input keys 151M-159M, 151R-155R, and 151L-155L, which will be described later, may be referred to as the "touch input mode selection unit."

Next, FIG. 6 will be described.
6 is an enlarged view of the left display unit 16L, the left heating power display unit 17L, and the left operation unit 15L according to Embodiment 1. The left display unit 16L displays information related to cooking using the left heating port 4L, and is configured, for example, by a liquid crystal display.

The left display unit 16L displays the set time for "timer cooking" for the heated item placed on the left heating port 4L, the elapsed time since heating operation at the left heating port 4L began, or the remaining time until the timer set time expires.

The "timer cooking" mentioned above is a cooking function in which heating is performed for a period of time (set time) set (input) by the user US (for example, using the input key 151L, etc.), and since the heating operation automatically stops once the set time has elapsed, it is a convenient function for the user US.

When preheat cooking using the left heating port 4L is selected, the left display unit 16L displays the automatically set temperature (default temperature) or the current temperature. The automatically set temperature (default temperature) refers to the target temperature of the bottom of an object to be heated (e.g., a metal pot) when the object is heated using the left heating port 4L. The default temperature can be changed by the user US within a certain range. The target temperature can also be set to any desired temperature by touching the input keys 155L and 154L, for example (however, if the temperature exceeds a predetermined allowable range, the setting input will be rejected by the heating control unit 43 shown in Figure 10).

The left heating power display unit 17L is composed of multiple light-emitting elements (LEDs) arranged in a horizontal line and displays the heating power of the left heating port 4L in multiple stages. The left heating power display unit 17L indicates the heating power by switching the lighting state (on, off, flashing, etc.) of the multiple LEDs or by switching the lighting color. This allows the user US to be notified of the heating power in an intuitive and easy-to-understand manner.

The left operation section 15L is used to input operations related to cooking using the left heating port 4L.
6 , the left operation unit 15L includes five input keys 151L, 152L, 153L, 154L, and 155L. These input keys 151L, 152L, 153L, 154L, and 155L are touch keys. For example, they are capacitance-type touch sensors (touch switches) that can input information by utilizing a change in capacitance when the user US lightly touches the keys with a finger or the like.

Light-emitting units 21L are provided corresponding to the input keys 151L, 152L, 153L, 154L, and 155L. The light-emitting units 21L are composed of multiple light-emitting elements (LEDs), and emit light in response to the operation of the input keys 151L, 152L, 153L, 154L, and 155L. Note that two adjacent input keys 154L and 155L share a single light-emitting unit 21L because they perform the same function of increasing or decreasing the heat output.

The input key 151L is a key that is touched to select "timer cooking" for the left heating port 4L. As mentioned above, this timer cooking is a cooking method in which the user US sets the heating operation time and the heating operation is performed only for that set time.

The input key 152L is pressed to select a "control menu" to be implemented by the left heating port 4L. Each time the input key 152L is pressed, one of multiple control menus can be selected. "Control menus" here include, for example, boiling water, stewing, and frying (automatic cooking). The operating time, heat output, or operating pattern of the left heating port 4L differs for each control menu.

The control menu for using the left heating port 4L and right heating port 4R by operating the left operating unit 15L or right operating unit 15R without operating the central operating unit 15M is the "single cooking mode" KM3 control menu, which uses induction heating exclusively. "Single cooking mode" KM3 will be explained later.

The input key 153L is pressed to select cooking using the left heating port 4L. In other words, pressing the input key 153L selects cooking using the left IH coil 9L located below the left heating port 4L (single cooking mode KM3). If the input key 153L is pressed again while this left IH coil 9L is activated, the activation of the left IH coil 9L is stopped, and induction heating operation is immediately stopped.

The input keys 154L and 155L are pressed to specify the heat level for cooking with the left heating port 4L. Pressing the input key 154L on the left decreases the heat level by one level. Conversely, pressing the input key 155L on the right increases the heat level by one level. The heat level for induction cooking with the left heating port 4L has nine levels, ranging from the minimum rated heat level (heat level 1: 150W) to the maximum rated heat level (heat level 9: 3200W).

One input key 152L on the left operation unit 15L is set as the input key to be operated immediately after receiving "Preview Information 1" 201 from communication terminal 200 in order to perform linked operations with communication terminal 200, which will be described later. Therefore, when this key is operated at a specified timing, it functions as a "specific input key" that transmits a "confirmation signal" (selection information A) 202, which will be described later, in confirmation step SP3 (described in Figure 59). This point will be described in Figures 55 to 60. Note that input key 152L can be operated at any time, even before receiving the above-mentioned preview information 1, but when it is operated (ON), the reception restriction period (TZ1: see Figures 45, 60, and 61) begins from that point on.

Next, FIG. 7 will be described.
7 is an enlarged view of the right display unit 16R, right heating power display unit 17R, and right operation unit 15R according to embodiment 1. The right display unit 16R displays information related to cooking using the right heating port 4R and is configured, for example, with a liquid crystal display. The information related to cooking using the right heating port 4R displayed on the right display unit 16R is the same as the information related to cooking using the left heating port 4L.

The right heating power display unit 17R is composed of multiple light-emitting elements (LEDs) and displays the heating power of the right heating port 4R in multiple stages. Like the left heating power display unit 17L, the right heating power display unit 17R indicates the heating power by switching the lighting state (on, off, blinking, etc.) of the multiple light-emitting elements (LEDs) or by switching the lighting color.

The right operation unit 15R is used to input operations related to cooking using the right heating port 4R. As shown in Figure 7, the right operation unit 15R has five input keys 151R, 152R, 153R, 154R, and 155R.

The input keys 151R, 152R, 153R, 154R, and 155R are configured in the same manner as the left operation unit 15L. For example, they are configured as capacitive touch keys that can input data by utilizing the change in capacitance when the user US lightly touches them with their finger or the like.

A light-emitting unit 21R is provided corresponding to each of the input keys 151R, 152R, 153R, 154R, and 155R. The light-emitting unit 21R is a light-emitting element (LED), and when an input key 151R, 152R, 153R, 154R, or 155R is operated, the light-emitting unit 21R corresponding to that input key lights up. However, two adjacent input keys 154R and 155R share a single light-emitting unit 21R because they perform the same function of increasing or decreasing the heat output.

The input key 151R is pressed to select timer cooking for the right heating port 4R. The input key 152R is pressed to select a control menu to be implemented for the right heating port 4R.

The input key 153R is pressed to select cooking using the right heating port 4R. In other words, pressing the input key 153R selects cooking using the right IH coil 9R located below the left heating port 4R (single cooking mode KM3). If the input key 153R is pressed again while this right IH coil 9R is activated, the activation of the right IH coil 9R is stopped, and induction heating operation is immediately stopped.

Input keys 154R and 154R are pressed to specify the heat level for cooking with the right heating port 4R. Pressing the left input key 154R decreases the heat level by one level. Conversely, pressing the right input key 155R increases the heat level by one level. The heat level for induction cooking with the right heating port 4R has nine levels, ranging from the minimum rated heat level (heat level 1) of 150W to the maximum rated heat level (heat level 9) of 3200W.

The input key 152R on the right operation unit 15R, like the input key 152L on the left operation unit 15L, is a "specific input key" that transmits a "confirmation signal" (selection information A) 202 (described below) to perform linked operations with the communication terminal 200 (described below).

Next, FIG. 8 will be described.
FIG. 8 is an enlarged plan view of the central display unit 16M, the central operation unit 15M, and the central heating status display unit 17M according to the first embodiment.

The central display unit 16M displays information and warnings about the entire cooking appliance 1 and is composed of a liquid crystal display. The display screen of the central display unit 16M displays the selection result of the induction heating means (first heating means) HM1, microwave heating means (second heating means) HM2, and radiant heat heating means (third heating means) HM3, the operating status of each heating means, and caution or warning information regarding cooking using each heating means.

The central display unit 16M is a single LCD display in terms of hardware, but as shown in Figure 8, it has three display areas: a first display area 22 on the left, a second display area 23 in the center left and right, and a third display area 24 on the right, and it is possible to display different content in each display area.

The three display areas 22-24 may also be linked together as needed to form a single (large) display area depending on the display situation, and may display one or more purposes. In the following, the first display area 22 will be referred to as the first area 22. The second display area 23 will be referred to as the second area 23. The third display area 24 will be referred to as the third area 24.

The central heating status display unit 17M is divided into two levels in the front-to-back direction, and the lower level (front side) contains a microwave light-emitting element (LED) 310 behind the "microwave" character display, a grill light-emitting element (LED) 311 behind the "grill" character display, an oven light-emitting element (LED) 312 behind the "oven" character display, and a central induction light-emitting element (LED) 313 behind the "central induction" character display.

On the upper (rear) side, there are warning letters that read "Caution: High Temperature" and a group of high temperature warning light-emitting diodes (LEDs) 314 located in front of and below a diagram that schematically represents the heating chamber 6 and the three heating ports 4L, 4C, and 4R. These LEDs 311-313 and the LED group 314 are located in the installation space 33 below the top plate 3.

The high temperature warning light emitting diode (LED) group 314 consists of a heating chamber high temperature warning light emitting diode (LED) 314a and an IH high temperature warning light emitting diode (LED) 314b, which are arranged side by side.

The heating chamber high temperature warning light emitting element (LED) 314a lights up when the temperature inside the heating chamber 6 is high, for example, 50° C. or higher.
The IH high temperature warning light emitting element (LED) 314b lights up when any of the left IH coil 9L, right IH coil 9R, and center IH coil 9C is operating or when the temperature of the top plate 3 is high, for example, 50° C. or higher.

The central operation unit 15M is used to input operations mainly related to cooking using heat in the heating chamber 6 and cooking using the central heating port 4C.
As shown in FIG. 8, the central operation unit 15M includes nine input keys 151M, 152M, 153M, 154M, 155M, 156M, 157M, 158M, and 159M, and a function setting key 151KP (see FIG. 5).

The nine input keys 151M-159M mentioned above are capacitive touch keys that emit an input command signal each time they are touched. Furthermore, light-emitting units 21M are provided near each of these input keys 151M-159M.

The function setting key 151KP (see Figure 5) is located on the far left side of the central operation unit 15M. This function setting key 151KP allows the user US to set various operations and displays for the entire cooking appliance 1 as desired.

When the function setting key 151KP is pressed, the control device 40, which will be described later, switches to a "function setting mode," and displays the following "function setting menu" on the display screen of the central display unit 16M. When this specific input key 151KP is operated, selection information 202D is generated, but this selection information 202D is different from the individual selection information (202A, 202B) corresponding to the other two specific input keys (152L, 152R), and the control device 40 can identify only one of the three specific input keys based on this selection information.
(1) Child lock setting (setting to disable operation of various input keys).
(2) Setting the ventilation device to linked mode (ventilation device operation linked to the operation of the cooking appliance 1).
(3) Cleaning guide setting (setting of automatic notification function for when to clean the heating chamber 6 and exhaust port cover 5).
(4) Peak cut setting (select one of four maximum power consumption levels: 5700W, 5000W, 4800W, and 4000W).
(5) Audio guide audio settings.
(6) Audio guide volume setting.
(7) Settings to prevent forgetting to remove food, cooking utensils, etc. from the heating chamber 6 (whether or not to issue an alarm on the audio notification unit 50 and central display unit 16M).
(8) HEMS registration settings (settings related to the power usage restriction function of the home power control device).
(9) Time unit setting for timer cooking (change from 1 minute to 5 or 30 minutes).
(10) Switching between beginner mode and normal (expert) mode.
(11) Setting the type (range) of food inventory information to be acquired from an external device (refrigerator, etc.).
(12) Setting the display priority (specific cooking menu to be displayed as default, identification information 167) of each cooking menu (for example, "hamburger steak") in the cooperative cooking mode KM1.
(13) Setting the display priority (specific control menu to be displayed as default) of each control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2 (for example, "Grill in the microwave" and "Pre-boil leafy vegetables").
(14) Setting the cooking mode to be automatically displayed on the central display unit 16M when the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 is opened after the main power switch 20 is turned “ON” (such as the display priority between the linked cooking mode KM1 and the combined cooking mode KM2).
(15) A setting for preventing the automatic display of additional information 165 and 166 (see FIG. 15) described later and a setting for preventing the audio notification unit 50 from notifying the additional information 165 and 166 by audio.
(16) When individual cooking menus in the linked cooking mode KM1 are displayed on the central display unit 16M, the ingredients and nutritional components of the target food item are displayed individually each time. Note that either the food ingredients or the nutrients or both may be displayed, but in this embodiment 1, input key 158M is used as a display command key for food ingredients, and input key 159M is used as a display command key for nutritional components.
When either input key 158M or 159M is operated within a predetermined period of time, or when voice input mode 1 is set and a command is given by voice, food ingredients or nutritional ingredients are displayed. In other words, they are not always displayed together with cooking menu identification information 167 (described later) but are displayed in response to operations (including voice) by the user US. Details will be explained in FIG. 24.
(17) When selecting individual cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, cooking menu candidates are searched for based on the ingredients and nutritional information of the food and displayed on the central display unit 16M. In this case, the user US can search by voice by pressing the input key 180 to select "voice input mode 2." Details will be explained in FIG. 24.
(18) Setting the display priority of each cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM1.
Regarding the setting of specific cooking menus to be displayed by default, either the food ingredients or the nutritional components can be set as the top priority for display. By doing so, for example, the cooking menus can be displayed in ascending order of energy content (calorie value) among the nutritional components, as shown in Figure 24. Alternatively, the cooking menus can be displayed in descending order of the amount of "iron" as a nutritional component.

As explained above, when the function setting key 151KP is pressed to select "function setting mode," it is possible to add the display of food ingredients or nutritional ingredients, and it is also possible to set the display setting to be canceled later in function setting mode. This has the advantage of allowing the user US to select the information, range, and display method to be set according to their wishes.

The "beginner mode" is an optional function for people (users US) who are unfamiliar with using the cooking appliance 1. When set to beginner mode, the audio guidance provided by the audio notification unit 50 (see Figure 10) becomes more detailed and thorough. Furthermore, more audio guidance is provided for input operations using the input operation unit 15, and more information is displayed on the display screen of the central display unit 16M.

When the beginner mode is selected, particularly when cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM1, the amount of reference information (including, for example, additional information 165 and 166 described below) displayed on the display screen of the central display unit 16M increases during cooking step 1 and cooking step 2, or the content of the audio guidance provided by the audio notification unit 50 increases. Therefore, when the beginner mode is selected, the function of assisting the user US with input operations is enhanced.

In addition, in conjunction with switching from the "beginner mode" to the "normal (expert) mode," the content of the voice guidance from the voice notification unit 50 may be automatically set to remain unchanged.

When the main power switch 20 (described below) is turned "ON" and the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 is opened, the cooking mode setting automatically displayed on the central display unit 16M is either the linked cooking mode KM1 or the combined cooking mode KM2. Because both the linked cooking mode KM1 and the combined cooking mode KM2 use the same central display unit 16M, the user US can set which of the two modes to prioritize. This will be explained in more detail later.

In embodiment 1, the "combined cooking mode" KM2 exceptionally includes several control menus for the single cooking mode KM3 using the central IH coil 9M (for example, the cooking operation "cooking rice").

When the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 is opened after the main power switch 20 is turned "ON", the control device 40 detects that the door 7 has been opened.
There is a function that assumes that the user US will be cooking using the heating chamber 6, and automatically displays either the first specific screen 16M1 for the linked cooking mode KM1 or the second specific screen 16M2 for the combined cooking mode KM2 on the central display unit 16M.
The central display section 16M displays a standby initial screen 16MH (described later) immediately after the main power switch 20 is turned on. After that, the second specific screen 16M2 is automatically displayed immediately after the door 7 is opened.

After the "Function Setting Menu" is displayed on the display screen of the central display unit 16M, by "pressing and holding" (hereinafter referred to as "long pressing") a specific input key other than the function setting key 151KP (e.g., 153M) for a certain period of time or longer, one setting menu from the "Function Setting Menu" can be selected, and the user can proceed to the desired individual setting stage.

Alternatively, if two specific input keys other than the function setting key 151KP are pressed and held simultaneously, one of the setting menus from the function setting menus mentioned above can be called up and the desired settings can be changed.

The term "long press" refers to a state where the button is pressed continuously for five seconds or more, for example.
The control device 40 determines whether the state is the "long press" state by comparing the timing of the touch input from ON to OFF on the central operation unit 15M with a reference value. Alternatively, the input mode determination unit 15C (see FIG. 11) inside the central operation unit 15 determines whether the state is the "long press" state.
In this first embodiment, an example will be described (later with reference to FIG. 11) in which the central operation unit 15M determines whether or not the "long press" state is being performed.

In addition, in the central operation unit 15M, the timing when two of the input keys (e.g., 154M and 155M) are pressed simultaneously can be determined by the "ON" (touch) signal sent from the input operation unit 15M to the control device 40.

The following explanation focuses on an embodiment in which the input operation unit 15M determines whether a "long press" has occurred. However, although not adopted in embodiment 1, there is also a method in which the input operation unit 15M measures the time from the "ON" signal to the time it changes to an "OFF" signal, sends that data to the control device 40, and the control device 40 determines whether a "long press" has occurred.

In this embodiment 1, the specific input keys (153M, 154M, 153L, 153R) have a function of determining the "long press" as described above and switching to the "voice input mode 1." Note that, in order to share the functions with the specific input keys described later, the input keys 152L and 152R on the left and right operation units 15L and 15R may also be modified so as to switch to the voice input mode 1 with a "long press."
These will be explained in more detail in FIGS.
Note that a touch operation that is not a "long press," i.e., a touch state that lasts for less than five consecutive seconds, may be called a "short press." Since this is related to the detection capabilities of the input operation units 15M, 15L, and 15R, for example, the control device 40 determines that a touch time is a "short press" if the touch time is within the range of 0.1 to 4.9 seconds.

The "type of inventory information" (range) obtained from the refrigerator 331 (not shown) may be limited to, for example, frozen foods only, or to ingredients that can be heated using a microwave heating source (second heating means HM2).

When the control mode and control conditions (temperature, heat, time, etc.) for the first heating means HM1, second heating means HM2, and third heating means HM3 are being selected in the central display section 16M, the input function of the function setting key 151KP is disabled to prevent switching of the function setting mode.

Next, the setting of the peak cut value of the cooking appliance 1 will be described.
Even if the default value at the time of shipment from the manufacturer is 5400W, it can be set to any of 5000W, 4800W, or 4000W when installed in the home of the user US.

In this way, the functions of the cooking appliance 1 can be changed using the function setting key 151KP described above to suit the wishes of the user US and the usage environment (power situation in the home where the appliance is installed). When the peak cut value is set in this way, the setting result is stored in the control device 40 and is used to determine whether to permit use of the linked cooking mode KM1 (determining the permission conditions) when the user US selects the linked cooking mode KM1, as described below. Therefore, the peak cut value cannot be changed using the function setting key 151KP (see Figure 11) while recipe data CD (at least one of cooking process 1 and cooking process 2), described below, is being received from the communication terminal 200.

8, the light emitting section 21M is composed of an LED, and emits light in response to the operation of the input keys 151M to 159M. In other words, when the input function is enabled, the corresponding light emitting section 21M continues to emit light.
The two adjacent input keys 155M and 154M share one light emitting section 21M because they commonly change the display content of the first area 22.

The two adjacent input keys 157M and 156M share one light emitting section 21M because they commonly change the display content of the second area 23.
The two adjacent input keys 159M and 158M share one light emitting section 21M because they commonly change the display content of the third area 24.

Input key 151M is a start key that is pressed (touched) to start cooking, and input key 152M is a cancel key that is pressed (touched) to stop or end cooking.

When operated after the main power switch 20 is turned ON, the input key 153M selects the "linked cooking mode" KM1, and may hereinafter be referred to as the "first input key."

When input keys 154M and 155M are operated after the main power switch 20 is turned ON (without pressing input key 153M), they are used to select the "combined cooking mode" KM2, and may be referred to as the "second input keys" hereinafter.

The input keys 153R and 153L described in FIG. 7 are input keys that select the "single cooking mode" KM1 when operated after the main power switch 20 is turned ON (without pressing input keys 153M, 154M, and 155M), and may be referred to as the "third input key" hereinafter.

The input key 151M mentioned above has the function of deciding to start cooking for two cooking modes: "combined cooking mode" KM2 and "linked cooking mode" KM1, and may be referred to as the "start key" hereinafter. Note that in the "single cooking mode" KM3, the input keys 153L and 153R have the function of deciding to start cooking.

The input key 152M has the function of ending (including pausing) cooking in the two cooking modes, "combined cooking mode" KM2 and "linked cooking mode" KM1, and may be referred to as the "stop key" hereinafter. In addition, in the "single cooking mode" KM3, the input keys 153L and 153R have the function of determining the end of cooking.

The four input keys 156M to 159M have the function of allowing the user US to adjust (within a certain range) control conditions such as microwave output and cooking time, and may be referred to as the "condition input keys" or "fourth input keys" hereinafter.

The four input keys 153M, 154M, 153L, and 153R are also referred to as "voice input switching keys" that can each switch to "voice input mode 1." However, these four input keys only function as "voice input switching keys" when the touch operation is a "long press." This point will be explained in more detail later with reference to Figures 10 and 11.

When one of the single cooking mode KM3, composite cooking mode KM2, and collaborative cooking mode KM1 is selected, the selection result is displayed on the central display unit 16M. Also, when switching to "Voice Input Mode 1," a message to that effect is also displayed (see Figures 21 and 22). The contents of the single cooking mode KM3, composite cooking mode KM2, and collaborative cooking mode KM1 will be explained in detail later.

As shown in Figure 8, the input keys 154M and 155M are located adjacent to and in front of the first area 22 of the central display unit 16M, and are used to switch the display content of the screen displayed in the first area 22 of the central display unit 16M.

Next, FIG. 9 will be described.
FIG. 9 is an enlarged plan view of the central display section 16M.
When the input key 154M is pressed, that is, when the user US operates it, the content displayed in the first area 22, for example, the display information 25A of one of the control menus ("Microwave Manual") belonging to the "Composite Cooking Mode" KM2, moves backward. At the same time, the display information 25B of "Pre-boil Leafy Vegetables" displayed in the front is displayed in the center. Note that in this case, the input key 154M is the case of the "short press" described above; in the case of a "long press," it functions as the "voice input switching key," which will be described in FIG. 11.

Furthermore, when input key 155M is pressed, display information 25A for "Microwave Manual" displayed in first area 22 moves forward. Accordingly, display information 25C for "Warm" displayed at the rear is moved to the center. Note that, unlike input key 154M, input key 155M in this case is not the "voice input switch key," and therefore, even if it is "pressed and held," it will not switch to voice input mode and will not be recognized as a valid input operation.

In this way, the user US can select a specific control menu (e.g., "Manual Range") within the "Control Menu" by operating input keys 154M and 155M.

The "Microwave Manual" control menu originally belongs to the "Single Cooking Mode KM3" which uses only the second heating means HM2, but the first area 22 also displays control menus (for combined cooking) belonging to the "Combined Cooking Mode M2" and "Combined Cooking Mode KM1," as well as control menus and combined cooking menus (for example, "Hamburg Steak") belonging to combined cooking menus.

Then, when input key (start key) 151M is pressed, that is, operated by user US, the start of cooking for "Microwave Manual" on the control menu displayed in the center is confirmed (see Figure 9), and the heating operation begins. In other words, the heating means (in this case, microwave oscillation source 11) is driven. Therefore, input keys 154M and 155M correspond to the selection keys for the control menu operated by user US. Similarly, they correspond to the selection keys for the control menu (for combined cooking). Furthermore, they also correspond to the selection keys for the linked cooking menu.

As shown in Figure 8, input keys 156M and 157M are located adjacent to, and in front of, the second area 23 of the central display unit 16M, and are used to switch the display content of the screen displayed in the second area 23 of the central display unit 16M.

Referring again to FIG. 9, when input key 156M is pressed, the wattage (microwave output value) displayed in second area 23 ("500W" in FIG. 9) is increased by one step (for example, to "600W"). Conversely, when input key 157M is pressed, the wattage displayed in second area 23 is decreased by one step (for example, to "200W").

By operating input keys 156M and 157M, user US can select the wattage (microwave output value) for microwave cooking performed in heating chamber 6 (a type of "single cooking mode M1" using microwave source 11).

As shown in Figure 8, input keys 158M and 159M are located adjacent to and in front of the third area 24 of the central display unit 16M, and are used to switch the display content displayed in the third area 24.

As shown in FIG. 8, pressing input key 158M increases the heating operation time (set time) displayed in the third area 24 by one step. Conversely, pressing input key 159M decreases the heating operation time displayed in the third area 24 by one step.

In Figure 9, the user US can select the microwave cooking time setting for heating chamber 6 by operating input keys 158M and 159M. 34M is the setting time information. Setting time information 34W is heating intensity information that indicates the amount of power consumed during heating and the microwave output. In Figure 9, "500W" is displayed.

Next, FIG. 10 will be described.
FIG. 10 is a control block diagram showing the main functions of the cooking appliance 1 according to the first embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 10, the cooking appliance 1 includes a control device 40 that performs integrated control of the entire cooking appliance 1.

The control device 40 is an electronic circuit board mounted with electronic components such as control circuits that control the operation of each component of the cooking appliance 1. The control device 40 individually controls the drive conditions of the left IH coil 9L, right IH coil 9R, and center IH coil 9C based on the operation of the left operating unit 15L and right operating unit 15R and the temperature of the heated object on the top plate 3.

The control device 40 individually controls the operating conditions of the central IH coil 9C, microwave heating means 11, upper radiant heat heating means 12a, and lower radiant heat heating means 12b based on the operation of the central operation unit 15M, the temperature of the heated object on the top plate 3, and the detection results of the infrared sensor 13 and thermistor sensor 14.

In addition, the control device 40 individually controls the displays of the left display unit 16L, right display unit 16R, left heating power display unit 17L, and right heating power display unit 17R based on the operation of the left operation unit 15L and right operation unit 15R.

Furthermore, the control device 40 controls the display of the central display unit 16M and the central heating status display unit 17M based on the open signal from the open/close detection unit 10 and the operation of the left operation unit 15L, right operation unit 15R, and central operation unit 15M.

The control device 40 has a storage device 41 that stores various programs and parameter data used to control the cooking appliance 1 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "control data"), as well as display control data (hereinafter referred to as "display condition data") displayed on each display unit 16L, 16R, 16M, 17L, and 17R. The control device 40 also activates the audio notification unit 50 as needed, and audibly notifies the user US of the operating status of the cooking appliance 1.

The control device 40 stores data in a specific format, including information on various programs and parameters used for cooking control by the heating control unit 43, in the recipe data storage unit 42 of the storage device 41. This data is the recipe data CD mentioned above. As will be explained later, the cooking appliance 1 is initially provided with recipe data CD corresponding to each of a total of eight cooking menus in order to execute the linked cooking mode KM1.

The recipe data CD and the "display condition data" can be obtained by the cooking appliance 1 for each individual cooking menu from an external device such as the communication terminal 200.

42 is a storage unit that stores the recipe data CD and display condition data. Note that the storage unit 42 may constitute a section (area) within the storage device 41, or may be configured as a separate unit from the storage device 41 in terms of hardware.

Reference numeral 43 denotes a heating control section that performs integrated control of the overall heating operation of the cooking appliance 1, and is mainly composed of a microcomputer.
Reference numeral 53 denotes a data acquisition unit, which is capable of acquiring the recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 via the communication unit 51. In addition, the display condition data may also be acquired from the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300 via the communication unit 51.

1 and 2, a communication unit 51 has a function of performing wireless communication 330 (330BT) with the communication terminal 200. Alternatively, the communication unit 51 has a function of performing wireless communication with the cloud server 300 via the network NW.
The communication unit 51 has a first communication unit 51B (not shown) and a second communication unit 51W (not shown) that are compatible with at least two communication methods, as will be described later. The first communication unit 51B is compatible with Bluetooth (registered trademark), since the communication method with the communication terminal 200 is Bluetooth (registered trademark). In addition, the second communication unit 51W (not shown), which is compatible with a wireless LAN communication method such as Wi-Fi (registered trademark), is used as the communication method with the wireless router 340, and therefore has a function compatible with this communication method.

Reference numeral 54 denotes a permission condition determination unit that performs a process of determining whether cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 or the combined cooking mode KM2 is permitted.
A power supply circuit 57 supplies constant voltage power to the control device 40. A main power switch 20 is inserted into the power supply circuit 57 and is opened and closed by the user US.
With regard to the recipe data CD relating to the collaborative cooking mode KM1, the permission condition determination unit 54 determines whether cooking is permitted at the stage of receiving the first part M1 that sets cooking process 1, as described below, and if permission is not permitted at that stage, the process does not proceed to the acquisition process of the second part M2 of cooking process 2.

A limiting unit 55 limits the acquisition of the recipe data CD.
The restriction unit 55 has the function of restricting the data acquisition unit 53 from acquiring the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51 during the waiting period before starting cooking in the collaborative cooking mode KM1 (i.e., before the "cooking process 1" described below).

Furthermore, the restriction unit 55 has a function of restricting the acquisition of new recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 until the cooking steps of one cooking menu are completed based on recipe data CD acquired from an external source. In the case of recipe data CD for carrying out one cooking menu with multiple cooking steps, such as cooking step 1 and cooking step 2, cooking step 1 and cooking step 2 are treated as a whole as one recipe data CD.
The restriction unit 55 may be realized by a single control program of a computer (not shown) that constitutes the control device 40, and it is not necessarily required that the restriction unit 55 be configured separately on hardware from the control device 40.

As shown in FIG. 10, the input operation unit 15 has an audio signal receiving unit 56 that receives audio uttered by the user US via a microphone (not shown) and converts it into a predetermined audio signal.

Meanwhile, the control device 40 is equipped with an audio signal analysis unit 58 that receives audio signals from the audio signal receiving unit 56 and analyzes the content of the audio. The audio signal analysis unit 58 compares the content of the audio received by the audio signal receiving unit 56 with information in the audio database stored in the storage device 41, analyzes the content of the audio, and transmits the analysis results to the heating control unit 43.

70 is an input processing unit. This input processing unit 70 receives an input signal from the input operation unit 15 and switches its own input reception mode to "voice input mode 1." It also controls the input signal analysis unit 52. Furthermore, it receives the analysis results from the voice signal analysis unit 58 and transmits control data to the heating control unit 43.

In Figure 10, 59 is a human detection sensor. It also has a receiving unit (not shown) that emits ultrasonic or infrared rays in front of the cooking appliance 1 and receives the reflected input. Note that there is no dedicated circuit for processing the signal received by the receiving unit; instead, the control device 40 analyzes the received signal and determines whether or not a person is present.

As shown in the dashed frame in FIG. 10, the audio notification unit 50 and the display unit 16 may be collectively referred to as the "notification unit," and in this case, the reference numeral 90 is used.
Reference numeral 26 denotes a light-emitting control unit. This light-emitting control unit controls the light emission of a large number of light-emitting elements. The light-emitting elements 27A, which are composed of LEDs or the like and are arranged in the light-emitting units 21 (21M, 21L, 21R), and the light-emitting elements 27B, which are arranged on the input keys 154M, have their light-emitting control unit 26 controlling their light emission. When two or more light-emitting elements 27 with different light-emitting colors are arranged in one location, the light-emitting states of the multiple light-emitting elements provide a visual effect to the user US as if the light-emitting color is changing.

In FIG. 10, reference numeral 52 denotes an input signal analysis unit that analyzes the input signal from the input operation unit 15 .
The input signal analysis unit 52 individually analyzes the input signals transmitted from the right operation unit 15R, the left operation unit 15L, and the central operation unit 15M. In particular, the input signal analysis unit 52 has a determination function for determining whether the input mode switching command (voice input mode corresponding signal) MC1 has been received. When it determines that the input mode switching command (voice input mode corresponding signal) MC1 has been received, it issues a switching command to switch the input mode from the "touch input mode" to the "voice input mode 1."

In the following explanation, the "input mode switching command MC1" will be referred to as the "voice input mode corresponding signal MC1." When the input processing unit 70 receives this voice input mode corresponding signal MC1, it issues a control signal to the voice signal analysis unit 52 to transition to a voice input standby state (for example, to start a dedicated voice analysis program).

As described with reference to FIG. 7, the right operation unit 15R has various input keys (153R, 154R, 151R, etc.), and the touch input results of these input keys are sent to the input signal analysis unit 52.
In particular, when the input key 152R, which is one of the "voice input switching keys," is touched, the right operation unit 15R determines whether the touch state is a "long press" or a "short press," and the determination result (a command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40.

Similarly, the left operation section 15R has various input keys (153L, 154L, 151L, etc.), and the touch input results of these input keys are sent to the input signal analysis section 52.
In particular, when input key 152L, which is one of the "voice input switching keys", is touched, left operation unit 15L determines whether the touch state is a "long press" or a "short press", and the determination result (a command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to control device 40. Note that input keys 153R and 153L may also be included in the "voice input switching keys".

Furthermore, the central operation unit 15M has various input keys (153M, 154M, 155M, 156M, etc.), and the touch input results of these input keys are sent to the input signal analysis unit 52.
In particular, when input keys 153M and 154M, which are one of the "voice input switching keys," are touched, the central operation unit 15M determines whether the touch state is a "long press" or a "short press," and the determination result (a command signal for voice input mode 1) is input to the control device 40.

Next, FIG. 11 will be described.
Fig. 11 is a block diagram illustrating the relationship between the control device 40 and the central operation unit 15M. The audio signal receiving unit 56 described in Fig. 10 is not shown. The right operation unit 15R and the left operation unit 15L have basically the same configuration as the central operation unit 15M.

In FIG. 11, 15A is an input key identification unit. This input key identification unit 15A identifies the input key that has been touched. For example, when input key 153M is touched, an identification signal unique to that input key is emitted. Also, when input key 154M is touched, an identification signal unique to that input key is emitted.

Reference numeral 15B denotes a touch detection unit. When a fingertip FG of a user US or the like approaches the touch electrode unit, the detection circuit generates an "ON" signal, and when the fingertip FG moves away, the detection circuit generates an "OFF" signal.
A time measurement unit 15T measures the elapsed time from when the touch detection unit 15B outputs an "ON" signal to when the touch detection unit 15B changes to an "OFF" signal, and transmits measured time data.

15C is an input mode determination unit. This input mode determination unit 15C receives measured time data from the time measurement unit 15T, and, as mentioned above, determines that the input mode is "voice input mode 1" if the measured time is 5 seconds or more, with the 5-second threshold as the boundary. If the measured time is less than this threshold, it determines that the input mode is a normal "short press" operation.

The input mode determination unit 15C sends a signal (voice input mode corresponding signal MC1) indicating the determination result of whether or not "voice input mode 1" is selected to the control device 40.

15D is a memory unit. This memory unit 15D stores various control parameters and thresholds for the touch detection unit 15A, time measurement unit 15T, input mode determination unit 15C, etc., as well as program information for the determination process.

Reference numeral 15E denotes a central processing unit (CPU) that performs various information processing operations as an input operation unit (central operation unit 15M).
An input signal transmitting unit 15F transmits the above-mentioned unique identification signal of the input key and a voice input mode corresponding signal MC1 as a result of determining whether or not the mode is "voice input mode 1" to the input signal analyzing unit 58 of the control device 40.

In Figure 11, the touch detection unit 15A, time measurement unit 15T, input mode determination unit 15C, etc. are depicted as individual, independent blocks, but rather than being configured as separate hardware, each of these functions may be realized, for example, by software on a single microcomputer.

In addition, while Figure 11 illustrates the central operation unit 15M as an example, the control device 40 also identifies inputs from the right operation unit 15R and left operation unit 15L as being from each operation unit. Therefore, in the input key identification unit 15A of the right operation unit 15R, data identifying the input key as being present on the right operation unit 15R is included in the signal from the input key. The same is true for the left operation unit 15L.

As is clear from the above description, the cooking device 1 described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11 has the following features:
a first heating means HM1 for induction heating an object to be heated on the top plate 3;
a heating chamber 6 having metal walls;
a second heating means HM2 for supplying microwaves to the heating chamber 6;
a third heating means HM3 for heating the heating chamber 6 with radiant heat;
a notification unit 90;
a communication unit 51;
A display unit 16;
The configuration includes a control device 40.

,
The control device 40 displays a standby initial screen 16MH (described in FIG. 41) on the display unit 16, and then displays a display screen (first specific screen 16M1 to third specific screen 16M3) dedicated to each cooking mode. The first specific screen 16M1 to third specific screen 16M3 will be described in FIGS. 15 to 22 and 42.

There are three cooking modes: single cooking mode KM3, combined cooking mode KM2, and cooperative cooking mode KM1.

The single cooking mode KM3 has the following three types.
(1) IH only mode in which the first heating means HM1 is operated alone; (2) Range only cooking mode in which the second heating means HM2 is operated alone; (3) Oven only cooking mode in which the third heating means HM3 is operated alone.

The combined cooking mode KM2 is a heating pattern in which cooking is performed in the heating chamber 6 by simultaneously operating both the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3, or by automatically operating them at different times.

The cooperative cooking mode KM1 is a heating pattern in which the second heating means HM2, the third heating means HM3, or both, and the first heating means HM1 are operated sequentially, followed by a heating pause period P3 (transition period TR) whose length is determined by a command from the user US.

The control device 40 has an operation program for executing the three cooking modes KM1 to KM3.
The data acquisition unit 53 of the control device 40 can acquire the recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200 via the communication unit 51 .

In the input operation section 15, the "voice input mode 2" can be selected by using the input key 180 provided on the central operation section 15M.
Furthermore, among the input keys arranged on the central operation unit 15M, the right operation unit 15R, and the left operation unit 15L, certain input keys (152L, 152R, 153M, 154M) can select "voice input mode 1" depending on the "long press" state, which is one of the touch modes.

(3. Configuration of the control menu of the central operation unit)
Next, the selectable control menu displayed on the central display unit 16M by the central operation unit 15M will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 12 shows the entire control menu that can be selected using the central operation unit 15M.
The control menus that can be selected by the central operating unit 15M are divided into an RG (range grill) menu group that uses the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2) and one or both of the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b, and an IH menu group that uses the central IH coil 9C corresponding to the central heating port 4C.

Figure 13 shows the control menu shown in Figure 12 categorized into four perspectives (categories 1 to 4). As is clear from Figure 13, the control menu is broadly divided into a single cooking mode KM3 and a combined cooking mode KM2. Note that although Figures 12 and 13 do not show the combined cooking mode KM1, the central operation unit 15M can execute a combined cooking menu using the combined cooking mode.

When the main power switch 20 is turned "ON" and input key 154M or 155R is pressed without operating input key 153M on the central operation unit 15M, composite cooking mode KM2 is selected.

Therefore, the display screen of the central display section 16M is switched to the second specific screen 16M2 (see FIG. 15).
In the first area 22 of the second specific screen 16M2, the control menu "Warm" shown in the "Left Display Area" of Fig. 12 is always displayed first because this control menu "Warm" is set as the default.

The "left display area" in Figure 12 is a display area that corresponds to the first area 22 described in Figure 8. In other words, the various control menus shown in the "left display area" in Figure 12 are displayed sequentially in the first area 22.

As shown in the "left display area" of Figure 12, in addition to "Warm," there are a total of 13 control menus: "Microwave manual," "Pre-boil leafy vegetables," "Pre-boil root vegetables," "Meat defrosting," "Microwave grill (RG) cooking," "Microwave grill (RG) reheat," "Microwave grill (RG) manual," "Grill," "Oven," "IH keep warm," "IH rice cooking," and "IH heating."

The control menus "Warm,""Microwavemanual,""Pre-boil leafy vegetables,""Pre-boil root vegetables,""Defrostmeat,""Microwave grill (RG) cooking,""Microwave grill (RG) reheat,""Microwave grill (RG) manual,""Grill," and "Oven" are included in the RG menu group.
Furthermore, "IH keep warm", "IH rice cooking", and "IH heating" are included in the "IH menu group" that uses the first heating means HM1.

The content shown in the "Central Display Area" in Figure 12 is the content displayed in the second area 23 of the central display unit 16M, and relates to adjusting the heating conditions during cooking, such as temperature, time, heat, "high," or "low." In other words, the "Central Display Area" lists various control conditions. The default settings for this "Central Display Area" are listed in the "Default" column in the right column of the "Central Display Area."

The content written in the "right display area" in Figure 12 indicates the content displayed in the third area 24 of the central display unit 16M. The default settings for the "right display area" are listed in the "Default" column in the right column of the "right display area." Blank spaces do not indicate control conditions that can be changed, but rather indicate that no information is displayed, or that appropriate explanatory text that cannot be selected or changed (by the user US) is displayed in the third area 24.

Next, a total of 13 types of control menus displayed in the "left display area" of FIG. 12 will be described.
(1) Warming: This refers to heating the food in the heating chamber 6 using the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2). This "warming" mode is also suitable for reheating food. The default setting is "80°C," so microwave heating automatically stops when the food reaches 80°C. Note that "80°C" is the target temperature, which can be adjusted by the user US before heating begins. As shown in the central display area of Figure 12, the temperature can be set in 5-degree increments within the range of 0°C to 90°C, for example.

(2) Manual microwave operation: This refers to heating the food in the heating chamber 6 using the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2). The heating time is set by the user US to a specific time between 10 seconds and 60 minutes.

(3) Parboiling leafy vegetables: This is suitable for boiling food items in the heating chamber 6 using microwave heating means (second heating means HM2), particularly vegetables whose leaves are edible, such as spinach and Chinese cabbage. The infrared sensor 13 measures the temperature rise of the food items in real time and automatically stops cooking.

(4) Parboiling root vegetables: This is suitable for boiling food items in the heating chamber 6, particularly roots, rhizomes, potatoes, and other root vegetables, using microwave heating means (second heating means HM2).

(5) Meat thawing: The heating chamber 6 is suitable for thawing various kinds of frozen meat.
(6) Range Grill (RG) Cooking: The food to be cooked in the heating chamber 6 is cooked by combining microwave heating using a microwave heating means (second heating means HM2) with oven heating using the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b.

(7) Range Grill (RG) Re-cooking: Suitable for re-heating food that has already been cooked in the heating chamber 6.
(8) Range Grill (RG) Manual: The user US selects between microwave heating and oven heating as appropriate to heat and cook the food in the heating chamber 6.

(9) Grill: This uses one or both of the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b to heat food in the heating chamber 6. In other words, this is a control menu that uses the third heating means HM3.

The "Grill" control menu does not manage the temperature of the heating chamber 6, nor does it detect a rise in the temperature of the food being cooked and stop the heating operation. The heating operation is performed for a period of time specified by the user US, within a range of 10 seconds to 30 minutes.

(10) Oven: An oven that uses one or both of the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b to heat the food in the heating chamber 6. The temperature of the heating chamber 6 is measured in real time by a thermistor sensor 14, and the power supply to the upper radiant heat heating means 12a and the lower radiant heat heating means 12b is controlled so that the set target temperature is reached.

(11) IH Warm: Heats an object to be heated, such as a pot, placed above the central heating port 4C to maintain the temperature set by the user US. The induction heating power ranges from low to medium, ranging from 200W to 750W. A temperature sensor (not shown) installed near the central IH coil 9C detects the temperature of the object to be heated in real time, and the heating control unit 43 of the control device 40 controls the heat power based on the detected temperature. The default temperature is 80°C, as shown in Figure 12. For example, this is suitable for keeping soup warm.

(12) IH rice cooking: Heats rice according to the number of servings (amount of rice cooked) set by the user US. The induction heating power ranges from low to high, ranging from 200W to 1500W. A temperature sensor (not shown) installed near the central IH coil 9C is used to detect abnormal heating of the heated object (also called an overheated state or overheating; the same applies below). If an abnormal temperature is detected, the control device 40 will reduce the heating power or stop the heating operation.

(13) IH heating: Heats according to the induction heating power set by the user US. There are five levels of power that can be set: Power 1: 200W, Power 2: 500W, Power 3: 750W, Power 4: 1000W, and Power 5: 1500W. A temperature sensor (not shown) installed near the central IH coil 9C is used to detect abnormal heating of the heated object, and if an abnormal temperature is detected, the control device 40 will reduce the power or stop the heating operation. The default power is 500W.

Next, FIG. 13 will be described.
FIG. 13 is a classification table of the RG control menu ("RG menu group" in FIG. 12) and the IH control menu ("IH menu group" in FIG. 12) of the single cooking mode KM3 using the first heating means HM1.

The "left display area" of the first region in Figure 12 refers to the first area 22 (see Figure 8). As is clear from category 2 in Figure 13, the names of the control menus are also displayed in text in the first area 22 of the central display section 16M, and are used by the user US to select the control menu.

Next, FIG. 14 will be described.
FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram showing the storage structure of various cooking control menus for the cooperative cooking mode and the combined cooking mode, and the correspondence between the menus and input keys.
The "information indicating the main points of each control menu" shown in category 2 in FIG. 13 is stored as data in the third layer of the recipe data storage unit 42 as shown in FIG.

Therefore, by operating input keys 154M and 155M to select the desired control menu, the user US can automatically or optionally display information indicating the key points of each control menu shown in Category 2 in Figure 13, which corresponds one-to-one (is linked) to that control menu. Figure 15 shows an example of this automatic display.

Next, FIG. 15 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram illustrating the display operation of the central display unit 16M when the central operation unit 15M is operated.
First, when the user US turns on the main power by pressing the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 (see FIG. 10), the input functions of the left operation unit 15L, the central operation unit 15M, and the right operation unit 15R become active. That is, the control device 40 enters a state in which it can receive operation signals from each of these operation units 15L, 15M, and 15R, and a predetermined screen (hereinafter referred to as the "standby initial screen" 16MH) (see FIG. 41) is displayed on the central display unit 16M, although this is not shown.

In this state, when the user US presses the input key 154M or 155M, the display screen 15ST is displayed as shown in FIG.
FIG. 15 shows the second specific screen 16M2.
As is clear from the display screen 15ST, the name (identification information) 160 of the control menu "Warm" is displayed large in the center of the first area 22 in the front-to-back direction.

The control menu identification information 160 for "Warm" is displayed in the center of the first area 22, and behind it are the words "IH Heat" (control menu identification information) 161. Conversely, the words "Microwave Manual" (control menu identification information) 162 are displayed in slightly smaller size in front of it.

As a result, when the user US selects a control menu, it is clear that the next options are "IH heating" and "Microwave manual." If, at this stage, the input key 154M is pressed once, the control menu identification information 162 for "Microwave manual" is displayed larger, as if it has moved (backward) to the position of the character "Warm" (control menu identification information) 160. Note that the character of the control menu identification information 162 does not actually move; the displayed information has simply switched.

Furthermore, when the input key 155M is pressed once, the characters "IH heating" (control menu identification information) 161 are displayed larger, as if they have moved (forward) to the position of the characters "warm" (control menu identification information) 160. Note that in this case too, the control menu identification information 162 has not actually moved; the displayed information has simply switched.

As shown in Figure 15, the display screen 15ST displays a target temperature of "80°C" in the second area 23. When microwave heating is performed at this target temperature, the heating operation will automatically stop when the temperature of the food reaches 80°C. In other words, when the infrared sensor 13 detects that the food is at 80°C, the microwave heating will automatically stop.

If you want to change the temperature displayed in this second area 23 and change the automatic stop temperature, simply operate input key 156M or 157M. Pressing input key 156M once will raise the temperature by 5°C to 85°C, as shown on display screen 15UP1. Pressing input key 157M once will lower the temperature by 5°C to 75°C, as shown on display screen 15DN1.

In addition, the second area 23 displays a heat source display section 163 that indicates in text that the heat source is a microwave heating means (second heating means HM2).

As mentioned above, reference information 164 is automatically displayed to indicate that this is a recommended control menu for reheating side dishes, etc. The content of this reference information may be other additional information 165, and two or more types of information may be displayed alternately or sequentially for a few seconds each on the display screen of the central display unit 16M (e.g., third area 24).

Furthermore, as shown in category 2 in FIG. 13, information (reference information) 164 indicating the main points of each control menu may be displayed at any time in response to the operation of the input key 158 or 159 .
In other words, in this embodiment 1, the reference information 164 that corresponds one-to-one with each control menu (e.g., "warming") is displayed so that the user US does not have to be confused about whether to select each control menu (e.g., "warming").

Furthermore, when reference information 164 is displayed as shown in FIG. 15, if one of the (two) input keys 158M or 159M located in front of the reference information 164 is touched, more detailed additional information 166 may be displayed in the third area 24 instead of the reference information 164.

As shown in Figure 15, the aforementioned "combined cooking mode" KM2 is a mode in which multiple heating means with different heating principles, such as the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3, are driven simultaneously or automatically switched with a time lag to heat and cook a common food item.

In Figure 15, the display screen shown in the central display section 16M is a dedicated display screen for the "combined cooking mode" KM2, and is called the second specific screen 16M2.

Next, a description will be given of FIGS.
16 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the central display unit 16M and the central operation unit 15M in the combined cooking mode KM2, illustrating the operation procedure before the start of the heating operation.

In FIG. 16, FG indicates the fingertip of the user US.
When the main power switch 20 is turned "ON" to start the control device 40 and the input key 154M or 155M on the central operation unit 15M is pressed, the standby initial screen 16MH (see Fig. 41) is switched to the second specific screen 16M2 as shown in Fig. 16. In other words, this is the setting operation screen for the "combined cooking mode" KM2 such as a single cooking mode such as microwave heating or microwave grill (RG) cooking.

If input key 153M is pressed before input key 154M or 155M, the input process changes to the cooperative cooking mode KM1. In other words, from that point on, the standby initial screen 16MH (see FIG. 41) switches to the first specific screen 16M1 (see FIGS. 19 to 22).

When either input key 154M or 155M is pressed with fingertip FG as described above, three control menu candidates for multiple composite cooking modes KM2 are displayed in the first area 22 of the display screen (second specific screen) 16M2 of the central display unit 16M.
That is, three pieces of identification information (including a graphic mark and the name of the food item) 160, 161, and 162 are displayed to identify the three control menus one-to-one. Among these, the position where the identification information 160 of one control menu is displayed may be hereinafter referred to as "display position A."

In this Figure 16, there are three control menus displayed in the central display section 16M: "Warm," "IH Heating," and "Manual Microwave." The number of control menus is referred to as the "number of control menus for complex cooking."

In this embodiment 1, the positions where identification information 161 and 162 are displayed may hereinafter be referred to as "display position B" and "display position C," respectively.

In this embodiment 1, the control menu displayed at "Display Position A" ("Warm" in Figure 16) has the highest selection priority. In other words, when input key 151M is pressed in the state shown in Figure 16, the heating operation starts with "Warm."

In Figure 16, if input key 154M, located immediately to the right of input key 155M, is touched (a normal "short press" operation), "Range Manual" is displayed in display position A.

Also, to change the target temperature of 85°C for "Warm," simply touch input key 156M or 157M. In this case, even if you use a "long press" instead of the usual "short press" operation, you will only be able to input the normal temperature change. In other words, you cannot change to voice input mode 1 using input key 156M or 157M.

In Figure 16, one light-emitting element 21M corresponding to an input key 153M is marked with a star-shaped symbol, which indicates that the light-emitting element 21M in question flashes (or emits light in a color different from the other light-emitting elements) and can be operated.

As is clear from Figure 16, when the control menu is displayed in the first area 22, one of the light-emitting elements 21M corresponding to the input keys 156M and 157M does not yet blink (or emit light in a color different from the other light-emitting elements). This indicates that input operations are not possible.

Next, FIG. 17 will be described.
As is clear from Figure 17, after the control menu is displayed in the first area 22, one of the light-emitting elements 21M corresponding to the input keys 156M and 157M flashes (or emits light in a color different from the other light-emitting elements), indicating that it is possible to input control conditions such as heating time and temperature.

Also, in Figure 17, one light-emitting element 21M corresponding to an input key 151M is circled with a dashed line, which indicates that the light-emitting element 21M is flashing (or emitting light in a different color than the other light-emitting elements) and waiting for a command to start cooking.

Incidentally, in FIG. 17, when input key 154M, one of the "voice input switching keys," is touched, if the touch state is a "long press," a mark 154V indicating that the mode has been switched to "voice input mode 1" is displayed by light-emitting element 27B (see FIG. 10) so as to surround the touched portion of input key 154M. In other words, light-emitting element 27B (see FIG. 10), such as an LED, arranged below top plate 3 lights up in response to a signal from light-emission control unit 26, displaying a frame as shown in FIG. 17 around input key 154M. Alternatively, the entire touched portion of input key 154M can be illuminated from below, making it clearly distinguishable from other input keys.

When the mark 154V is displayed, the control unit 55 of the control device 40 is already in a state (hereinafter also referred to as an "input standby state") in which it can receive input of "control conditions" (temperature, heating time, etc.), which are lower-level commands in the control menu (e.g., "warm up"), via the audio signal receiving unit 56 (see Figure 10).

Therefore, instead of inputting control conditions by touching input keys 156M or 157M, the user US can input control conditions by voice.

Next, FIG. 18 will be described.
As is clear from Fig. 18, after the mark 154V is displayed, one of the light-emitting elements 21M corresponding to the input keys 156M and 157M does not blink (or emit light in a color different from the other light-emitting elements). This indicates that it is not recommended to use these input keys to input control conditions such as heating time and temperature. However, when switched to "voice input mode 1", the input functions of input keys that are not necessary for voice input are restricted, so after the mark 154V is displayed, input by touch operation is not possible with the input keys 156M and 157M (if set to voice input mode 1A).
In order to maintain the touch input function of specific input keys (such as 156M) for inputting control conditions even after switching to voice input mode, it is necessary to set the mode to the "voice input mode 1B" as described above.

As is clear from Figure 18, after the mark 154V is displayed, auxiliary information 179 for voice input mode 1 is displayed in the larger display area combining the second area 23 and the third area 24.

There are three types of auxiliary information 179: voice input mode display information 179A, which indicates that voice input is being accepted because the device is in voice input mode, and information 179B and 179C, which indicate the range and numerical values of the control conditions that can be entered.

The information 179B is the condition shown in "area 2" explained in Fig. 12. In other words, it indicates that the user US can only select from the range of 0°C to 90°C.
The information 179C is the condition shown in "Area 2" also explained in Fig. 12. In other words, it indicates that the user US can only select a temperature range from -10°C to 0°C in the "warm" control menu for microwave heating of frozen food.

The auxiliary information 179 (179A-179C) shown in Figure 18 allows the user US to input information by voice, and by indicating in advance the range of control conditions that can be input by voice, unnecessary voice input and the utterance of inappropriate conditions can be avoided, thereby improving the operability of the user US.

As is clear from Figure 18, after the mark 154V is displayed, the auxiliary information 179 for voice input mode 1 remains displayed in the large display area combining the second area 23 and the third area 24, which does not meet the conditions for starting the heating operation.
That is, in the state of Fig. 18, pressing (touch operation) the input key (start key) 151M is not recommended as in Fig. 17. Therefore, the light emitting unit 21M is not in a state of emitting light (flashing).

In other words, in this embodiment 1, after switching to voice input mode, if the specified control conditions have not been input (the state shown in Figure 18), heating operation cannot be started.

Next, FIG. 19 will be described.
19 is a plan view showing the relationship between the display operation of the central display unit 16M and the central operation unit 15M in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, showing the stage before the start of the heating operation.

In Figure 19, when the main power switch 20 is turned "ON" to start the control device 40 and the input key 153M on the central operation unit 15M is pressed, the standby initial screen 16MH (see Figure 41) switches to the first specific screen 16M1 shown in Figure 19.

If input key 154M or 155M is pressed before input key 153M, the input process changes to that for combined cooking mode KM2, and second specific screen 16M2 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 16.

In addition, even if input key 155M or 156M has been pressed first and the setting operation for "combined cooking mode" KM2, such as a single cooking mode such as microwave heating or microwave grill (RG) cooking, has been completed halfway, if this is before input key 151M is pressed, the input process for "combined cooking mode" KM3 will change from the point at which input key 153M is pressed. In other words, from this point on, only the first specific screen 16M1 will be displayed in the central display section 16M.

Figure 19 shows the state immediately after pressing the input key 153M, in which the identification information 167 of a specific cooking menu item (e.g., hamburger steak) set as the default is displayed in the first area 22.

If input key 154M or 155M is touched after input key 153M, further identification information (including a graphic mark and the name of the food item) 168 or 169 is displayed in the first area 22 of the display screen (first identification screen) 16M1 of the central display unit 16M to identify the food item that is the target of multiple linked cooking modes KM1 (the linked cooking menu).

In this Figure 19, the number of "foods" that can be cooked in the linked cooking mode displayed in the central display section 16M is three. That is, there are three: hamburger steak, gratin, and roast beef. In this way, the number of foods to be cooked is called the "number of linked cooking menus."

In this first embodiment, there are a total of eight linked cooking menus. Details are explained in Figure 25. However, it is possible to further increase the number of linked cooking menus by obtaining recipe data CD from the smartphone (communications terminal) 200, which will be described later.

In Figure 19, 167, 168, and 169 are identification information, which in this embodiment 1 is information that indicates the name of the food to be cooked (e.g., hamburger steak, gratin, roast beef) one-to-one. Note that when describing all the "identification information" for the collaborative cooking menu KM1, reference number 167 will be used.

The position where the control menu identification information 160 described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 18 is displayed is called "display position A."
In contrast, in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the position where the identification information 167 is displayed is also display position A.

In this embodiment 1, the positions where identification information 160 and identification information 167 are displayed are the same, "display position A," but they may be set to different positions. However, to avoid confusion for the user US, in the linked cooking mode KM1, the eight linked cooking menus are always displayed in the same position (display position A). Also, in the combined cooking mode KM2, it is a good idea to always use the same (single) "display position A" for each control menu.

As shown in Figure 19, heating unit specification sections 171L and 171R are displayed. By touching the input keys 156M and 157M located adjacent to these heating unit specification sections 171L and 171R, you can select either the right IH coil 9R or the left IH coil 9L at this stage.

In the combined cooking mode KM2, control conditions such as heat level can be input by operating the input keys 156M and 157M, but this central operation unit 15M does not allow input of such control conditions for either the right IH coil 9R or the left IH coil 9L. Control conditions are input using the input keys 154R and 154L on the right operation unit 15R or the left operation unit 15L. Note that such control conditions can be input using the corresponding left or right operation unit 15L or 15R after the cooking process has started.
If the input keys 154M and 155M are not operated (within a certain time), the process automatically proceeds to the next step, and the display screen is switched to that of FIG.

Referring to FIG. 20 .
20, the user US can select either the right IH coil 9R or the left IH coil 9L by operating the adjacent input keys 157M and 156M on the left and right. In this embodiment, the left heating unit 4L is set as the default, and operation of the input keys 157M and 156M is not essential.

In Figure 20, the operation support information 170 displays "Press the start button to start heating with the left IH." This means that by pressing input key 151M on the central operation unit 15M, induction heating (cooking process 1) (in linked cooking mode KM1) can be started with the left IH coil 9L. However, in this embodiment 1, it is necessary to press input key 153L on the left operation unit 15L after pressing input key 151M.

As shown in FIG. 20, above (behind in plan view) the identification information 167 shown on the first specific screen 16M1, identification information 168 indicating the name of another dish (e.g., gratin) is displayed.

Furthermore, below the identification information 167, identification information 169 indicating the name of another food item (e.g., roast beef) is displayed. In FIG. 20, one light-emitting element 21M corresponding to an input key 151M is circled with a dashed line, which indicates that the light-emitting element 21M is flashing (or emitting light in a different color than the other light-emitting elements) and waiting for a command to start cooking.

Each time either input key 154M or 155M is operated once, the identification information 167 indicating the name of the food to be cooked (e.g., hamburger steak) changes its display by moving up or down one step at a time. In other words, by moving forward and backward, the identification information 167 can be displayed sequentially at a predetermined position (front-to-back center position) in the first area 22, in other words, at the display position B.

In this embodiment 1, as mentioned above, there are a total of eight types of food to be cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM1. Therefore, for example, if the left input key 155M is operated eight times, the identification information 167 of one food to be cooked (e.g., hamburger steak) will cycle through. Conversely, if the right input key 154M is operated eight times, the identification information 167 of one food to be cooked (e.g., hamburger steak) will cycle through.

After selecting a cooking menu (e.g., hamburger steak), as described above, it is necessary to select the left and right heating units 4L, 4R or input control conditions (e.g., preheating temperature), and then issue a command to start the heating operation using input key 151M.

As described above, inputting the left and right heating elements 4L, 4R and control conditions (e.g., preheat temperature) requires multiple touch operations by pressing either input key 154M or 155M individually. This is also true for the aforementioned combined cooking mode KM2. For example, as explained in FIG. 12, the temperature setting for "warming" can be selected from the range of 0 to 90°C, but each of input keys 156M and 157M can only be used to increase (or decrease) the temperature by 5°C with a single touch operation. Therefore, to input, for example, 15°C, three touch operations ("short presses") are required.

In this embodiment 1, in order to reduce the need for tedious input operations, in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, while the identification information 167 of one cooking menu is displayed in a predetermined position B in the first area 22, as shown in Figures 19 and 20, the input key 154M can be used to switch to voice input mode.

As mentioned above, when touching input key 154M, which is one of the voice input switching keys, if the touch state is "press and hold," mark 154V indicating that the mode has been switched to voice input mode is displayed, surrounding the touched portion of input key 154M, as shown in Figure 20.

Referring to FIG.
At the timing when the mark 154V indicating that the mode has been switched to voice input mode is displayed, voice input mode display information 179A indicating that voice input is being accepted may be displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 as auxiliary information 179, as shown in FIG. 21.

In the state shown in Figure 21, the left and right heating sections 4L and 4R have not yet been selected, but if the user US vocally inputs setting information such as "left IH" in this state shown in Figure 21, the first specific screen 16M1 will display that the left heating port 4L has been selected.
22 shows an example in which the function is set to automatically select the left heating unit 4L. As shown in FIG. 22, the result of the automatic selection of the left heating port 4L is displayed on the first specification screen 16M1.

In addition, in the state shown in Figure 22, one light-emitting element 21M corresponding to the input key 151M will blink as shown in the dashed circle (or will emit light in a different color than the other light-emitting elements), and will wait for a command to start cooking before proceeding to the next state. Therefore, pressing the input key 151M will start the heating and cooking operation.

Next, FIG. 23 will be described.
In Fig. 23A, FG indicates the fingertips of the user US. Each time the input key 155M is pressed, the display content of the first specific screen 16M1 changes to display screens 23A to 23D, as shown in Fig. 23B.

As mentioned above, when the user US sets the input operation unit 15 to function setting mode (using the function setting key 151KP) in advance and operates multiple input keys on the input operation unit 15 during this function setting mode to display individual cooking menus in the linked cooking mode KM1 on the central display unit 16M, the user can set the display to prioritize either food ingredients or nutritional ingredients.

For example, when the function setting key 151KP is pressed as described above, a dedicated display screen for the "function setting menu" is displayed on the display screen of the central display section 16M.
Therefore, it is advisable to press one or two specific input keys (e.g., 156M or 158M) other than the function setting key 151KP so that the "food composition label" and "nutritional composition label" are automatically displayed as additional information for one of the cooking menu items (e.g., hamburger).

Furthermore, when the display screen for setting "Food Composition Labeling" or "Nutritional Composition Labeling" is displayed, operating a specific input key other than the function setting key 151KP (for example, one of 156M, 157M, etc.) may allow the conditions for setting "Food Composition Labeling" or "Nutritional Composition Labeling" or the settings to be canceled. For example, a specific range may be set to display only the nutrient "iron" and the component "energy (calorie equivalent)."

For this reason, if the function setting key 151KP is set to prioritize either food ingredients or nutritional ingredients and display them based on that, "hamburger" will not necessarily be displayed first, as shown in Figure 23 (A).

As mentioned above, the user US can search for cooking menus by voice by pressing the input key 180. For example, if a voice input such as "low calorie menu" is made at the stage shown in Figure 23, the cooking menu with the lowest calorie value (energy amount) from among the eight cooking menus will be displayed in a predetermined position (front-to-back center position, i.e., the "display position A") in the first area 22 on the first specific screen 16M1.

For example, in Figure 23, three cooking menu items are displayed: gratin, hamburger steak, and roast beef. Pressing the input key 180 at this point will switch to voice input mode 2. The user US can then provide voice input for "low-calorie menu." Incidentally, the energy amount (unit: kilocalories) per 100g is 152 for gratin (macaroni gratin), 223 for hamburger steak, and approximately 196 for roast beef. Therefore, macaroni is extracted as the "menu with the lowest calorie value" of these three.

On the other hand, in the state shown in Figure 23, you can "long press" input key 154M to switch to voice input mode 1 and extract menu items with low calorie values via voice input.

Next, FIG. 24 will be described.
FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the central display unit 16M in the collaborative cooking mode KM1, and is an example in which the standard ingredients and nutritional ingredients for "hamburger steak," one of the cooking menu items, are displayed.

At the stages shown in Figures 20 to 23, if the user US issues a command to display either the food ingredients or the nutritional ingredients by voice input, or if the user touches input key 158M or 159M while operation support information 170 is being displayed (see Figure 20), the first specific screen 16M1 temporarily switches to the display screen shown in Figure 24 (A) or Figure 24 (B). Pressing input key 158M constitutes a command to display the food ingredients.

In the following description, the display screen in Figure 24(A) will be referred to as the "food ingredient display screen" 16M1A, and the display screen in Figure 24(B) will be referred to as the "nutritional ingredient display screen" 16M1B.

The food component display screen 16M1A and the nutritional component display screen 16M1B automatically return to the original state of the first specific screen 16M1 after a certain time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed.
Alternatively, the display program of the control device 40 stipulates that if the user US gives some command by voice input, or if either of the input keys 158M and 159M is operated once more within the specified time period (10 seconds), the original state of the first specific screen 16M1 will be restored.

Referring to FIG.
FIG. 25 is a table showing the correspondence between the cooking menu in the "cooperative cooking mode" KM1 and the operation support information 170 (see FIG. 20).

As can be seen from FIG. 25, there are at least two pieces of operational support information 170.
That is, there are two types of operational support information: operational support information A (170A) and operational support information B (170B). The first type of operational support information A (170A) is "Confirm with the start button." This "start button" refers to the input key 151M.
The second piece of operational support information B (170B) is information that says "You can change the IH to be used."
The data of the table shown in FIG. 25 is stored in the storage device 41 of the control device 40.

As shown in Figure 25, for each food item (cooking menu), a "specific input key" that must be operated when the user US cooks using the recipe data CD is determined in advance, and this information is also stored in the memory device 41.
As described above, recipe data CD for one cooking operation is acquired in two stages: a first section M1 that sets cooking step 1 using one or two heating means, and a second section M2 that sets cooking step 2 using the other heating means. For example, in the case of "hamburger steak," the specific input key for acquiring data for cooking step 1 (first setting section M1) is either 152L or 152R. That is, the user US can select either the input key 152R on the right heating unit 15R or the input key 152L on the left operation unit 15L at their discretion. Note that both cannot be selected; selecting either one completes the specific input key selection process.

Furthermore, when acquiring data for the second portion M2 that sets cooking process 2, it is necessary to operate another specific input key. For example, in the case of the aforementioned "hamburger steak," the specific input key for acquiring data for cooking process 2 (second setting portion M2) is 153M. In other words, input key 153M on central operation unit 15M can be operated. Note that when acquiring recipe data CD in this way, the specific input key to be operated is predetermined, as shown in the "Specific Input Key" column in Figure 25, and this information is stored in the storage device 41.

The two types of operation support information A (170A) and operation support information B (170B) mentioned above are automatically switched before the start of the cooking process in "Cooperative Cooking Mode" KM3. For example, they are displayed alternately every few seconds.

Next, FIG. 26 will be described.
In this first embodiment, a "cooperative preheat cooking mode" KM4 is provided as one type of the cooperative cooking mode KM1.
There are two types of linked preheat cooking modes KM4.

An example of a cooking menu that uses the linked preheat cooking mode KM4 is "hamburger steak." In the case of this "hamburger steak," the preheating process is performed using the first heating means HM1.

If the cooking process 1 is started while the preheating process is being performed, the heating operation of the preheating process has not been stopped at the time when the cooking process 1 is started.
Therefore, the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means) and the third heating means HM3 responsible for cooking process 1 are energized in parallel during the same time period.

In other words, in linked preheat cooking mode KM4, the heat source (in the above explanation, the first heating means HM1), which has been operating before cooking process 1, does not necessarily stop at the start of cooking process 1, and during cooking process 1, power may be supplied to either or both of the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means) and the third heating means HM3.

Unless there is a particular contradiction, the following explanation will be based on the assumption that the linked cooking mode KM1 includes the linked preheat cooking mode KM4.

When the linked cooking mode KM1 is selected, once the identification information 167 indicating the name of the food to be cooked is displayed on the central display unit 16M, the left operation unit 15L of the left IH coil 9L cannot be used for other cooking menus (also known as the "occupied state").

Specifically, of the various input keys on the left operation unit 15L, at least input key 153L is disabled by the heating control unit 43. This "disabled" means both that the input key 153L does not send a valid command signal to the heating control unit 43, and that even if a valid command signal is sent, the heating control unit 43 does not process that command signal as a valid command signal. In either case, heating with the left IH coil 9L cannot be selected.

At the same time, when the identification information 167 is displayed, the right operation unit 15R for the right heating port 4R may be made unusable (by "disabling" the input key 153R). However, if the user US has previously set the function on the input operation unit 15 (using the function setting key 151KP) to prevent this "disabling," and the right IH coil 9R is already being used for another control menu (heating operation is ongoing), the right IH coil 9R can be used as is. On the other hand, in the linked cooking mode KM1, if the right IH coil 9R has already been used (by another cooking method), it is determined (by the heating control unit 43) that it cannot be used.

As a result, only the left IH coil 9L is "occupied" by selecting the linked cooking mode KM1. Furthermore, when viewed from the perspective of the first heating source HM1 as a whole, use of only a portion of the three heating ports 4L, 4C, and 4R (the left IH coil 9L) is "restricted." Note that if the right IH coil 9R is not being used for other cooking, the right IH coil 9R may also be placed in an occupied state.

Continuing with the description of FIG.
26 shows the operation steps when "fried chicken" is made in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 (cooperative preheating cooking mode KM4). In FIG. 26, #1 to #9 show the operations of the user US and the state changes of the cooking appliance 1.

The "fried chicken" shown in Figure 26 differs from the "hamburger" described above in that cooking process 1 is performed in heating chamber 6 and cooking process 2 is performed by first heating means HM1.

In Figure 26, in order for the user US to cook "fried chicken," before starting cooking process 1, he or she first selects the left IH coil 9L as the preheating source and presses the input key 151L. Then, preheating of the object to be heated N placed on the top plate 3 begins (step Y21). In this case, the object to be heated N is a metal pot or frying pan, etc., filled with a certain amount of cooking oil.

Meanwhile, the user US opens the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 and places ingredients for "fried chicken" (such as seasoned chicken) into the heating chamber 6 (#1).
After closing the door 7, an operation called "pressing the start button" (step Y22) is performed. This is performed by pressing the input key 151M of the central operation unit 15M.

At this point, the microwave heating source (second heating means HM2) is activated, and microwave cooking step 1 begins. Reference information notification 1 is then performed.

The notification 1 is, for example, an announcement of the time remaining until heating is complete, such as "Microwave heating has started. Heating time is XX minutes." Alternatively, if the control detects the temperature of the food being cooked and determines when heating will end, the notification may also indicate the target temperature, such as "Heating to XX°C."

During this cooking process 1, preheating of the left IH coil 9L is completed (for example, the object to be heated is heated to the standard preheating temperature of 180°C) (step Y23A). The user US is notified of this preheating completion by voice and text via the audio notification unit 51 and the central display unit 16M (first specific screen 16M1) (step Y23B).

The user US can stop microwave heating at any time during cooking step 1. Simply open the door 7 to stop the microwave heating. Microwave heating can be temporarily stopped by pressing the input key 152M on the central operation unit 15M only once. However, pressing the input key 152M twice in succession within a short period of time cancels the cooking mode and the selection of "fried chicken" in the linked cooking mode. The user is notified immediately before or after the microwave heating has stopped (step Y24).

Upon opening of the door 7, the microwave heating operation is immediately stopped, and cooking step 1 is completed (#3).
Next, the user US moves the food material that has been heated in the heating chamber 6 into the object to be heated (such as a frying pan) that is being preheated on the top plate 3 (#4).

Then, cooking step 2 is started at the left heating port 4L (#5).
In cooking step 2, since the input key 153L (see FIG. 6) on the left operation unit 15L is pressed first before preheating begins, there is no need to operate the left operation unit 15L at the start of cooking step 2. In other words, when the food ingredients (fried chicken ingredients) are moved into an object to be heated that has been preheated to, for example, 180°C, heating of the food ingredients begins at the temperature of the object to be heated (this point marks the start of cooking step 2).

As described above, the user US does not need to operate the input operation unit 15 in order to start cooking process 2 (#5).
The start of cooking process 2 occurs when the food to be cooked is placed on top of the heated food and is ready to be heated. However, the temperature sensor group 30 (see Figure 10) may detect a temporary drop in the temperature of the heated food when the food is placed on top, and the start of cooking process 2 may be determined electrically.
The cooking process 2 can be ended at any timing by the user US operating the left operating unit 15L.

Next, the user US moves the food to be cooked again.
First, the door 7 is opened, the food to be cooked is placed in the heating chamber 6, and the door 7 is closed (#6).
Then, the input key 151M of the central operation unit 15M is pressed to start cooking step 3 of the range grill control menu (RG control menu) (step Y26).

In this case, to prevent microwave heating or the like from being performed without placing the food to be cooked in the heating chamber 6 (so-called "empty cooking"), the door 7 is opened once after cooking process 1 is completed, and then the heating operation can be started by pressing the input key 151M only if it is detected (by the door 7 open/close detection unit 10) that the door 7 has been closed again. Furthermore, the timing for operating this input key 151M can be limited to a certain time (e.g., 3 minutes) from the end of cooking process 1, or to a certain time (e.g., 2 minutes) from the time the door 7 is opened and then closed again, thereby improving safety.

When a predetermined time has elapsed since cooking process 3 by the range grill drive unit in the heating chamber 6 was started by operation input from the user US, operation support information 170 is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1. A voice notification is also provided (step Y27).

The audio notification includes information such as, "Heating will finish in 30 seconds. If you wish to extend the time further, please set the time." Furthermore, since the user US knows that the final cooking process is about to end, they can begin preparations to remove the "fried chicken" from the heating chamber 6 from the point at which the operation support information 170 is notified. Synchronously with this, the central display unit 16M displays the contents of the operation support information 170 in text or other formats. The operation support information 170 is displayed at a specific position on the first specific screen 16M1, as in the example shown in FIG. 20.

Thereafter, the microwave heating operation is stopped, and cooking step 3 is completed (#7). Note that cooking step 3 can be stopped immediately if the user US opens the door 7.
Then, the user US moves the food heated in the heating chamber 6 into the preheated food on the top plate 3 (#8). In this case, if the food is maintained in a heated state by induction heating until the end of cooking step 3, the user may place another food on top of the food and start induction heating (cooking step 4) (#9).

Induction heating cooking can be ended by operating the left operation unit 15L. In other words, the user US's operation to end heating cooking at this point (step Y28) is to press the input key 153L on the left operation unit 15L corresponding to the left IH coil 9L.

The cooking sequence shown in FIG. 26 can shorten the time required from the start of the induction heating operation (start of the preheating step) to the end of cooking step 1.
That is, cooking step 1 is started by placing ingredients (food to be cooked) in heating chamber 6 at an earlier point in time than the completion of preheating by induction heating or notification of the completion of preheating.

Because preheating by the first heating means HM1 is completed before cooking process 1 is completed, the food to be cooked can be immediately transferred to the heated food on the top plate 3 after cooking process 1 is completed, and cooking process 2 can be started.

Note that in the example of "fried chicken" in Figure 26, cooking step 3 was included, but cooking step 3 and cooking step 4 are not necessarily required. Cooking can be completed with the necessary cooking steps depending on the type of food being cooked and the wishes of the user US.

Also, while Figure 26 shows that the "left IH coil drive period" continues even after cooking step 2 is completed, the drive of the left IH coil 9L can be stopped at any time using the left operation unit 15L after cooking step 2 is completed. However, as shown by the dashed frame in Figure 26, if the left IH coil 9L is also used in cooking step 4, it is necessary to start the preheating operation again before cooking step 4.

Next, FIG. 27 will be described.
Like FIG. 26, FIG. 27 shows the operation steps when "fried chicken" is selected as the cooking menu in the cooperative cooking mode KM1.
In Fig. 27, #1 to #9 indicate operations by the user US and state changes of the cooking appliance 1, as explained in Fig. 26. Other symbols correspond to those in Fig. 26.

The difference between FIG. 27 and FIG. 26 will now be described.
FIG. 27 shows a case where cooking process 1 is started in heating chamber 6 after completion of preheating of the object to be heated by first heating means HM1 (step Y23A) and notification thereof (step Y23B).

Step Y21 indicates the start of driving the first heating means HM1.
When the completion of preheating of the object to be heated by the first heating means HM1 (step Y23A) is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 and the left and right display units 16L and 16R (step Y23B) and is also notified by voice from the voice notification unit 50, the user US opens the door 7 of the heating chamber 6 and places the ingredients for the "fried chicken" (such as seasoned chicken) into the heating chamber 6 (#1).
After closing the door 7, the input key 151M of the central operation unit 15M is pressed.

At this point, microwave cooking step 1 begins (step Y22). Then, the reference information notification 1 is performed. The subsequent steps are the same as those shown in Figure 26.

In the cooking sequence shown in Figure 27, the time required from the start of the heating operation of the first heating means HM1 (start of the preheating process) to the end of cooking process 1 is longer than in Figure 26.

However, since heating of the ingredients (food to be cooked) in the heating chamber 6 begins after preheating by the first heating means HM1 is completed or a preheating completion notification (step Y23B) is received, once cooking step 1 in the heating chamber 6 is completed, simply removing the food ensures that cooking step 2 can immediately begin using the first heating means HM1. Therefore, this method is suitable for users US who are not very familiar with the linked preheating cooking mode KM4.

Note that Figure 27 shows that the "drive period of the left IH coil 9L" continues even after cooking step 2 is completed. However, if the first heating means HM1 is not used after cooking step 2 is completed, the drive of the left IH coil 9L may be stopped at any time after cooking step 2 is completed using the left operating unit 15L. However, as shown in the dashed box in Figure 27, if the left IH coil 9L is also used in cooking step 4, preheating must be started again before cooking step 4.

In the configurations shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the first heating means HM1 is energized first to start the preheating operation, while the cooking process 1 is carried out in the heating chamber 6.
The "linked preheat cooking mode" KM4 of this first embodiment is not limited to the case where cooking step 1 is performed in the heating chamber.

In another linked preheating cooking mode KM4, the heating operation is first initiated by the first heating means HM1, and the object to be heated, such as a frying pan, is heated to the preheat target temperature (e.g., 180°C). Once the target temperature has been reached, the object to be cooked is placed on top of the object to begin cooking process 1. After this preheating process, the object to be cooked may be moved into the heating chamber 6 while still on top of the object, and then placed in the heating chamber 6 together with the object to perform cooking process 2 for further heating using the second heating means HM2 or third heating means HM3.

Next, FIG. 28 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the control operation of the heating control unit 43 up to the transition to the combined cooking mode KM1.

In the cooperative cooking mode KM1 of this first embodiment, there is a pattern (first cooperative cooking mode) in which the first heating means HM1 is driven first, followed by at least one of the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3. Typical examples of cooking menus suitable for cooking using this pattern include four, ranging from "hamburger steak" to "gratin," as shown in the table in Figure 25.

There is also a second linked cooking mode in which the order is reversed. Typical examples of cooking menus suitable for this second linked cooking mode are four, ranging from "fried chicken" to "tempura," as shown in the bottom half of the table in Figure 25.

The steps in FIG. 28 are common to both the first collaborative cooking mode and the second collaborative cooking mode.
First, in step SB1, the input key 153M of the central operation unit 15M is operated, thereby starting the cooperative cooking mode KM1.

In the next step SB2, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display unit 16M, displaying various information for executing the linked cooking mode KM1. In this step SB2, in order to select a cooking menu for each linked cooking mode, the "name of the food to be cooked" (e.g., "hamburger steak") 167 is displayed as one type of identification information 167 in the center of the first area 22 in the front-to-back direction, i.e., at the display position A.

Depending on the selection of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the timing at which the heating means (first heating means HM1 to third heating means HM3) are "occupied" may be either of the following two cases.
(1) As described above, for example, after the case where the left IH coil 9L for cooking process 1 is selected (in FIG. 28, this corresponds to "Start of occupied state (case 2)" after step SB4).
(2) As shown in FIG. 28, from step SB2 onwards (in FIG. 28, this corresponds to "Start of Occupied State (Case 1)").

Then, in step SB3, it is determined whether at least one of input keys 154M and 155M has been operated. As explained in Figures 8 and 19 to 22, by operating the two input keys 154M and 155M, it is possible to select identification information 167 indicating the name of an item (e.g., hamburger) that can be cooked in the collaborative cooking mode.

If the input keys 154M and 155M are not operated (within a certain time), the process proceeds to step SB4.
In step SB4, as described above, the user US selects one of the two heating unit specification sections 171L and 171R displayed on the first specification screen 16M1. By operating the input keys 157M and 156M adjacent to each other on the left and right, the user US can select either the right IH coil 9R or the left IH coil 9L.

The left heating outlet 4L may be set as the default, the heating unit specification section 171L may be displayed first on the first specification screen 16M1, and the process may proceed directly to step SB5. In the example described in FIG. 22, when cooking hamburger steak using coordinated cooking, the left heating outlet 4L is set as the default, and the left IH coil 9L is set to be selected preferentially.

In the next step SB5, it is determined whether an input operation has been performed to cancel the selection of the linked cooking mode. If the input key 152M has been operated once, the determination is "Yes." The process then returns to step SB3. If the input key 152M has been operated twice in succession within a certain short period of time (for example, five seconds), it is determined that the linked cooking mode KM1 has been canceled, and the process returns to the state of the initial standby screen before step SB1. Therefore, the selection of the three cooking modes KM1 to KM3 returns to the initial stage.

On the other hand, if input key 151M is operated while input key 152M is not, the process proceeds to next step SB6. Cooking step 1 of collaborative cooking mode KM1 then begins.

In Figure 28, in step SB7, in the operating program for cooperative cooking mode KM1, various functional parts are activated according to the "cooking conditions" (including "control conditions" such as heat and cooking time) of a specific cooperative cooking menu (recipe) such as "hamburger steak." In other words, the transition to cooperative cooking mode KM1 occurs from this stage.

First, in step SB7, the display unit corresponding to the heating unit selected in step SB4 is activated. However, in the case of a cooking menu that uses microwave heating means (second heating means HM2) or third heating means HM3 in cooking step 1 (for example, "fried chicken," as described above), the central display unit 16M is already activated, so no new display unit is activated in step SB7.

In cooking process 1, for example, if a cooking menu uses the left IH coil 9L, the left display unit 16L is activated in step SB7. The input function of the left operation unit 15L is then enabled, and the unit waits for input from the user US. Then, the process proceeds to step SB8.

In step SB8, the operation of the input key 153L is awaited, and the cooking process of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is started.
The first specific screen 16M1 in step SB8 displays process information 172, such as the fact that the left IH coil 9L is used in the first cooking process 1, and that the microwave heating means (second heating means HM2) is used in the next cooking process 2, as described in Figure 19.

Next, FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 will be described.
Fig. 29 is a flowchart showing the control operation of the heating control unit 43 until the transition to the cooperative cooking mode. Fig. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing the permission conditions and the determination results before the transition to the cooperative cooking mode.

Referring to FIG. 29 .
Steps ST1 to ST9 are operation steps defined in the basic operation program of the heating control unit 43.
First, when the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 is pressed (ST1), the next step ST2 is a step in which the heating control unit 43 determines whether or not there is an abnormality.

In step ST2, the central display unit 16M is activated and displays the message "There are no abnormalities, so cooking can begin." At this stage, the heating control unit 43 also checks whether it has received a setting command from the input operation unit 15 regarding the upper limit of total power consumption.

If the cooking appliance 1 is set to send startup information to the communication terminal 200 or cloud server 300 in step ST2, the startup information (operating status data OS) is wirelessly transmitted from the communication unit 51 at this stage.

In the next step ST3, the central display unit 16M and the audio notification unit 51 also provide notification and audio guidance to prompt the user to select the heating means.
In the next step ST4, the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed on the central display section 16M, and also information regarding precautions for use is displayed to the user US.

Then, it is determined whether an input key other than input key 153M (e.g., 154M) has been operated (ST5). If input key 153M has been operated, step ST5 returns "No" and the process proceeds to step ST6. In other words, the process proceeds to the step of using the "linked cooking mode" KM3.

In step ST6, the permission condition determination unit 54 checks whether "permission condition 1" is satisfied. For example, it checks the usage status of the heat source used in the "combined cooking mode" KM1.
The permission condition 1 and the determination result will be explained in detail with reference to FIG.

In step ST5, the first input operation is checked. For example, it is determined whether the left operation unit 15L or the right operation unit 15R was operated before the input key 153M was pressed, and it is also determined whether the "combined cooking mode" KM2 was selected by the central operation unit 15M (by the input key 154M or 155M).

If the input key 153M is operated for the first time within a certain grace period (e.g., 30 seconds) from step ST3, the display for the "linked cooking mode" KM1 will begin as described above.

On the other hand, if input key 153M is not operated and another input key (for example, input key 155M or 154M) is touched, step ST5 returns "Yes" and the process proceeds to step ST9, where cooking other than the "cooperative cooking mode" KM1 is started. A detailed description of step ST9 will be omitted here.

In FIG. 29, steps ST6 and ST7 are operational steps for determining whether cooking in the "cooperative cooking mode" KM1 is permitted.
Step ST6 is a stage for determining "permission condition 1."

Here, "Permission Condition 1" means:
(1) The "peak cut value" that specifies the upper limit of the maximum power that can be used by the cooking appliance 1 is 5000 W or more.
(2) When a power reduction command signal is received by the control device 40 via the communication unit 51 from the external cloud server 300 or the communication terminal 200, the peak cut value of the reduction command is 5000 W or more;
If these two conditions are met, the determination in step ST6 is "Yes."

The "permission conditions 2" in the next step ST7 are the following four.
(1) In the first heating means HM1, the central heating port 4C is not in heating operation.
(2) Either the second heating means HM2 or the third heating means HM3 or both of them are not in heating operation.

(3) In the first heating means HM1, neither the right heating port 4R nor the left heating port 4L is being used for heating (or only one of them is being used for heating). In other words, neither the left IH coil 9L nor the right IH coil 9R is being used for heating.
(4) "Permission condition 4" described later is satisfied. In other words, the latest temperature of the top plate 3 is not a limit value (for example, a high temperature exceeding 100°C).

If the above four conditions are met, step ST7 will result in a "Yes" judgment. Then, the process will proceed to step ST10. In other words, the process can proceed to the step for inputting the start of cooking in the collaborative cooking mode KM1. In other words, in step ST10, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed.

If the determination in steps ST6 and ST7 is "No," the process proceeds to step ST8, and the central display unit 16M and audio notification unit 50 notify the user US that the collaborative cooking mode KM1 cannot be selected.

Here, we will explain the meaning behind the above-mentioned "Permission Condition 1" stipulating "5000W or more." For simplicity, the following explanation will not specifically mention the power consumption of electrical components other than the heat source, such as the internal cooling fan (not shown) of the main body 2.

The reason why the required demand (power demand secured in advance) for implementing "Cooperative Cooking Mode" KM1 must be 5000W or more is because the maximum (instantaneous) power consumed by each heating source during operation in cooperative cooking mode is as follows:

(1) Microwave cooking (second heating means HM2): 1000 W
(2) Oven cooking: 2000 W (upper radiant heat heating means 12a: 1000 W, lower radiant heat heating means 12b: 1000 W)
(3) Range grill cooking: 1500 W (second heating means HM2: 500 W, upper radiant heat heating means 12a: 1000 W)

On the other hand, the maximum power consumption for the cooking menu in the "combined cooking mode" KM1 is 1500W.
Therefore, in the cooperative cooking mode, the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 may operate simultaneously.

In other words, the maximum power is 3500W, which is the sum of the 1000W of the second heating means HM2, the 1000W of the third heating means HM3 (2000W is achieved by alternating current in 1000W increments), and the 1500W of the first heating means HM1 that performs induction heating.

When the demand (pre-reserved power demand) is 5000W:
When the right IH coil 9R is heating at 3000 W (normal heating), the remaining demand is 2000 W.
If the "coordinated cooking mode" KM1 is implemented from this state, the remaining demand is 1500W short of the 3500W of power required for coordinated cooking, so the heating power of the right IH coil 9R is reduced to 1500W (from 3000W) and coordinated cooking can be started.

If the demand (pre-secured power demand) is 4000W:
When frying food using the right heating outlet 4R (requiring a maximum of 1500W), the remaining demand is 2500W.
If coordinated cooking is performed from this state, the remaining demand is 1,000 W short of the 3,500 W of power required for coordinated cooking, so the heat power of the right induction coil must be reduced. However, if the heat power is reduced while the automatic control menu is running, cooking will not go well, so the heat power of the automatic control menu cannot be reduced.
In the end, 4000W is not enough to provide the necessary heat for the automatic control menu.

As is clear from the above explanation, before starting the "linked cooking mode" KM1, it is necessary to determine (confirm) whether there is a demand (power demand secured in advance) of 5000W, which is the sum of the power required for linked cooking (3500W) and the power required for the cooking menu of the right heating port 4R or left heating port 4L (1500W).

Next, FIG. 30 will be described.
Fig. 30 shows the determination processes in steps ST6 and ST7 in Fig. 29. These determinations are made by the permission condition determination unit 54.
Step ST5 is the stage where the input key 153M is operated.
In the next step STX1, the permission condition determination unit 54 of the control device 40 compares the latest state of the heating cooker 1 with the permission conditions 1 and 2 described above, and determines whether the state satisfies permission conditions 1 and 2.

In step STX1 of Figure 30, audio (notification) 1 to audio (notification) 4 indicate the content to be notified to the user US by the audio notification unit 50. In other words, this is a specific example of the content of step ST8 in Figure 29.

Displays 1 to 4 in Figure 30 show the content displayed on the central display unit 16M. Note that Displays 1 to 4 are not displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 that is displayed from step SB2 in Figure 28 onwards, but are displayed on the central display unit 16M when the first specific screen is not displayed. In other words, they explain the display content that is displayed at step ST8 in Figure 29 (audio notification is also provided).

The first specific screen 16M1 will not be displayed unless the prerequisites for transitioning to the "cooperative cooking mode" KM1 (permission conditions 1 and 2) are met. Therefore, if the user US sets (selects) various conditions for the "cooperative cooking mode" KM1 (e.g., identification information 167) and it is determined that permission conditions 1 or 2 are not met, the display and audio notification of step ST8 will be followed by a return to the initial standby screen (step ST4 in FIG. 29). Therefore, the user US will not be forced to perform unnecessary input operations until the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is disallowed after the user US has set all of the control conditions, etc., and has issued a heating operation command.

Next, FIG. 31 will be described.
FIG. 31 illustrates the operation from when the cooking appliance 1 is started up to when cooking recipe data CD for the cooking appliance 1 is acquired from the communication terminal device 200 or an external server (cloud server 300).

In this embodiment 1, the recipe data CD for the collaborative cooking mode KM1 includes, but is not limited to, the number of the collaborative cooking menu (identification information 167), the order in which the multiple heating means are used, the heating means used in cooking step 1, the heating means used in cooking step 2, and if there are cooking steps 3 and beyond, the heating means used for each of those cooking steps, and if there are default (standard setting) control conditions for each cooking step (heat power, heating time, target heating temperature, etc.), the setting value or setting value range.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 1, each cooking step in the recipe data CD is assigned a specific input key (such as 153M) that should be operated first. In other words, if a cooking step consists of two steps, the control device 40 has determined specific input keys that should be operated in two stages: a first part M1 (of the recipe data CD) for setting cooking step 1, and a second part M2 for setting cooking step 2.

In Figure 31, steps SS1 to SS8 are operational steps defined in the integrated control program of the control device 40, and are essentially identical to the content defined in the basic operational program described in Figure 29.

First, when the operation button 20A of the main power switch 20 is pressed (SS1), the next step SS2 is a step in which the heating control unit 43 determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred.

Steps SS1 to SS4 are the same as steps ST1 to ST4 described in Figure 29, so duplicate explanations will be omitted.

In step SS5, the cooking appliance 1 performs an operation to ask the user US for prior confirmation as to whether or not to send a signal to the communication terminal 200 or cloud server 300 that has been registered in advance, requesting the provision of cooking recipe data CD. A "confirmation screen" is displayed on the central display unit 16M, and an announcement is also made by the audio notification unit 50. This "confirmation screen" is a type of the standby initial screen 16MH, which will be described later.

If the user US sets the external connection in step SS5 to be executed automatically in advance using the function setting key 151KP on the input operation unit 15, it will be executed automatically at a specified timing.

In other words, as described in FIG. 1, pairing between the smartphone 200 and the cooking appliance 1 can be performed automatically, and wireless communication 330 can be established between the smartphone 200 and the cooking appliance 1.

The external connection in step SS5 involves alternately repeating transmission and reception several times between the cooking appliance 1 and the external communication device (such as the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300).
For example, when signal 1 is first transmitted from cooking appliance 1, communication terminal 200 receives signal 1 and transmits signal 2, and cooking appliance 1 then checks its internal state (for example, the set value of total power consumption) and acquires "state information" (described later). If there is no problem with the content of the state information, cooking appliance 1 transmits standby signal 2 to proceed to the next stage, and so on.

Finally, the cooking appliance 1 completes the reception of the necessary "setting information" (including the recipe data CD) from the external communication device (such as the communication terminal 200). In other words, after receiving a signal, the cooking appliance 1 performs several alternating communications, such as returning another signal immediately thereafter, until it finally completes the reception of the necessary "setting information." Within this series of steps, there is a step that asks the user US to decide whether or not to receive the recipe data CD. In other words, in this cooking appliance 1, there is a step that allows the user US to clearly and in advance know that the recipe data CD will be received, preventing the cooking appliance 1 from proceeding to the execution stage of the recipe data CD without the user US knowing. These details will be explained later.

Meanwhile, as part of the process of facilitating the above-mentioned external connection, in step SS6, predetermined icons and information are displayed on the central display unit 16M to notify the user US that recipe data CD can be acquired. An example of this is shown on the display screen 2C in Figure 40. The display notifying the user US is displayed concisely, for example, in text, as shown in the acquisition operation support information 60P on the display screen 2C in Figure 41.

If, in step SS6, you do not agree to connection to the external device (such as the communication terminal 200), a non-reception message such as "Recipe data CD is not currently being received" is sent to the registered external device (the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300) as shown in step SS9. In this way, the user US can also set up a refusal to receive the data.

FIG. 31 shows the process of acquiring only one cooking step portion from the recipe data CD.
When there are two or more cooking steps, as in the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the processing of steps SS5 to SS8 described above must be performed in the same manner for each of cooking step 1 and cooking step 2.

In other words, in the case of recipe data CD with two cooking steps, in the first part M1 (of recipe data CD) for setting cooking step 1, a specific input key input operation is required to agree to the acquisition of said first part M1. Incidentally, as mentioned above, if the cooking menu for linked cooking mode KM1 is "hamburger steak," the specific input key to be operated to acquire first part M1 is 152R on the right operation unit 15R or 152L on the left operation unit 15L.

On the other hand, if the user agrees to connect to the external device and issues a command to acquire data in step SS6, the data acquisition unit 53 of the cooking appliance 1 acquires the recipe data CD from the external device via the communication unit 51. The acquired recipe data CD is stored in a specified "temporary storage unit" (not shown) in the recipe data storage unit 42 (step SS7).

In the next step SS8, the contents of the recipe data CD acquired from the external device, particularly the identification information 167, are displayed on the central display unit 16M. Furthermore, the audio notification unit 50 notifies the user of the fact that the data has been received, for example, by saying, "A hamburger recipe has been received."

In this embodiment 1, the control device 40 is programmed to allow the data acquisition unit 53 to acquire the recipe data CD if the input key 180, which is the selection unit for the voice input mode 2, is operated during the standby period in which the control device 40 waits for a command to start the heating operation after the main power switch 20 is turned on and power supply begins.

That is, if the user US presses the input key 180 in step SS6, the step is judged as "Yes" and acquisition of the recipe data CD is permitted. However, several conditions must be met before the recipe data CD is actually acquired by the control device 40. This will be explained in detail later.
If there are two or more cooking steps, the process returns to step SS5 after step SS8. To agree to the acquisition of the second portion M2 (of the recipe data CD) for setting cooking step 2, a specific input key must be operated in step SS6. For example, if the cooking menu for the linked cooking mode KM1 is "hamburger steak" as described above, only one specific input key, 153M, must be operated to acquire the second portion M2.

Next, a description will be given of FIGS.
Fig. 32 is a flowchart showing the main input steps for the three cooking modes after the main power is turned on in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 33 is a flowchart 1 showing the input steps after the main power is turned on in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 34 is a flowchart 1 showing the input steps for the linked cooking mode in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 35 is a flowchart 1 showing the input steps for the combined cooking mode in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 36 is a flowchart 1 showing the input steps for the single cooking mode in the cooking appliance 1.
Fig. 37 is a flowchart showing the main input steps when cooking by acquiring recipe data for three cooking modes after the main power is turned on in a cooking appliance. Fig. 38 is a flowchart 1 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data CD from an external device in cooking appliance 1. Fig. 39 is a flowchart 2 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data CD from an external device in cooking appliance 1.

32 to 36 show the case of the aforementioned "voice input mode 1A." That is, in one input operation unit 15 (for example, central operation unit 15M), the input key 154M as the "dual-purpose key" is provided among the multiple input keys.
Therefore, when the input mode is changed to the "voice input mode 1A" by the input key 154M, the input functions of the input keys (156M, 158M, etc.) other than the input key (dual-purpose key) 154M are disabled from that point on. Note that the voice input mode can also be set with the input key 153M in the same way as with the input key 154M.

Figures 32 to 36 illustrate a case where the user US operates the input operation unit 15 of the cooking appliance 1 to perform cooking, rather than a case where recipe data CD is acquired from an external device (such as a communication terminal 200) and cooking is performed.

Referring to FIG. 32 .
32, the outlined symbols (such as 153M) indicate the input keys 153M, etc. to be operated in the following steps S2 to S15. In other words, the main input keys are displayed in outlined characters.
The range indicated by the dashed frame indicates the range in which voice input is possible in "voice input mode 1," which is switched to when the input key (multi-purpose key) 154M or the like is "long pressed."

Steps S2 to S6 show the operation steps in the cooperative cooking mode KM1.
Steps S7 to S11 show the operation steps in the combined cooking mode KM2.
Steps S12 to S15 show the operation steps in the single cooking mode KM3 using the first heating means HM1.

When the main power switch 20 is turned on, the standby initial screen 16MH is first displayed on the central display section 16M (step S1).
Next, when the input key 153M is touched, the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is selected (step S2), and the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed (step S3).

At this stage, as described in Figures 19 to 22, the first specific screen 16M1 simultaneously displays at least three cooking menus on one screen, but each time input key 154M or 155M is touched, a different cooking menu can be displayed in turn (step S4).

In step S5, the control conditions for one collaborative cooking menu can be selected using input keys 156M and 157M. If control conditions do not need to be entered, simply press input key 151M. This allows you to proceed to cooking step 1 of collaborative cooking mode KM1 (step S6).

As is clear from FIG. 32, if the input key (multi-purpose key) 154M is "long pressed" in step S4, the control device 40 switches to a voice-based "input standby state," allowing the range of conditions to be input by voice from steps S4 to S5. For example, the cooking menu and control conditions can be input as a set by the user US speaking, such as "Hamburg steak, preheat 180°C." Note that only the control conditions other than the food to be cooked can be input by voice, such as "heat level 7 hours 10 minutes." Note that the voice input mode can also be set by long pressing the input key 153M in step S2.

Next, FIG. 32 will be described.
In step S2, if the input key 154M or 155M is touched without touching the input key 153M, the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected (step S7), and the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed (step S8).
Each time the input key 154M or 155M is touched, a different control menu (see FIG. 16) can be displayed in turn (step S9).

In step S9, if one control menu (e.g., "Warm") displayed on the second specific screen 16M2 is acceptable, the user can then press input key 156M or 157M to select the control conditions (microwave output, heating time, etc.) (step S10).

In step S10, if the control conditions for one composite cooking mode are acceptable, pressing input key 151M will allow you to move to cooking step 1 of composite cooking mode KM2 (step S11).

As is clear from FIG. 32, if the input key (multi-purpose key) 154M is "long pressed" in step S7, the control device 40 switches to a voice-based "input standby state," allowing the range of conditions to be input by voice in steps S9 to S10. For example, the user US can input a set of the control menu (in this case, "heat") and the control conditions by speaking, such as "warm 500W." Note that it is also possible to input only the control conditions by voice, such as "500W, time 10 minutes."

Next, FIG. 32 will be described.
If input key 153M is not touched in step S2, and neither input key 154M nor 155M is touched in step S7, but either input key 153L or 153R on right operation unit 15R or left operation unit 15L is touched, the single cooking mode KM3 using first heating means HM1 is selected (step S12), and third specific screen 16M3 is displayed on right display unit 16R or left display unit 16L (step S13).

Each time input key 152L or 152R is touched, a different control menu (see Figure 41) can be displayed (step S14).

In step S14, if one control menu (see FIG. 42) displayed on the third specific screen 16M3 is acceptable, then press input key 154L or 155L (in the case of the left operation unit 15L) or input key 154R or 155R (in the case of the right operation unit 15R) to select the control conditions (induction heating power, heating time, etc.) (step S15).

In step S15, if the control conditions for the single cooking mode KM3 are acceptable, induction heating will automatically begin within a certain period of time (10 seconds) without the need to press an input key.

As is clear from FIG. 32, if input key (multi-purpose key) 153L or 153R is "long pressed" in step S12, the control device 40 switches to a voice-based "input standby state," allowing the range of conditions to be input by voice in steps S14 to S15. For example, the user US can input a set of the control menu (in this case, "boil water") and the control conditions by speaking, such as "boil water, heat level 6." Note that only the control conditions may be input by voice.

You can also set control conditions by operating input keys 151L or 151R (step S14). You can also set the timer time using input keys 151R or 151L. These can also be entered by voice once you switch to voice input mode 1. For example, you can say something like "heat level 6, timer 10 minutes."

As is clear from FIG. 32, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment has the following features:
The input operation unit 15 has a first input operation unit (a right operation unit 15R and a left operation unit 15L) for the first heating means HM1, and a second input operation unit (a central operation unit 15M) for the second heating means,
The first input operation unit 15L and the second input operation unit 15R have input keys A (153L and 153R) arranged thereon, and the second input operation unit 15M has input keys B (153M and 154M) arranged thereon,
The control device 40 is characterized in that it validates the touch input of either the input key A (153L, 153R) or the input key B (153M, 154M), whichever comes first, and does not start the input process using the other input key until input of the control conditions (heat power, heating time, etc.) for the heating cooking mode (coordinated cooking mode KM1, combined cooking mode KM2, single cooking mode KM3) or control mode (the "warming" mode, etc.) is completed and heating cooking is started.

In other words, for the three heating cooking modes (cooperative cooking mode KM1, combined cooking mode KM2, and single cooking mode KM3), only one of the input keys 153M, 154M, 153L, and 153R that is touched first will be accepted by the control device 40, and the other input keys will not accept input commands.

Therefore, for example, if input key 154M is touched and then held down to switch to voice input mode, input from other input keys will become impossible (however, input functions for input keys 151M and 152M will be maintained).

Therefore, when the voice input mode is started by pressing either input key A (153L, 153R) or input key B (153M, 154M), it becomes impossible to select other cooking modes or control modes, and setting conditions will not be inadvertently input by voice input.

Furthermore, if the collaborative cooking mode KM1 is entered using one input key (e.g., 154M) in voice input mode, the voice input mode that was in effect up to that point is canceled when input key 151M is pressed to start cooking. Therefore, there will be no confusion if the user US subsequently performs a touch operation to select another cooking mode.

Next, we will explain Figure 33.
In FIG. 33, the outlined symbols (for example, 153M) indicate the input keys (153M, etc.) operated in steps SM3, SM4 and SM8.
In Fig. 33, step SM1 performs processing equivalent to steps ST2 and ST3 in Fig. 29. That is, the central display unit 16M is activated, and the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed. An abnormality determination is performed, and if no abnormality is found, a message is displayed stating "There are no abnormalities, so cooking can begin." Then, the standby initial screen 16MH and the audio notification unit 51 provide a notification and audio guidance to prompt the user to select a heating means.

In the next step SM2, the input functions of all input operation units 15M, 15L, and 15R are enabled to prepare for touch input operations of each input key (153M, 154M, 153L, 154R, etc.). Furthermore, the time measurement unit 15T (see FIG. 11) included in the input operation unit 15 starts measuring elapsed time. Note that while FIG. 11 shows an example of the central operation unit 15M, the right operation unit 15R and left operation unit 15L also have a similar configuration to the central operation unit 15M. Therefore, they have a configuration equivalent to the time measurement unit 15T.

In the next step SM3, the linked cooking mode KM1 is selected. In step SM4, the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected. In step SM8, the single cooking mode KM3 using the first heating means HM1 is selected.

First, in step SM3, it is determined whether or not the input key 153M has been touched, and if it has been touched, the process proceeds to the route A1 shown in FIGS.
If there is no touch operation in step SM3, the determination is "No" and the process proceeds to step SM4. If either input key 154M or 155M is touched in step SM4, the determination is "Yes" and the process proceeds to route B1 shown in Figures 33 and 35.

If there is no touch operation in step SM4, the determination is "No" and the process proceeds to step SM8. If either input key 153L or 153R is touched in step SM8, the determination is "Yes" and the process proceeds to route C1 shown in Figures 33 and 36.

If no touch operation has been performed in step SM8 shown in Figure 33, the determination is "No" and the process proceeds to step SM5. In this step SM5, the time measurement unit 15T (see Figure 11) determines whether the preset time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SM3.

On the other hand, if step SM5 determines that the preset time limit TX has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM6, where a process to automatically shut off the main power supply (hereinafter referred to as "automatic shut-off process 1") is performed. The series of operations then ends (SM7). In this way, if no input operation is performed, the main power switch 20 will automatically open when the time limit (e.g., 30 minutes) is exceeded.

Next, we will explain Figure 34.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the operation after the input key 153M is touched in step SM3 shown in FIG.
When the input key 153M is touched, if the touch operation is a "long press", it is determined by the input mode determination unit 15C (see FIG. 11) of the central operation unit 15M.

Then, the determination in step SM40 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SM41. On the other hand, if it is a "short press", the determination becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM50.
Step SM41 is a step for determining whether the above-mentioned "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are met. If these permission conditions are not met, a denial process is performed at this stage (step SM47). The denial process is the process of step ST8 described in FIG. 29.

If the determination in step SM41 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM42.
From step SM42, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed.
The state at the time when this first specific screen 16M1 is displayed is shown, for example, in Fig. 20. After that, to select a specific cooking menu (e.g., hamburger), the input key 154M or 155M is further touched (or may be touched multiple times).

In Figure 34, in step SM43, the time measurement unit 15T (see Figure 11) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the preset time limit TY has been exceeded. After step SM43, if voice input is received from the user US via the voice signal receiving unit 56 (see Figure 10), step SM44 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SM45.

By the way, at the stage of step SM43, the control device 40 has already switched to "voice input mode 1A." Therefore, if an input key 155M is touched after step SM43, the input of that input key 155M will not be accepted by the control device 40 due to "voice input mode 1A." In other words, unless a voice input is made, step SM44 will not return "Yes," and the control device 40 will not proceed to step SM46, which indicates completion of input. Note that if "voice input mode 1B" is set, touch input can continue as described above. Also, as an exception, the voice input control program may be modified so that if the input key 154M is touched again (in this case, a "short press"), the "voice input mode" is canceled.

As such, in this embodiment 1, immediately after "long pressing" input key 154M, the mode switches to voice input mode 1A, and voice input mode 1A continues automatically thereafter. However, voice input mode 1A is canceled when the heating operation begins (in other words, it is canceled when input key 151M is touched).

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded, proceed to step SM46. In step SM46, a determination is made as to whether input has been completed. If step SM46 returns a "Yes" result, the system enters a standby state, waiting for input from input key 151M (A21).

On the other hand, if the answers to steps SM44 and SM46 are "No", the process returns to step SM44 and waits for voice input from the user US.
If it is determined in step SM45 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM45 returns "No" and the process proceeds to step SM48 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutdown processing shown in step SM6 of Fig. 33, and refers to returning the display from the first specific screen 16M1 to the initial standby screen 16MH, displaying a message indicating that the input was not made properly, or an audio notification from the audio notification unit 50. Thereafter, the process may proceed to step SM5 and then to step SM6 for automatic shutdown processing.

Continuing with reference to FIG. 34, steps SM50 and thereafter will be described.
Step SM50 is a step for determining whether the above-mentioned "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are met. If "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are not met, a denial process is performed at this stage (step SM56). The denial process is the process of step ST8 described in FIG. 29.

If the determination in step SM50 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM51.
From step SM51, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed.
The state at the time when this first specific screen 16M1 is displayed is shown, for example, in Fig. 20. After that, to select a specific cooking menu (e.g., hamburger), the input key 154M or 155M is further touched (or may be touched multiple times).

In FIG. 34, in step SM52, the time measurement unit 15T (see FIG. 11) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the preset time limit TY has been exceeded. After step SM52, if the user US performs a touch input, for example, using input keys 156M or 157M, via the audio signal receiving unit 56 (see FIG. 10), step SM53 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SM54.

By the way, at the stage of step SM53, the control device 40 has already switched to touch input mode. Therefore, if an input key 155M is touch-inputted after step SM52, the input of that input key 155M will be accepted by the control device 40 due to the touch input mode. In other words, as long as it is a touch input, step SM53 will be "Yes," and the process will proceed to step SM46, where input is complete. However, as an exception, if the input key 154 is touch-inputted again (in this case, a "long press"), the touch input mode may be cancelled and the mode may be changed back to "voice input mode 1."

In this way, in this embodiment 1, the touch input mode is maintained unless the input key 154M is "pressed and held," and the touch input mode continues automatically thereafter. The touch input mode is automatically canceled when the heating operation begins.

If the time elapsed since step SM52 has not exceeded the time limit TY, the process proceeds to step SM55. A determination is then made as to whether input has been completed. If step SM55 returns a "Yes" result, the process enters a standby state, waiting for input from the input key 151M (A22).

On the other hand, if the results of steps SM53 and SM55 are "No", the process returns to step SM53 and waits for a touch input from the user US.
If it is determined in step SM54 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM54 returns "No" and the process proceeds to step SM57 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutdown processing shown in step SM6 of Fig. 33, and refers to returning the display from the first specific screen 16M1 to the initial standby screen 16MH, displaying a message that the input was not made properly, or an audio notification from the audio notification unit 50. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SM5, and may proceed to step SM6 for automatic shutdown processing.

Next, we will explain Figure 35.
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the operation after either the input key 154M or 155M is touched in step SM4 shown in FIG.
When the input key 154M is touched, if the touch operation is a "long press", it is determined by the input mode determination unit 15C (see FIG. 11) of the central operation unit 15M.

Then, the determination in step SM60 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SM61. On the other hand, if it is a "short press", the determination becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM70.
Step SM61 is a step for determining whether "permission condition 3" is satisfied.
"Permission condition 3" here is different from permission conditions 1 and 2 of the combined cooking mode (see Figures 29 and 30). "Permission condition 3" in this combined cooking mode specifies that the latest temperature of the heating chamber 6 checked by the temperature sensor group 30 must be, for example, 80°C or lower. If the result measured by the temperature sensor group 30 is, for example, 100°C, this is because it exceeds the temperature detection range (90°C or lower) of the "warm" control menu.

If "Permission Condition 3" is not met, denial processing is performed at this stage (step SM67). Note that denial processing involves displaying a message such as "The heating chamber is too hot to cook" on the initial standby screen 16MH, or issuing a similar notification via the audio notification unit 50. Note that when cooking is performed in the heating chamber 6 using the third heating means HM3, the heating chamber 6 may remain hot for a while due to residual heat even after the cooking is completed.

If the determination in step SM61 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM62.
From step SM62 onwards, the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed.
The state at the time when this second specific screen 16M2 is displayed is shown, for example, in Fig. 16. After that, the input key 154M or 155M is further touched (or may be touched multiple times) to select a specific control menu (e.g., warming).

In Figure 35, in step SM63, the time measurement unit 15T (see Figure 11) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the preset time limit TY has been exceeded. After step SM63, if voice input is received from the user US via the voice signal receiving unit 56 (see Figure 10), step SM64 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SM65.

By the time step SM63 is reached, the control device 40 has already switched to voice input mode 1. Therefore, if touch input is performed on the input key 155M after step SM63, the control device 40 will not accept the input of the input key 155M due to the voice input mode (since it is set to "voice input mode 1A"). In other words, unless voice input is performed, step SM64 will not return "Yes," and the control device 40 will not proceed to input completion step SM66. However, as an exception, the control device 40 may be configured so that "voice input mode 1" is canceled if touch input is performed on the input key 154M again (in this case, a "short press"). Furthermore, if "voice input mode 1B" is set, touch input on the input key 155M will be accepted by the control device 40.

In this way, in this embodiment 1, immediately after "long pressing" input key 154M, the mode switches to voice input mode 1, but voice input mode 1 is automatically canceled when a command to start cooking is given (by touching input key 151M).

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded, proceed to step SM66. In step SM65, a determination is made as to whether input has been completed, and if step SM66 returns "Yes," the system enters a standby state awaiting input from input key 151M (B21).

On the other hand, if the answers to steps SM64 and SM66 are "No", the process returns to step SM64 and waits for voice input from the user US.
If it is determined in step SM65 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM65 returns "No" and the process proceeds to step SM68 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutdown processing shown in step SM6 of Fig. 33, and refers to returning the display from the second specific screen 16M2 to the initial standby screen 16MH, displaying a message that the input was not made properly, or an audio notification from the audio notification unit 50. Thereafter, the process may proceed to step SM5 and then to step SM6 for automatic shutdown processing.

Next, steps SM70 and thereafter will be explained using FIG.
Step SM70 is a step for determining whether the aforementioned "permission condition 3" is met. If permission condition 3 is not met, a denial process is performed at this stage (step SM76). The "denial process" in this case is the same as the denial process in step SM67.

If the determination in step SM70 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM71.
In step SM71, the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed.
The state at the time when this second specific screen 16M2 is displayed is shown, for example, in Fig. 16. After that, the input key 154M or 155M is further touched (or may be touched multiple times) to select a specific control menu (e.g., warming).
At this stage, if the input key 154M is "pressed and held," the mode switches to voice input mode 1, and the process proceeds to step SM63. However, if the input key 154M is not "pressed and held" but the input key 155M is operated for input or the input key 154 is "shortly pressed," the "touch input mode" is maintained, and the process proceeds to step SM72.

In this way, in this embodiment 1, when selecting a composite cooking mode or a control menu (e.g., warming), immediately after "long pressing" the input key 154M, the mode switches to voice input mode 1. However, voice input mode 1 does not continue automatically thereafter, but is canceled when the heating operation begins. Note that the system may be modified so that voice input mode 1 is canceled at this point when the same input key 154M is "short pressed."

In FIG. 35, in step SM72, the time measurement unit 15T (see FIG. 11) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the preset time limit TY has been exceeded. After step SM72, if the user US performs a touch input, for example, using input keys 156M or 157M, via the audio signal receiving unit 56 (see FIG. 10), step SM73 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SM74.

By the way, at the stage of step SM72, the control device 40 has already switched to touch input mode. Therefore, if the input key 155M is touch-inputted after step SM72, the input of the input key 155M will be accepted by the control device 40 due to the touch input mode. In other words, as long as it is a touch input, step SM73 will be "Yes", and the process will proceed to step SM75, where input is complete. However, as an exception, if the input key 154M is touch-inputted again (in this case, a "long press"), the touch input mode may be cancelled and the mode may be changed back to "voice input mode 1".

As such, in this embodiment 1, the touch input mode is maintained unless the input key 154M is "pressed and held," and the touch input mode continues automatically thereafter. The touch input mode is automatically canceled when the heating operation begins, and the device returns to the normal touch input mode.

If the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SM75. A determination is then made as to whether input has been completed. If step SM75 returns a "Yes" result, the process enters a standby state, waiting for input from the input key 151M (B22).

On the other hand, if the results of steps SM73 and SM75 are "No", the process returns to step SM73 and waits for a touch input from the user US.
If it is determined in step SM74 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM74 returns "No" and the process proceeds to step SM77 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutdown processing shown in step SM6 of Fig. 33, and refers to returning the display from the second specific screen 16M2 to the initial standby screen 16MH, displaying a message that the input was not made properly, or an audio notification from the audio notification unit 50. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SM5, and may proceed to step SM6 for automatic shutdown processing.

Next, we will explain Figure 36.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the operation after either the input key 153L or 153R is touched in step SM8 of FIG.
To simplify the following explanation, the following description will be limited to the case where the left operating unit 15L is operated.

If the touch operation of the input key 153L is a "long press," this is determined by the input mode determination unit 15C (see Figure 11) of the left operation unit 15L. Note that Figure 11 shows an example of the central operation unit 15M, but the left operation unit 15L has a similar configuration to that shown in Figure 11.

Then, the determination in step SM80 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SM81. On the other hand, if it is a "short press", the determination becomes "No" and the process proceeds to step SM90.
Step SM81 is a step for determining whether "permission condition 4" is satisfied.
"Permission condition 4" here is different from permission conditions 1 and 2 of the cooperative cooking mode (see FIGS. 29 and 30) and the above-mentioned "Permission condition 3.""Permission condition 4" in this single cooking mode KM3 is, for example, when the latest temperature of the top plate 3 is checked by the temperature sensor group 30 and the result is a high temperature, such as above 100°C. This is because when induction heating control is performed by detecting the temperature of the heated object without contact, a high temperature from the start of the heating operation can hinder accurate temperature control and induction heating control.

If "Permission Condition 4" is not met, a denial process is performed at this stage (step SM87). The denial process involves displaying a message such as "The top plate is too hot to cook" on the initial standby screen 16MH, or issuing a similar notification via the audio notification unit 50. Note that when induction cooking is performed, the top plate 3 may remain hot for some time even after cooking is completed.

If the determination in step SM81 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM82.
From step SM82 onwards, the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed.
An example of this third specific screen 16M3 is shown in Fig. 42, for example, but this third specific screen 16M3 in Fig. 42 is an example when displayed on the central display unit 16M, and is slightly different from the third specific screens 16L3, 16R3 displayed on the left and right display units 16L, 16R. Thereafter, the input key 154L or 155L may be further touched (or touched multiple times) to select a specific control menu (e.g., preheat).

At this stage, the mode has already been switched to "voice input mode 1," so in the next step SM83, the timer 15T (see FIG. 11) starts measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the preset time limit TY has been exceeded. After step SM83, if voice input is received from the user US via the voice signal receiving unit 56 (see FIG. 10), step SM84 becomes "Yes," and the program proceeds to the next step SM85.
For example, if the user US utters "preheat 200°C," the voice signal receiving unit 56 converts this voice input into an electrical signal and inputs it to the voice signal analyzing unit 58.

In step SM85, it is determined whether the time limit TY has been exceeded, and if not, the process proceeds to step SM86.
In step SM86, it is determined whether the input has been completed. If the determination in step SM86 is "Yes," induction heating operation is automatically started within a certain time (e.g., 10 seconds). In other words, in the first heating means HM1 using the left operation unit 16L (in the single cooking mode HM1), no special input key operation is required to start heating, and the heating operation proceeds directly (C21). Note that the actual induction heating operation may be started when the input key 152L or 152R, which is different from the input key (153L or 153R) operated in step SM8 (see FIG. 33), is touched.

On the other hand, if the answers to steps SM84 and SM86 are "No", the process returns to step SM84 and waits for voice input from the user US.
If it is determined in step SM85 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM85 returns "No" and the process proceeds to step SM88 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutdown processing shown in step SM6 of Fig. 33, and refers to returning the display from the third specific screen 16M3 to the initial standby screen 16MH, displaying a message that the input was not made properly, or an audio notification from the audio notification unit 50. Thereafter, the process may proceed to step SM5 and then to step SM6 for automatic shutdown processing.

Next, steps SM90 and after will be described with reference to FIG.
Step SM90 is a step for determining whether the aforementioned "permission condition 4" is met. If permission condition 4 is not met, a denial process is performed at this stage (step SM96). The "denial process" in this case is the same as the denial process in step SM87.

If the determination in step SM90 is "Yes", the process proceeds to step SM91.
From step SM91 onwards, the third special screen 16M3 is displayed in place of the standby initial screen 16MH.
An example of the third specific screen 16M3 is shown in Fig. 42. The third specific screen 16M3 in Fig. 42 is an example of the screen displayed on the left display unit 16L. The third specific screen 16R3 on the right display unit 16R is basically the same. After that, the input keys 154L, 155L, 151L, etc. are touched (or may be touched multiple times) to select a specific control menu (e.g., preheat).

In Figure 36, in step SM92, the time measurement unit 15T (see Figure 11) begins measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the preset time limit TY has been exceeded.

At this stage, the system is in "touch input mode," so in the next step SM93, the timer 15T (see Figure 11) begins measuring the elapsed time to determine whether the preset time limit TY has been exceeded.

The input keys 154L, 155L, 151L, etc. may be touched to sequentially input the control menu (e.g., preheating) and control conditions such as the preheating temperature (touching may be performed multiple times). In this way, when a touch input is performed by the user US, step SM93 becomes "Yes," and if the time limit TY has not been exceeded, the process proceeds from step SM94 to the next step SM95.
For example, if the user US inputs the conditions "preheat" and "200°C" sequentially by touch input, the left operation unit 15L converts this input into an electrical signal and inputs it to the input signal analysis unit 52 (see FIG. 10).

Note that if you "press and hold" input keys 154L or 155R, these input keys do not have the function to switch to voice input mode 1, so voice input is not possible.

In this way, in this embodiment 1, immediately after "long pressing" input key 153R or 153L (step SM8 in Figure 33) to select the single cooking mode HM1 of the first heating means HM1 or to select a heating unit (right heating unit 4R, left heating unit 4L) (using input keys 153R and 153L), the mode switches to voice input mode 1, and voice input mode 1 continues automatically thereafter.

In other words, once you "long press" input key 153L or 153R, voice input mode 1 will be maintained regardless of any subsequent operation of that voice input key (if it is set to "voice input mode 1B"). Even if you "long press" input key 153L (153R) again (twice in a row), voice input mode 1 will remain.

If step SM94 determines that the time limit TY has not been exceeded, proceed to step SM95. A determination is then made as to whether input has been completed. If step SM95 returns a "Yes" result, induction heating operation will automatically begin within a certain period of time (e.g., 10 seconds). In other words, when using the left operation unit 16L (in the case of single cooking mode HM1) for the first heating means HM1, no special input key operation is required to start heating, and the heating operation will proceed directly (C22). Note that the system may be modified so that actual induction heating operation will begin when an input key 152L other than the one operated in step SM8 (see FIG. 33) is touched.

On the other hand, if the results of steps SM93 and SM95 are "No", the process returns to step SM93 and waits for a touch input from the user US.
If it is determined in step SM94 that the time limit TY has been exceeded, step SM94 returns "No" and the process proceeds to step SM97 for error processing. Note that the error processing here is slightly different from the automatic shutdown processing 1 shown in step SM6 of Fig. 33, and refers to returning the display from the third specific screen 16M3 to the initial standby screen 16MH, displaying a message indicating that the input was not made properly, or an audio notification from the audio notification unit 50. Thereafter, the process may proceed to step SM5 and then to step SM6 for automatic shutdown processing.

Next, FIG. 37 will be described.
Fig. 37 shows the operation of the cooking appliance 1 when cooking is performed by acquiring recipe data CD from an external device (such as the communication terminal 200). Fig. 37 shows the operation when the central operation unit 15M is used. This is different from the explanatory diagram shown in Fig. 32, which includes the left and right operation units 15L and 15R.
The range indicated by the dashed frame indicates the range that can be input by voice in "voice input mode 1" that can be set by "long pressing" input key (dual-purpose key) 153M, and in "voice input mode 2" that can be selected with input key 180.

The same parts as those in FIG. 32 are given the same reference numerals and redundant explanations may be omitted.
Steps S2A to S6 show the operation steps in the cooperative cooking mode KM1.
Steps S7A to S11 show the operation steps in the combined cooking mode KM2.
Steps S12A to S15 show the operation steps for the single cooking mode KM3 using the first heating means HM1, i.e., the central heating port 4 C. Note that there is also a cooking method in which the microwave oscillator (magnetron) 11 and the radiant heat heating means 12 are used separately, but a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the main power switch 20 is turned on, the standby initial screen 16MH is first displayed on the central display section 16M (step S1).
Step S1A collectively shows a series of processes for acquiring recipe data CD from an external communication terminal 200, cloud server 300, or the like.

Steps S2A, S7A, and S12A perform the determination processes corresponding to steps S2, S7, and S12 in FIG. 32, respectively, but are slightly different from those in FIG.
In steps S2, S7, and S12 in FIG. 32, input from the input operation unit 15 is received to determine whether the cooperative cooking mode KM1 or the combined cooking mode KM2 is selected.
In contrast, in step S1A of FIG. 37, the data acquisition unit 53 analyzes the first received "preview information 1" and identifies at least the identification information of the cooking menu. At this point, it is not necessary to identify one of the three cooking modes. For example, when the first portion M1 of cooking step 1 of the recipe data CD for the cooking menu "hamburger steak" is received, the identification information 167 is recognized.

In step S1A, the identification information is further determined and the specific input key that must be operated to obtain data for cooking process 1 is identified as 153M. A display is then displayed prompting the user to operate this specific input key 153. At the time of step S1, the initial standby screen 16MH is displayed, but upon receiving advance notice 1 from the outside, the display switches to the receiving operation display screen 16MM (not shown), which indicates that a response operation to receive a recipe is in progress.

Furthermore, when the specific input key 153 is operated, predetermined selection information A is transmitted to the outside, and upon receiving this selection information A, the communication terminal 200 transmits the data of the first portion M1 for setting cooking process 1, and this data is received in step S1A.

In steps S2A, S7A, and S12A, the data in the first portion M1 received in step S1A is analyzed, and one of the three cooking modes is selected. In this embodiment 1, when the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is selected and the cooking menu is "hamburger," the only specific input key is 153M on the central operation unit 15M. Note that in step S1A, after receiving the advance notice information 1 from an external communication terminal 200, cloud server 300, etc., a process is performed in advance to operate the appropriate specific input key corresponding to the advance notice information 1. Details of this process are explained in detail in Figures 54, 55, 59, 60, etc.

As described above, by analyzing the operation of the input operation unit 15 in step S1A with the input signal analysis unit 52, and by analyzing the contents of the notification signal A for one piece of recipe data CD with the data acquisition unit 53, it is possible to reliably identify each of the four items: cooking process (cooking process 1, 2, etc.), cooking mode, food (cooking menu), and specific input key. The information on the identified cooking mode as a result of this identification is used sequentially in the subsequent steps S2A, S7A, and S12A.

In step S2A, it is determined whether the cooking mode is the cooperative cooking mode KM1. If it is determined that the cooking mode is the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the process proceeds to step S3.
In step S3, if the above-described "permission conditions 1" and "permission conditions 2" are satisfied, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, and one cooking menu item acquired from the outside and the control conditions are displayed. By touching the input key 154M or 155M, the control conditions (heat power, target heating temperature, etc.) for that cooking menu item can be changed, and the change results can be displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step S5).

FIG. 37 shows a case where the mode is switched to the voice input mode before step S5.
As explained in Fig. 32, in the touch input mode, the control conditions (heat power, target heating temperature, etc.) can be changed by touching the input key 154M or 155M. In Fig. 37, if a "long press" is performed when operating the specific input key 153M in step S1A, the mode is switched to voice input mode from that point on, and the desired control conditions can be input by voice (step S20). In other words, touching the input key 154M or 155M is not required.

In step S5, if the control conditions for one linked cooking menu (cooking name: hamburger) are acceptable, simply press input key 151M. This will allow you to move to cooking step 1 of linked cooking mode KM1 (step S6).

As described above, if input key (dual-purpose key) 153M is "long pressed" in step S1A, control device 40 switches to a voice-based "input standby state," allowing control conditions to be input by voice within a certain range in step S20. For example, the cooking menu and control conditions can be input as a set by user US's voice, such as "hamburger steak, preheat 180°C." It is also possible to input only the control conditions other than the food to be cooked by voice, such as "heat level 7 hours 10 minutes." Since the cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger steak") is already known when advance notice information 1 or recipe data CD is acquired, it is also possible to input only the control conditions other than the food to be cooked by voice, as described above.

Next, FIG. 37 will be described.
If it is determined in step S2A that the selected cooking menu is not in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the process proceeds to step S7A. If it is determined in step S7A that the selected cooking menu is in the combined cooking mode KM2, the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed on the central display unit 16M (step S8). In step S8, the second specific screen 16M2 starts to be displayed, and one cooking menu acquired from the outside and the control conditions are displayed.
That is, the second specific screen 16M2 displays only one cooking menu that is the target of the recipe data CD. This is different from step S8 in FIG.
In the touch input mode, in step S10, each time the input key 154M or 155M is touched, the results reflecting different control conditions can be displayed on the second specific screen.

However, in Figure 37, if the specific input key (multi-purpose key) 153M is "pressed and held" in step S1A, the control device 40 switches to a voice-based "input standby state," and in step S21, control conditions can be input using voice input mode.

In step S10, if the control conditions for one (composite cooking mode) cooking menu are acceptable, pressing input key 151M will allow you to proceed to cooking step 1 of composite cooking mode KM2 (step S11).

In this way, since the system can be switched to a voice-activated "input standby state" in step S1A, control conditions can be input by voice within a certain range in step S21. For example, control conditions can be input by the user US speaking, such as "500W." Note that multiple control conditions can also be input by voice simultaneously, such as "500W 10 minutes."

Next, FIG. 37 will be described.
If it is determined in step S7A that the recipe data CD is not for the combined cooking mode KM2, the process proceeds to step S12A. If it is determined in step S12A that the recipe data CD is for a single cooking mode using the heating chamber 6 or the central heating port 4C, the third specific screen 16M3 is displayed on the central display unit 16M (step S13). That is, in step S13, the display of the third specific screen 16M1 is started, and the identification information of one cooking menu acquired from the outside and the control conditions are displayed.

The control conditions (heat level, heating time, etc.) for the cooking menu displayed on the third specific screen 16M3 can be selected by pressing input key 154R or 155R (step S22).

However, in this Figure 37, if the input key 153M is "pressed and held" at step S1A, the control device 40 switches to an "input standby state" by voice, so that at step 22, the control conditions can be input in voice input mode.
In other words, since the control device 40 has switched to the voice input standby state before step S22, in step S22, the control conditions can be input by voice within a certain range. For example, the control conditions can be input by voice from the user US, such as "heat level 2, 30 minutes." In this case, too, the name of the cooking method has already been determined, so there is no need to speak the name of the cooking method.

As is clear from FIG. 37, the cooking device 1 of this embodiment 1 has the following features:
The input operation unit 15 has a first input operation unit (a right operation unit 15R and a left operation unit 15L) for the first heating means HM1 and a second input operation unit (a central operation unit 15M) for the second heating means,
The first input operation unit 15L and the second input operation unit 15R have input keys A (153L and 153R) arranged thereon, and the second input operation unit 15M has input keys B (153M and 154M) arranged thereon,
The control device 40 is characterized in that it validates the touch input of either the input key A (153L, 153R) or the input key B (153M, 154M), whichever comes first, and does not start the input process using the other input key until input of the control conditions (heat power, heating time, etc.) for the heating cooking mode (coordinated cooking mode KM1, combined cooking mode KM2, single cooking mode KM3) or control mode (the "warming" mode, etc.) is completed and heating cooking is started.

In other words, for the three heating cooking modes (cooperative cooking mode KM1, combined cooking mode KM2, and single cooking mode KM3), only one of the input keys 153M, 154M, 153L, and 153R that is touched first will be accepted by the control device 40, and the other input keys will not accept input commands.

Therefore, for example, if input key 154M is touched and then held down to switch to voice input mode, input from other input keys will become impossible (however, input functions for input keys 151M and 152M will be maintained).

Therefore, when the voice input mode is started by pressing either input key A (153L, 153R) or input key B (153M, 154M), it becomes impossible to select other cooking modes or control modes, and setting conditions will not be inadvertently input by voice input.

Furthermore, if the collaborative cooking mode KM1 is entered using one input key (e.g., 153M) in voice input mode, the voice input mode that was in effect up to that point is canceled when input key 151M is pressed to start cooking. Therefore, there will be no confusion if the user US subsequently performs a touch operation to select another cooking mode.

Furthermore, when "Preview Information 1" including information indicating a specific (single) cooking menu is transmitted from the external communication terminal 200, and a specific input key indicated in that preview information 1 is operated in response to receiving that preview information 1 (step S1A), the process proceeds to obtain recipe data CD for the cooking menu related to preview information 1. In other words, there is no need to select a cooking mode, cooking menu, control menu, etc. by touch input of input keys 153 or 154.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 1, when using recipe data CD acquired from an external source for cooking with two or more types of heating means and two or more cooking steps, such as in cooperative cooking mode KM1, recipe data CD can only be acquired by receiving advance notice information 1 at least at the cooking step 1 stage and cooking step 2 stage, and then entering the correct specific input key (153M for cooking step 1 in Figure 37).

Next, FIG. 38 and FIG. 39 will be described.
Fig. 38 is a flowchart 1 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data CD from the outside in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 39 is a flowchart 2 showing the operation of acquiring recipe data CD from the outside.

In Fig. 38, step SL1 performs a process corresponding to step SM1 in Fig. 33. The next step SL2 performs a process corresponding to step SM2 in Fig. 33.
Step SL3 is a process equivalent to step SS5 of connecting to the outside and notifying the outside, which has been described with reference to Fig. 31. That is, this step is intended to ask the user US to confirm in advance whether or not to transmit a signal requesting provision of recipe data CD to the communication terminal 200 or cloud server 300 that has been registered and set in advance.

As mentioned above, it is also possible to automatically execute an external connection from this step SL3 (SS5) (if it has been set in advance by the function setting key 151KP mentioned above).
This step SL3 involves the operation of input keys by the user US, and will be described in detail with reference to Figures 54, 55, 59, 60, etc. If the control device 40 has acquired the recipe data CD, the next step SL4 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SL5.

The next step SL5 is a process to determine whether the received recipe data CD meets the predetermined permission conditions. As mentioned above, for example, in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, anything that does not meet "Permission Condition 1" or "Permission Condition 2" is not permitted as a cooking menu (see Figures 29 and 30). In the combined cooking mode KM2, a determination is also made as to whether a specific "Permission Condition 3" is met. Permission Condition 3 is the same as that described in step SM61 of Figure 35. Furthermore, the first heating means HM1 must meet the previously described "Permission Condition 4" (see step SM81 of Figure 36).

If it is determined in step SL5 that the permission conditions are not met, and the cooking menu belongs to cooperative cooking mode KM1, a signal (data) is sent from the communication unit 51 to the outside to notify that the recipe data CD cannot be received (step SL9), as in the process described in step ST8 of Figure 29. Note that while Figure 29 shows the case of cooperative cooking mode KM1, such a "non-reception message" is also sent for combined cooking mode KM2 and single cooking mode KM3. This will be explained in more detail later.

If the permission conditions are met, the determined recipe data CD is stored as regular data in a predetermined storage area of the recipe data storage unit 42 (step SL6).
The identification information 167, 160 and control conditions (heat power, heating time, target temperature, etc.) included in the recipe data CD are displayed on the central display unit 16. For example, a cooking menu for the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SL6).

In the first embodiment, the control device 40 acquires the recipe data CD for cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 by sequentially acquiring the recipe data CD for each cooking step, i.e., in two stages: a first part M1 for setting cooking step 1 and a second part M2 for setting cooking step 2.
Therefore, when the recipe data CD for the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is acquired in step SL5, if the permission conditions are not met for the first part M1, the process cannot proceed to step SL6. Therefore, since the cooking process 1 cannot be set, the process cannot proceed to acquiring the data for the second part M2 for the cooking process 2. In other words, only the second part M2 for setting the cooking process 2 cannot be acquired.

The next step SL7 is a step for modifying the control conditions. For example, in the linked cooking mode KM1, the control conditions (for cooking process 1) displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (e.g., heating time, target heating temperature, heat level, etc.) can be changed as needed by operating the input keys 156M to 159M on the central operation unit 15M. Note that since the recipe data CD is acquired on a cooking menu basis, it is already determined that the cooking menu is a specific one (e.g., hamburger steak), and this cannot be changed to another cooking menu (e.g., roast beef).

If you wish to modify the control conditions, for example, in collaborative cooking mode KM1, you can simply input the appropriate changes using the central operation unit 15M (step SL10). In this case, you can select "voice input mode 1" and enter the changes by voice.

If it is determined in step SL4 that recipe data CD (first portion M1 that sets cooking process 1) has not been received, the process proceeds to step SL8. In step SL8, a determination is made as to whether a preset time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SL4. However, if the time limit TX has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SL11. Step SL11 is "automatic shut-off process 1," which automatically shuts off the main power supply, similar to step SM6 described in Figure 33. Note that the time limit TX in step SL8 and the time limit TX in step SM6 described in Figure 33 do not have to be the same time, and different times may be set.

In the case of cooperative cooking mode KM1, Figure 38 only shows the steps up to obtaining the first part M1 that sets cooking process 1 and modifying the control conditions, but after cooking process 1 is completed and before cooking process 2 is started, as explained in step SL3 above, it is necessary to operate the specific input key that should be operated before cooking process 2 and send selection information A (202) to communication terminal 200.

Next, we will explain Figure 39.
FIG. 39 shows the operation when the input key 180 is operated to select "voice input mode 2."
In FIG. 39, step SS5 is the same as step SS5 explained in FIG. 31, so a duplicated explanation will be omitted.
Step SS10 is a step for determining whether or not the input key 180 has been operated in voice input mode 2. If the input key 180 has been pressed once, the answer is "Yes" and the process proceeds to the next step SS11. If the input key 180 has not been operated, the process proceeds to the normal touch input mode (step SS15).

If the data acquisition unit 53 can acquire the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51, step SS11 becomes "Yes."
If it is determined in step SS11 that the recipe data CD has not been received, the process proceeds to step SS16. In step SS16, it is determined whether a preset time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SS11. However, if the time limit TX has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SS17. Step SS17 is "automatic shut-off process 1," which automatically shuts off the main power supply, similar to step SM6 described in FIG. 33. Note that the time limit TX in step SS17 and the time limit TX in step SM6 described in FIG. 33 do not have to be the same time, and different times may be set.

The contents of the recipe data CD received in step SS11 are determined to determine whether they satisfy the aforementioned "permission conditions" (see step SL5 in Figure 38), and if so, step SS12 returns "Yes."

If the permission conditions are not met, as described in step SL9 of Figure 38, the communication unit 51 sends a signal (data) to the outside to notify that the recipe data CD cannot be received (SS18).

If the permission conditions are met, the determined recipe data CD is stored in a predetermined storage area of the recipe data storage unit 42 as regular data.
Furthermore, the identification information 167, 160, etc. and the control conditions included in the recipe data are displayed on the central display unit 16. For example, if the recipe data CD is for the cooperative cooking mode KM1, it is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SS13).

The control conditions (e.g., heating time, target heating temperature, heat power, etc.) displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 can be changed as needed by voice input acquired via the voice signal receiving unit 56 of the input operation unit 15 (steps SS14 and SS15).

Once "Voice Input Mode 2" is selected using the input key 180, "Voice Input Mode 2" will continue until the heating operation for one cooking menu item begins. It will not switch to "Touch Input Mode" during the input stage. This is because switching during the input process could cause confusion for the user US.

If you want to switch to touch input mode, simply press input key 180 again at any stage. The touch input mode will be restored from the moment you press it. Note that if you press and hold input key 154M, for example, after returning to touch input mode, the mode will switch to "voice input mode 1." Therefore, in voice input mode 1 (set to voice input mode 1B), if you perform an input operation on input key 156M, for example, the input function of that input key has not been disabled, so you can still enter text.

The explanation so far has not gone into detail about the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM1.
In the cooperative cooking mode KM1, it is necessary to sequentially acquire the first part M1 that sets cooking process 1 and the first part M2 that sets cooking process 2. Therefore, if it is determined in step SS12 that the permission conditions are not met after receiving the first part M1, the operation of acquiring the recipe data CD cannot be continued at that point.

Next, FIG. 40 will be described.
Fig. 40 is a flowchart for explaining the operation of the heating control unit 43 when the control device 40 switches to voice input mode 1 in the cooking appliance 1. Note that Fig. 40 shows the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, but the operation is basically the same in other cooking modes.

In FIG. 40, step SS20 indicates the time when the input mode of the control device 40 is switched to voice input mode 1.
In the next step SS21, the voice notification unit 50 and the central display unit 16M notify that voice input acceptance has begun. The state of the central display unit 16M at this point is, for example, as shown in Fig. 21. That is, a mark 154V indicating that the mode has been switched to the voice input mode is displayed on the central operation unit 15M, and voice input mode display information 179A indicating that voice input is being accepted is displayed as auxiliary information 179 on the first specific screen 16M1.

In the next step SS22, the voice signal analysis unit 58 transitions to an input standby state in which it receives voice commands from the user US. Also, a time measurement unit (not shown) inside the control device 40 begins measuring the elapsed time.

Speech input information uttered by the user US is acquired by the audio signal receiving unit 56 via a microphone (not shown). The audio signal receiving unit 56 converts the acquired audio information into a predetermined audio signal and transmits it to the audio signal analyzing unit 58 (step SS23).

The audio signal analysis unit 56 analyzes the received audio signal (step SS24) and displays the input content on the central display unit 16M (first specific screen 16M1). For example, as described in FIG. 22, it may announce something like "Hamburger steak, right hand, automatically selected" by voice, and also display this in text on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SS25).

In step SS25, if the input information is insufficient, the audio notification unit 50 will further provide audio guidance such as "Please specify the preheating temperature." Alternatively, the range of specific control conditions may be announced, such as "A preheating temperature of 200°C is recommended. Please specify the temperature."

If the input of the control conditions necessary to start the heating operation is insufficient, the process returns to step SS23. Before returning to step SS23, the audio notification unit 50 indicates the control conditions that are insufficient to be input and prompts the user to input them (not shown).

If the heating control unit 43 determines that the input of the control conditions required to start the heating operation has been completed (step SS26), the process proceeds to step SS27. In step SS27, since voice input has been completed, a notice is given that voice input mode 1 will be cancelled, and it is recommended that the input key 151M be touched (step SS27). Note that voice input mode 1 is immediately cancelled when the input key 151M is touched.

On the other hand, if no voice command is received in step SS23, the process proceeds to step SS28. In step SS28, it is determined whether the time elapsed since step SS22 has exceeded a predetermined time limit TZ. If the time limit TZ has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SS23. However, if the time limit TZ (e.g., 5 minutes) has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SS29. Step SS29 is "automatic shutdown process 2," similar to step SM6 in FIG. 33. Note that this "automatic shutdown process 2" is a series of processes in which, while the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, the voice notification unit 50 issues an alarm to the user US, then the screen automatically switches to the standby initial screen 16MH, and then the main power switch 20 is automatically opened. This prevents the input process from being left unattended for a long period of time for some reason, ensuring safety.

Next, we will explain Figure 41.
FIG. 41 shows the display contents of the central display section 16M corresponding to each of the main operation steps after the main power switch 20 is turned on.
When the main power switch 20 is turned off, the central display unit 16M is not activated and does not display any information.
When the main power switch 20 is turned ON, the control device 40 performs a self-diagnosis to check for abnormalities, etc., as described above, and then displays "Display Screen 1," which is one display form of the standby initial screen 16MH in Figure 41, on the central display unit 16M.

In the display screen 1 shown in Figure 41, 60A is a display message informing users that the power is on. 60B is two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code) that guides users via the network NW to the recipe data providing server 301, a dedicated recipe posting site. 60C is text explaining the meaning of the two-dimensional code (hereinafter referred to as "two-dimensional information explanation text").

When the two-dimensional code 60B is optically read by the communication terminal 200, it can be directed to and connected to the recipe data providing server 301, which stores information on various cooking recipes. This two-dimensional information description 60C and the display text 60A are a type of "standby common information" 60N.

After display screen 1 in Figure 41 is displayed, display screen 2C is automatically displayed. On display screen 2C, recommendation text 60H prompts the user US to select a heating source. Note that display screen 2A or 2B may be displayed after display screen 1.

On display screen 2A, text display 60D reading "Caution: Bumping" is one type of warning display. "Bumping" refers to the phenomenon where, when heating a viscous food (liquid) such as curry or stew, the inside of the food overheats above its boiling point, causing sudden, violent boiling. As steam escapes from the heated liquid, hot droplets can fly, which can be dangerous. The timing and cause of bumping is said to be the introduction of foreign matter or impact from outside. For this reason, when a metal pot or similar containing food is placed on top plate 3 and induction heated, caution is advised when stirring the food. The information in warning display 60E is a type of "Standby Common Information" 60N.

The four display screens shown in Figure 41, display screen 1, display screen 2A, 2B, and 2C, are called the "common screen" or "standby initial screen" 16MH. Note that forms other than these four may also be included in the common screen 16MH.

On display screen 2B, 60E is a warning message that the inside of heating chamber 6 is at a high temperature and warns against careless contact. If the control device 40 detects that heating chamber 6 has not yet cooled down sufficiently after oven cooking has been performed in heating chamber 6, the display screen 2 will automatically switch to this state.

Display screens 2A and 2B cannot be displayed simultaneously, but they may be displayed alternately at intervals of a few seconds to alert users to both the bumping boiling indication and the high temperature indication. The audio notification unit 50 may also simultaneously output the alerts on display screens 2A and 2B via audio.

41, display screen 2C includes the above-mentioned acquisition operation support information 60P. This acquisition operation support information 60P indicates that, in order to acquire recipe data CD in cooking appliance 1, it is necessary to touch a specific input key in advance.
For example, in the case of a cooking menu item called "hamburger steak" belonging to the cooperative cooking mode KM1, cooking step 1 is performed using either the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L, so the obtained operation support information 60P displays that either the input key 152L or 152R should be touched. In addition, the audio notification unit 50 may provide an audio notification in conjunction with this display.

As is clear from display screen 1 to display screens 2A-2C in Figure 41, the display of these various pieces of information, including the acquisition operation support information 60P, utilizes the entire display screen. In other words, rather than displaying the information partially in any of the aforementioned first area 22 to third area 24, in order to ensure as large a display area as possible, the first area 22 to third area 24 are displayed as an integrated unit so that they cannot be distinguished, and the user US sees the information displayed across the entire central display section 16M.

Next, we will explain Figure 42.
FIG. 42 is an enlarged plan view illustrating the operation of the left display unit 16L of the cooking appliance 1. As shown in FIG.
Fig. 42 shows the third specific screen 16L3 for the single cooking mode KM3. Fig. 42 is displayed when the input key 153L (see Fig. 6) is operated after step SS4 in Fig. 31.

Next, when input key 152L is operated, the control menus to be implemented by the left heating port 4L are displayed one by one on the left display unit 16L. As shown on display screen 3A in Figure 42, the user can separately set whether the control menu to be displayed first (default setting) is "Keep Warm," "Frying" on display screen 3B, or "Preheat" on display screen 3C.

Furthermore, when input key 153L is operated at step SM8 in Figure 33, or when input key 152L is operated at step SM93 in Figure 36, the control menu to be implemented for left heating port 4L is displayed on left display unit 16L. Each time input key 152L is pressed, the control menu display changes one by one (such as keep warm, deep fry, preheat, etc.). In other words, each time input key 152L is pressed, one of multiple control menus can be selected.

The control menus that can be selected for the left heating port 4L (in induction heating single cooking mode KM3) include, for example, "Keep Warm," "Boil Water," "Stew," "Frying (Automatic Cooking)," and "Preheat." The operating time, heat output, or operating pattern of the left IH coil 9L differs for each control menu.

Display screen 3A in Fig. 42 shows the case where the "keep warm" control menu is selected. Display screen 3B shows the case where the "frying" control menu is selected. Display screen 3C shows the case where the "preheating" control menu is selected.
The auxiliary information 179A is displayed adjacent to the display portion of the name of each control menu on the third specific screen 16M3 after switching to the voice input mode. Therefore, it is not displayed when the voice input mode is not in effect.

When selecting "Keep Warm" ("IH Keep Warm" shown in FIG. 12) in the control menu (for induction heating only cooking mode KM3) using the central IH coil 9M responsible for the central heating port 4C on the central display unit 16M, the input key 154M or 155M can be touched several times or more to display the display screen 3A shown in FIG. 42. In this case, the central display unit 16M will have a display format similar to that of display screen 3A, and this screen will be referred to as the "third specific screen" 16M3.

Next, we will explain Figure 43.
43 illustrates the operational steps of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 from the time recipe data CD is acquired until the cooking process is completed, in the case where the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is selected.

FIG. 43 shows the process from the acquisition of the first portion M1 data for setting cooking step 1 of the recipe data CD for one cooking menu requiring cooking steps 1 and 2.
The control device 40 determines whether the first portion M1 was successfully received (step SU1). If successful, the process proceeds to step SU2. In step SU2, the identification information (e.g., 167) of the corresponding cooking menu, the set control conditions (heat power, cooking time, etc.), and information on all cooking steps are displayed on one of the first specific screen 16M1 to the third specific screen 16M3. Note that the "cooking step information" here may also be the process information 172 described in the following FIG. 44.

If the cooking is from an integrated cooking menu, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed in step SU2. Therefore, if the content displayed on the first specific screen 16M is acceptable, cooking can begin. However, if there is a preheating process using the first heating means HM1 before cooking process 1, touch the input key (153L, 153R) on the left operation unit 15L or right operation unit 15R corresponding to the selected left heating port 4L or right heating port 4R.

Cooking process 1 is started (step SU3), and if timer cooking is in use, cooking process 2 ends when the set time has elapsed (step SU4). If timer cooking is not in use, cooking process 1 is started (step SU3) and stopped (step SU4) in response to start and stop commands from the user US.

In step SU4, when cooking process 1 is completed, in the case of the linked cooking mode KM1, the first specific screen 16M1 (or 16L1, 16R1) for cooking process 1 is maintained, and various information for proceeding to cooking process 2 is displayed (step SU5).
In step SU5, information such as that cooking process 1 has been completed and that an input operation is required to obtain second portion M2 for setting cooking process 2 is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1.

Next, as a preliminary step before receiving recipe data CD for the second part M2 from the communication terminal 200, when advance notice information 1 (201) is transmitted from the communication terminal 200, after receiving the advance notice information 1, the specific input key corresponding to advance notice information 1 is operated (step SU5).

For example, when cooking an integrated cooking menu, if cooking step 2 is performed in heating chamber 6, it is necessary to operate the only specific input key 153M on the central operation unit 15M. For example, in the case of the aforementioned "hamburger steak," cooking step 2 is performed using heating chamber 6 in combination with the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3, so the specific input key 153M is touched (step SU6).

In the next step SU7, it is determined whether or not the data of the second portion M1 has been successfully received from the communication terminal 200. If successful, the process proceeds to step SU8.
In step SU8, the display contents of the stage of step SU2 are updated. This "update" means, for example, that the process information 172 (see FIG. 44) is changed and the display changes to emphasize the next process.
In step SU8, as explained in step SU2, the identification information (e.g., 167) of the corresponding cooking menu, the set control conditions (heat power, heating time, etc.), and information on all cooking processes are displayed on the first specific screen 16M1.

Then, by pressing input key 151M on central operation unit 15M, cooking process 2 can be started (step SU9). Furthermore, in the case of timer cooking, cooking process 2 can be automatically ended when the set time is reached (step SU10). In the case of non-timer cooking, cooking process 2 can be ended immediately by the user US pressing input key 152M (step SU10). Furthermore, in the case of control conditions that detect the internal temperature of heating chamber 6 or the temperature of the food being cooked and automatically stop cooking, cooking process 2 can be automatically ended based on these temperature conditions (step SU10).

Next, a description will be given of Figures 44 to 46.
44 to 46 are enlarged plan views showing the central operation unit 15M and the central display unit 16M when recipe data CD is acquired and cooking (cooking name: hamburger steak) in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is performed.

FIG. 44 shows the state immediately after receiving the advance notice information 1 from the communication terminal 200, and at this stage the data of the first portion M1 has not yet been received.
44, reference numeral 177 denotes reception start information indicating that the stage is before the recipe data CD is acquired from the external device (the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300). The text "Before reception starts" is displayed, making it easy to understand that the cooking menu (for cooking hamburger steak) displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 is in the middle of being acquired.
172 is process information, and in this Figure 44, it can be seen that three processes are carried out in sequence: a preheating process using the first heating means HM1, cooking process 1 using the first heating means HM1, and cooking process 2 using microwave heating means (second heating means HM2).

Reference numeral 170 denotes operation support information. In the example of Fig. 44, the user US is prompted to operate either the specific input key 152L or 152R to select either the left heating port 4L or the right heating port 4R for the preheating process using the first heating means HM1. In the process information 172, the word "preheat" is displayed in white, indicating that the process will proceed to the preheating stage.
As shown in Figure 44, all input functions of the various input keys 153M to 159M, 151M and 152M of the central operation unit 15M are disabled, and as can be seen from the fact that no star-shaped figure is drawn at the position of the light-emitting unit 21M, the light-emitting unit 21M is not emitting any light (including blinking).

Next, we will explain Figure 45.
FIG. 45 is an enlarged plan view 2 showing the central operation unit 15M and the central display unit 16M when recipe data CD is acquired and cooking in cooperative cooking mode KM1 (cooking name: hamburger steak) is performed.
45, reference numeral 173 denotes an external recipe identification section that indicates that the recipe data CD is obtained from an external device (the communication terminal 200 or the cloud server 300). The words "Received Recipe" are displayed, and it is easy to see that the cooking menu (for cooking hamburger steak) displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 is a recipe obtained from an external device.

In Figure 45, the light-emitting unit 21M corresponding to the input key 151M is in a standby state where the heating operation can be started at any time. To indicate this, it is flashing to prompt the user to operate the input key 151M. The dashed circle indicates that the light-emitting unit 21M is flashing.

In Figure 45, a star-shaped figure is drawn at the position of light-emitting unit 21M. This figure indicates that the input functions of the input keys (e.g., 156M, 157M) located in front of light-emitting unit 21M are active, and that touching them at this point will allow adjustments to the heat, heating time, etc.

45, light-emitting units 21M corresponding to input keys 157M and 156M are not emitting light. This is because the heating port has been selected in advance on the communication terminal 200 side, and advance notice information 1 (201) has been transmitted to the cooking appliance 1.
If the left and right heating ovens 4L and 4R have not been selected, as shown in FIG. 45, it is necessary to select either the heating oven specification section 171L, which selects cooking using the left heating oven 4L, or the heating oven specification section 171R, which selects cooking using the right heating oven 4R. To make this selection, the input functions of the corresponding input keys 156M and 157M must be enabled. FIG. 45 illustrates a case in which the received notice information 1 (201) includes selection information for the two heating ovens 4L and 4R during the process of acquiring the first portion M1 of recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200. In other words, this is the state after the specific input key 152L on the left operation section 15L has already been operated and selection information A (202) indicating that operation has been transmitted.

In this embodiment 1, as explained in Figures 62, 63, etc., a function is provided to select either the left heating port 4L or the right heating port 4R in advance (see step SG5 in Figure 63), and the heating unit specification sections 171L and 171R in Figure 45 are not displayed.

The data (information) of the first part M1 of the recipe data CD acquired from the external device is displayed preferentially on the first specific screen 16M1 by displaying the external recipe identification section 173. That is, the identification information 167 of the received recipe data CD is displayed in the "display position B" of the first specific screen 16M1. Therefore, by pressing the input key 151M as shown in FIG. 45, cooking step 1 of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 can be started immediately.
As will be explained later, after the first specific screen 16M1 as shown in Figure 45 is displayed, if cooking process 1 is performed using the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L, actual induction heating will not start unless either the input key (e.g., input key 153L) of the left operation unit 15L or the right operation unit 15R is touched.

In Figure 45, the cooking appliance 1 is in a standby state where it can start heating at any time. To indicate this, the light-emitting element 21M corresponding to the input key 151M is flashing to prompt the user to operate it. The dashed circle indicates that the light-emitting element 21M is flashing.

Next, we will explain Figure 46.
FIG. 46 shows the state immediately after receiving the advance notice information 2 (of the second part M2) from the communication terminal 200, and at this stage the data of the second part M2 has not yet been received.
46, reference numeral 177 denotes reception start information indicating that the stage is before the recipe data CD is acquired from the external device. The text "Before reception starts" is displayed, making it easy to understand that the cooking menu (for cooking hamburger steak) displayed on this first specific screen 16M1 is in the middle of being acquired.
Reference numeral 172 denotes process information, and in FIG. 46 it can be seen that this is the stage before the execution of cooking process 2, which uses the second heating means HM2 and the third heating means HM3 in combination.

Reference numeral 170 denotes operation support information. In the example of Fig. 46, the user US is asked to select the specific input key 153M of the central operation unit 15M for cooking step 2.
46, the input functions of all the various input keys of the central operation unit 15M (154M to 159M, 151M, and 152M) except for the specific input key 153M are disabled. In other words, as can be seen from the fact that no star-shaped figure is drawn in the position of the light-emitting unit 21M, the light-emitting unit 21M does not emit any light (including blinking).
On the other hand, for the specific input key 153M, the corresponding light emitting section 21M is flashing to prompt the user to operate the specific input key 153M. The dashed circle indicates that the light emitting section 21M is flashing.

Next, we will explain Figure 47.
FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooking steps of the collaborative cooking menu and the operations of the input operation unit 15.
In the example of FIG. 47, the cooperative cooking menu is made up of two cooking steps, cooking step 1 and cooking step 2.
FIG. 47 shows a case where cooking is performed according to recipe data CD from an external source.
Cooking step 1 is an example in which the second heating means HM2 is used.

The data of the first portion M1 (cooking process 1) of the recipe data CD is acquired during the preparation period P1 in FIG.
In the data of the first part M1 (cooking process 1), in the example of Fig. 47, the following conditions are defined in a predetermined computer program format. Control conditions such as heat power may also be defined.
(1) Cooking menu identification information (e.g., 167) and cooking process 1 identification number.
(2) The heating means to be driven (if there are multiple heating means, the order in which they are driven) and the control conditions such as their heating power.
(3) When the first part of the advance notice information 1 (201) is received, information specifying the specific input key 153 is displayed on the display unit 16.
(4) When the first part of the setting information is received, the heating operation of the cooking process 1 is started after a touch operation from the input key 151M is received.
(5) When input key 153R (153L) is pressed, the heating operation of cooking process 1 is stopped, or when certain conditions (continuous cooking time or reaching of target temperature) are met, the heating operation of cooking process 1 is stopped at that point.
(6) After the heating operation of cooking step 1 is stopped, a heating pause period P3 (described later) is maintained for a certain period of time from that point onward.
(7) When cooking process 1 is stopped, the communication terminal 200 is notified that cooking process 1 has ended or that heating pause period P3 has begun.
(8) During the heating pause period, communication with the communication terminal 200 regarding the cooking process 2 is permitted.
It is to be noted that the data may further include data specifying the time length of the heating pause period P3. The above data (1) and (2) are essential, but data (3) to (8) may be omitted.

The data of the second portion M1 (cooking process 2) of the recipe data CD is acquired during the heating pause period P3 in FIG.
In the data of the second part M2 (cooking process 2), in the example of Fig. 47, the following conditions are defined in a predetermined computer program format. Control conditions such as heat power may also be defined.
(1) Cooking menu identification information (e.g., 167) and cooking process 2 identification number.
(2) The heating means to be driven (if there are multiple heating means, the order in which they are driven) and the control conditions such as their heating power.
(3) When the second part of the advance notice information 2 (201) is received, information specifying one or both of the specific input keys 152L and 152R is displayed on the display unit 16.
(4) When the second part of the setting information is received, the heating operation of the cooking process 2 is started after a touch operation from the input key 153L or 153R is received.
(5) When there is a touch operation input of input key 153L (153R), the heating operation of cooking process 2 is stopped, or when certain conditions (continuous cooking time or reaching of target temperature) are met, the heating operation of cooking process 2 is stopped at that point. Note that the data in (1) and (2) above are required, and data in (3) to (5) may be omitted.

In the example of recipe data CD in Figure 47, cooking step 1 is performed using a microwave heating source (second heating means HM2), and cooking step 2 involves moving the food to be cooked onto the top plate 3 and performing induction heating.

In addition, this cooking appliance 1 has additional protection measures in place to prevent cooking mode settings, control conditions, etc. from being inadvertently changed in response to external command signals.

In the example shown in Figure 47, the second heating means HM2 is operated first, and after that heating operation is completed, the first heating means HM1 is operated. However, the radiant heat heating means 12 may also be operated as the third heating means simultaneously with the second heating means HM2.

As shown in FIG. 47, the collaborative cooking menu shown here consists of four stages.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), which is the period from when input key 153M is operated to execute the cooperative cooking menu until cooking step 1 in heating chamber 6 is started by input key 151M.

Operation of the specific input key 153M (central operation unit 15M) during the preparation period P1 is one method required for communication from the communication terminal 200 to the cooking appliance 1. In other words, when advance notice information 1 (201) regarding the first part M1 of the recipe data CD is received from the communication terminal 200, it is necessary to touch the specific input key 153M accordingly.

Thereafter, when the input key 151M is operated after receiving the data relating to the first portion M1 of the recipe data CD, the preparation period P1 ends and the process moves to the heating and cooking period P2 (cooking step 1).
When the first part M1 of the recipe data CD is received, the standby initial screen 16MH is switched to the first specific screen 16M1, so when the user US presses the input key 151M, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed on the central display section 16M.

P2 is a heating and cooking period (cooking step 1) by the first heating means HM1.
In this cooking step 1, microwaves are supplied to the inside of the heating chamber 6, and the operation of heating and cooking the food (not shown) to be cooked is started.
This cooking process 1 is started when the control device 40 confirms that the door 7 has been opened once during the preparation period P1 and then closed. The door open/close signal from the open/close detection unit 10 is used by the control device 40.
The control device 40 measures the time required from when the door 7 is opened until it is closed again, and if a certain allowable time TX is exceeded, a safety measure is adopted such that the heating operation will not start even if the input key 151M is pressed after that point. Cooking process 1 will not start unless the input key (start key) 151M is pressed after the door 7 is closed.

At the stage when cooking process 1 is started, the control device 40 has already finished determining the permission conditions (1 and 2), and therefore knows the usage status of both the right heating port 4R and the left heating port 4L.
Therefore, as a default setting, the control device 40 occupies the heating ports that are not being used for cooking at the start of cooking step 1 in the coordinated cooking mode. That is, it occupies both or either the right heating port 4R and the left heating port 4L. This makes it impossible to use the right heating port 4R and the left heating port 4L for other cooking.

The cooking step 1 is basically determined in advance by the operation program of the linked cooking menu. For example, when the standard heating time has elapsed, the audio notification unit 50 notifies the user, and the first specific screen 16M1 displays a message such as "X minutes will soon pass." In other words, the user US is notified that the cooking step 1 is nearing completion.
To end cooking process 1, the user US simply presses the input key 152M once.

P3 is a heating pause period during which cooking step 1 by the second heating means HM2 is temporarily stopped and cooking step 2 by the first heating means HM1 is started.
When the heating pause period P3 starts, the input functions of the right operation unit 15R and the left operation unit 15L that may be used in cooking process 2 are enabled. In addition, the left and right display units 16L and 16R also start to be driven, and the first specific screens 16L1 and 16R1 start to be displayed.

This heating pause period P3 is the period required to check the degree of heating of the food in cooking step 1, add seasonings, or add another food to continue cooking step 2. It is also the period required to move the food from the heating chamber 6 onto the top plate 3.

Operating the specific input key 152L (left operation unit 15L) or 152R (right operation unit 15R) during the heating pause period P3 is one method required for communication from the communication terminal 200 to the cooking appliance 1. In other words, when advance notice information 2 (201) regarding the second part M2 of the recipe data CD is received from the communication terminal 200, it is necessary to touch the specific input key 152L or 152R accordingly.

The heating outlet for cooking step 2 must be selected from either the right heating outlet 4R or the left heating outlet 4L. If the left heating outlet 4L is selected as the default setting, the specific input key 152L on the left operation unit 15L must be touched during the heating pause period P3.

Thereafter, when input key 153L is operated after receiving data relating to second portion M2 of recipe data CD, heating pause period P3 ends and heating cooking period P4 (cooking step 2) begins.
When the second portion M1 of the recipe data CD is received, the first specific screen 16M1 displayed on the central display unit 16M in cooking step 1 is maintained on the left and right display units 16L and 16R. In other words, when the user US presses the input key 152L, the first specific screen 16L1 is displayed on the left display unit 16L.

In cooking step 2, the user US may be able to individually set control conditions (e.g., cooking time and target temperature) by operating at least one of the two input keys 154L and 155L, but depending on the cooking menu, the user US may not be able to change the control conditions.

Cooking process 2 ends when input key 153L is pressed to stop the cooking operation. In the case of timer cooking, induction cooking will automatically end after the time has elapsed, and cooking process 2 will end.

As is clear from FIG. 47, from the time when the specific input key 153M of the central operation unit 15M used in cooking step 1 is touched to select the linked cooking menu, the heating chamber 6
Depending on the cooking menu, the specific input key during the preparation period P1 may be operated on the left operation unit 15L. In this case, the left heating port 4L is occupied when the input key 152L on the left operation unit 15L is operated.

As is clear from the above description, the control device 40 performs the following function restriction process.
(1) The input signals of the various input keys on the central operation unit 15M on which the specific input key 153M is located are disabled or input is restricted. For example, the input functions of the input keys 154M and 155M are disabled. As a result, the central operation unit 15M cannot be used (cannot input) during the cooking period P2 (cooking step 1) to the cooking period P4 (cooking step 2) except when input is required in the cooperative cooking mode KM1.
(2) Even when the heating cooking period (cooking step 1) begins, the left and right operating units 15L and 15R can be used (input signals from the left and right operating units 15L and 15R are not invalidated).

In this way, from the preparation period P1 before the heating cooking period (cooking step 1), only the heating chamber 6 for cooking step 1 is occupied.
Therefore, the heating chamber 6 is "occupied" by the selection of the linked cooking menu.

Furthermore, even if the control device 40 detects that the door 7 has changed from an open state to a closed state before the heating cooking period (cooking process 1) begins, if the temperature inside the heating chamber 6 is higher than the reference value, there is a concern that the control device 40, the non-contact (infrared) sensor 13, and thermistor sensor 14 may mistakenly recognize the abnormally high temperature as indicating that cooking has been completed before cooking has even begun in the heating chamber 6.
Therefore, if the temperature of the heating chamber 6 is too high before the start of the heating cooking period (cooking process 1), the first specific screen 15M1 will display a message stating that "the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means) cannot be used immediately due to high temperature."

The period indicated by the thick arrow in Figure 47 is the reception restriction period TZ1 for one recipe data CD. During the acquisition restriction period TZ1 indicated by the thick arrow, other recipe data CD (for a different cooking method) cannot be acquired apart from the one (one type) of recipe data CD acquired during the preparation period P1. In other words, this indicates that recipe data CD for a second cooking method cannot be acquired during this acquisition restriction period TZ1.

After the input key 153M is touched once and the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, the limiting operation by the limiting unit 55 is performed as follows.
The communication unit 51 enables the reception and transmission functions when the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed (before that, at least the reception function is disabled).
Furthermore, if two or more specific input keys (e.g., 153M and 152L) are operated simultaneously, the control device 40 will recognize this as an abnormal operation and will not process the input signals from these multiple specific input keys (e.g., 153M, 152L) as normal signals. When the selection information A (202) is transmitted before the acquisition of recipe data CD (described later), such (concurrent) input operations of multiple specific input keys will be ignored by the control device 40 or will be subject to a warning that this is an abnormal input.

The limiting unit 55 built into the control device 40 operates as follows.
As shown in Figure 47, it is not possible to change a cooking menu A of a specific cooperative cooking mode KM1 obtained from outside to another cooking menu B (e.g., "hamburger steak") of the same cooperative cooking mode KM1. To change the cooking menu, it is necessary to operate the input key 152M to cancel the cooperative cooking mode KM1 and return to the initial standby screen 16MH.

In other words, once the limited period indicated by the thick arrow in Figure 47 begins, cooking using the specific linked cooking menu A obtained from an external source can be canceled at any time by operating the input key 152M. Once a cancellation operation is performed in this way, the standby initial screen 16MH will be displayed again, and in that state (preparation period P1), it will be necessary to touch the specific input key 153M again in accordance with the operation of the communication terminal 200.

Furthermore, for a specific linked cooking menu A based on recipe data CD obtained from an external device, until all cooking steps (from cooking step 1 to cooking step 2 to cooking step N) have been completed, the control device 40 cannot obtain recipe data CD for another linked cooking menu C from an external device (such as the smartphone 200).

47, if the input key 151M is operated, it is possible to decide to start cooking in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 and to carry out cooking using the recipe data CD of the specific cooperative cooking menu A acquired immediately before this decision. However, until all cooking steps of this cooking menu A are completed, it is not possible to acquire additional recipe data CD from outside.
Thus, once the reception restriction period TZ1 for one recipe data CD has begun, reception of other recipe data CD cannot begin. This reception restriction period TZ1 ends automatically when one cooking menu is completely completed (as shown in FIG. 47). Alternatively, it ends automatically when start key 151M is pressed to start cooking. This latter example is not shown in FIG. 47. Note that the former "cooking menu is completely completed" includes both cases where the user US voluntarily stops cooking during the cooking process, and cases where the control device 40 automatically stops heating after detecting the passage of time, temperature conditions, etc.

Next, we will explain Figure 48.
FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the cooking steps of the collaborative cooking menu and the operation of the input operation unit.
In the example of FIG. 48, the cooperative cooking menu is made up of three cooking steps: cooking step 1, cooking step 2, and cooking step 3.
48 does not show a case where cooking is performed using recipe data CD from an external source, but rather shows an example where the user US selects a cooking menu using the input operation unit 15 and uses the recipe data CD stored in the recipe data storage unit 42. Note that cooking step 1 is an example where the first heating means HM1 is used.

In the example of Fig. 48, the contents of the recipe data CD are stored (memorized) in the recipe data storage unit 42 in a predetermined computer program format, with the following conditions. Control conditions such as heat power are also specified. Note that Fig. 48 does not show an example of the simplified recipe data CD.
(1) Waiting for input of the input key 151M to start induction heating operation at the right heating port 4R (or the left heating port 4L).
(2) When an input is made from the input key 153R (153L), the heating operation is stopped, or when a certain condition (continuous cooking time or reaching of a target temperature) is met, the heating operation is stopped at that point.

The program included in the recipe data CD defines heating pause periods P3 and P5, similarly to FIG.
The duration of these heating pause periods P3 and P5 is not specified. However, to prevent cooking from being interrupted for an excessively long time, it is possible to count the elapsed time for each cooking step based on the end of cooking step 1 and cooking step 2, and if 30 minutes have elapsed, for example, an alarm may be issued or the execution of the cooking menu may be forcibly stopped.

In the example recipe data CD in Figure 48, cooking step 1 is performed using the first heating means HM1, cooking step 2 is performed using a microwave heating source (second heating means HM2), and finally cooking step 3 is provided, in which the food to be cooked is moved onto the top plate 3 and induction heating is performed as a finishing touch to compensate for any insufficient heating.

In the example shown in Figure 48, the first heating means HM1 is operated first, and after that heating operation is completed, the second heating means HM2 is operated. However, the radiant heat heating means 12 may also be operated as the third heating means simultaneously with the second heating means HM2.

As shown in FIG. 48, the collaborative cooking menu shown here consists of six stages.
P1 is the first stage (preparation period), in which input key 153M is operated to execute cooperative cooking mode KM1, and input key 154M or 155M is operated to select a cooperative cooking menu. If the left heating outlet 4L is set as the default as described in Figure 45, start key 151M is pressed on the central operation unit 15M, and finally input key 153R is operated on the right operation unit 15R. The period until heating operation using the right heating outlet 4R (induction) begins is the preparation period P1.
If you want to perform cooking step 1 using the right heating port 4R, you can operate input key 156M or 157M as shown in Figure 45 to select the right heating port 4R, and then press start key 151M.

If the "Permission Condition 1" and "Permission Condition 2" are met when the input key 153M is operated, the control device 40 displays the first specific screen 16M1. Note that Figure 48 does not show the operation (start and end) of the first specific screen 16M1.

When the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed (on the central display unit 16M), one of the linked cooking menus can be selected by operating input keys 154M and 155M. Then, by operating input key 153R, the preparation period P1 ends, the mode switches to linked cooking mode (using the right heating port 4R), and the cooking period P2 begins.

When the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, if the identification information 167 of the collaborative cooking menu desired by the user US is displayed in a predetermined position on the first specific screen 16M1 (default display), there is no need to operate the input keys 154M and 155M.

The heating and cooking period P2 is a period of cooking step 1 performed by the first heating means HM1.
In this cooking step 1, an appropriate food to be cooked, such as a metal pot, is placed on the right heating port 4R, and after the input key 153R is pressed, induction heating operation is started.
In this way, in this embodiment 1, cooking process 1 is started by pressing start key 151M, but immediately after that, it is necessary to touch input key 153R or 153L on the corresponding right operation unit 15R or 15L.

At the stage when cooking step 1 is started, the control device 40 has already determined whether permission conditions 1 and 2 are met, and therefore knows which heating section of the first heating means HM1 (induction heating means) is in use. In other words, the use status of both the right heating port 4R and the left heating port 4L is known.
Therefore, as a default setting, the control device 40 determines to use the "right heating section" 4R in cooking step 3 of the cooperative cooking mode, and occupies this right heating port 4R.

The cooking step 1 is basically determined in advance by the operation program of the linked cooking menu. For example, when the standard heating time has elapsed, the audio notification unit 50 notifies the user, and the first specific screen 16M1 displays a message such as "X minutes will soon pass." In other words, the user US is notified that the cooking step 1 is nearing completion.
To end cooking step 1, the user US simply presses the input key 153R once.

P3 is the heating pause period during which cooking process 1 by the first heating means HM1 is temporarily stopped and cooking process 2 by the second heating means HM2 is started.

This heating pause period P3 is a period required to check the degree of heating of the food in cooking step 1, to add seasonings, or to add another food and perform cooking step 2. It is also a period required to move the food to the heating chamber 6.
The heating pause step P3 ends when the input key 151M is pressed, and the process proceeds to the cooking step 2 of P4.

This cooking process 2 begins when the control device 40 confirms that the door 7 has been opened once during the pause period P3 and then closed. The door open/close signal from the open/close detection unit 10 is used by the control device 40.

The control device 40 measures the time required from when the door 7 is opened until it is closed again, and if a certain "allowed time" is exceeded, a safety measure is adopted that prevents the heating operation from starting even if the input key 151M is pressed from that point onwards. Note that the "allowed time" here may be set to the same time as the time limit TX (30 minutes) described in Figures 33 and 39.

The cooking process 2 basically ends automatically when the heating time predetermined by the operation program of the linked cooking menu has elapsed or when the temperature of the food to be cooked reaches a set value (e.g., 90°C). For example, in one linked cooking menu, heating begins with a microwave output of 500W. Furthermore, if the user US opens the door 7 at any time, microwave irradiation is instantly stopped and the heating operation is stopped.

In cooking step 2 of P4, the user US may be able to individually set control conditions (e.g., cooking time and target temperature) by operating at least one of the four input keys 156M to 159M, but depending on the cooking menu, the user US may not be able to change the control conditions.

The example in Figure 48 shows the case where cooking process 2 is ended by pressing the input key (stop key) 152M on the central operation unit 15M. When the input key 152M is pressed to stop cooking, cooking process 2 ends and the process proceeds to the heating pause period at P5.

During this heating pause period P5, the user US opens the door 7, removes the food to be cooked from inside the heating chamber 6, and places it on the top plate 3. The food to be cooked is placed inside an object to be heated N such as a metal pot.
Then, when the input key 153R for the right heating section 4 is pressed to command the start of cooking, the heating pause step P5 ends and the process proceeds to the heating cooking period P6 (the "cooking step 3" of induction heating).

This heating pause period P5 is the period required to check the degree of heating of the food in cooking step 2, add seasonings, or add another food to be cooked and proceed to the next cooking step 3. For example, in cooking step 2, only frozen food can be heated as the food to be cooked, and in cooking step 3, food that has been immersed in seasonings or cooking liquid, or cooked separately by preheating, can be added to the same food to be heated N. This broadens the range of cooking options.

P6 switches from cooking step 2 using the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating source) to cooking step 3 using the first heating means HM1 (in this case, induction heating means, for example, the right heating port 4R).
In this cooking step 3, when cooking using the right heating port 4R as described above, the user US can individually set the control conditions (e.g., cooking time and target temperature) by operating the input keys 154R and 155R (see Figure 8).

Furthermore, if cooking step 3 is performed using the left heating port 4L, the user US can individually set control conditions (e.g., cooking time and target temperature) by operating input keys 154L and 155L.

Then, when input key 153R is pressed to stop cooking, cooking step 3 ends and operation in linked cooking mode KM1 ends. In the case of timer cooking, induction heating cooking automatically ends after the time has elapsed, and cooking step 3 ends.

As is clear from Figure 48, the right operation unit 15R of the right heating port 4R becomes unusable from the point at which the cooperative cooking menu is selected, i.e., when the identification information 167 indicating the name of the cooking option on the cooperative cooking menu is displayed on the central display unit 16M, but rather when the start of cooking is decided using the input key 151M of the central operation unit 15M. Note that if the left heating port 4L is set by default, the left heating port 4L will be occupied.

As is clear from the above description, the control device 40 performs the following function restriction process.
(1) The input signal from the right operation unit 15R is disabled or input is restricted. For example, the input functions of the input keys 151R and 152R are disabled. As a result, the right heating port 4R cannot be used (input) during the cooking period (cooking step 1) to cooking period (cooking step 3) except when input is required in the linked cooking mode KM3.
(2) Even when the heating cooking period (cooking step 1) begins, the left operating unit 15L can be used (the input signal from the left operating unit 15L is not invalidated).

In this way, when the heating cooking period (cooking process 1) begins, the control device 40 transitions from cooking process 1 to occupying only the right heating port 4R for cooking process 3.

As a result, the right heating port 4R is "occupied" by the selection of the linked cooking menu. Furthermore, when viewed from the perspective of the first heating means HM1 as a whole, use of only a portion (the right side) of the three heating elements is "restricted."

Even after the end of the cooking period (cooking step 1), the restricted state of the right heating port 4R is not released.
At the start of the cooking process 1, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, and the user US can easily understand that the cooperative cooking mode has been entered.

Furthermore, even if the control device 40 detects that the door 7 has changed from an open state to a closed state before the heating cooking period (cooking process 2) begins, if the temperature inside the heating chamber 6 is higher than the reference value, there is a concern that the control device 40, the non-contact (infrared) sensor 13, and thermistor sensor 14 may mistakenly recognize the abnormally high temperature as indicating that cooking has been completed before cooking has even begun in the heating chamber 6.
Therefore, if the temperature of the heating chamber 6 is too high before the start of the heating cooking period (cooking process 1), the first specific screen 15M1 will display a message stating that "the second heating means HM2 (microwave heating means) cannot be used immediately due to high temperature."

The period indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 48 is the reception restriction period TZ1 for one piece of recipe data CD, as explained in FIG.
When the input key 153M is touched once to select the cooperative cooking mode KM3, as shown in FIG. 48, additional recipe data CD cannot be acquired from an external device such as the communication terminal 200.

After the input key 153M is touched once and the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, the limiting operation by the limiting unit 55 is performed as follows.
The communication unit 51 enables the reception and transmission functions when the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed (before that, at least the reception function is disabled).

That is, the limiting unit 55 built into the control device 40 operates as follows.
As shown in Figure 48, it is not possible to change a cooking menu A of a specific cooperative cooking mode KM1 obtained from an external device to another cooking menu B (e.g., "hamburger steak") of the same cooperative cooking mode KM3. To change the menu, it is necessary to operate the input key 152M to cancel the cooperative cooking mode KM3 and return to the initial standby screen 16MH.

In other words, once the time limit indicated by the thick arrow in Figure 48 begins, you can cancel cooking using the specific linked cooking menu A obtained from an external device at any time by operating the input key 152M. Once you perform a cancellation operation in this way, the screen will return to the initial standby screen 16MH, and you will need to touch the input key 153M again in that state.

Furthermore, for a specific linked cooking menu A based on recipe data CD obtained from an external source, until all cooking processes are completely completed, the control device 40 cannot obtain recipe data CD for another linked cooking menu C from an external source (such as the communication terminal 200).

In other words, once the limited period indicated by the thick arrow in Figure 48 begins, operating input key 151M allows the user to decide to start cooking in linked cooking mode KM3, and to carry out cooking using the recipe data CD of the specific linked cooking menu A acquired immediately before this decision. However, until all cooking steps for this cooking menu A are completed, additional (second) recipe data CD cannot be acquired from outside.

Next, a description will be given of Figures 49 to 53.
Fig. 49 is a time chart 1 for explaining the entire recipe data obtainable period and control operation in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 50 is a time chart 1 for explaining the entire recipe data obtainable period and control operation in the combined cooking mode KM2 in the cooking appliance 1. Fig. 51 is a time chart showing a modified example 1 of the time chart shown in Fig. 49. Fig. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the input operation unit 15 and the central display unit 16M in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 corresponding to the modified example of Fig. 51. Fig. 53 is a time chart showing a modified example 2 of the time chart shown in Fig. 49.

In FIG. 49, SA1 to SA9 indicate the operation of the control device 40.
First, the control device 40 detects that the main power switch 20 has been turned on (step SA1), transmits data indicating that the device has been started (operating status data OS) from the communication unit 51 to the outside, and starts the self-diagnosis mode (SA2). That is, the control device 40 checks whether the components of the cooking appliance 1, such as the circuits and sensors, are normal.

Next, the display unit 16 is activated to display the standby initial screen 16MH (SA3). After this, the standby initial screen 16MH displays a message prompting the user US to select a heating method, and the audio notification unit 50 provides similar audio guidance (SA3A).

Next, the user US presses the input key 153M to select the collaborative cooking mode KM1. This is step SA4 in Figure 49.

In this embodiment, the "initial standby period" TP refers to the period beginning with step SA3A, and ends when the input key for starting the heating operation is pressed (SA7). In the collaborative cooking mode KM1, the input key for starting is input key (start key) 151M.

The initial waiting period TP cannot exceed the first limit period (first time limit TX). In other words, by processing step SM5 described in Figure 33, it is limited to a maximum of 30 minutes, for example.

Next, during the initial standby period TP while waiting for a command to start the heating operation as described above, unless the input key 153M, which also serves as the selection section for the voice input mode 1, is pressed, the cooking menu for the linked cooking mode KM1 cannot be selected.
Therefore, when the input key 153M is operated, the "recipe acquisition permission condition" described later is satisfied. That is, the program is set to permit the data acquisition unit 53 to acquire the recipe data CD.

In other words, if the user US presses input key 153M after step SA3A, acquisition of recipe data CD for linked cooking mode KM1 is permitted at the point when input key 153M is pressed (in the case of combined cooking mode KM2, input key 154M or 155M is pressed). In the case of single cooking mode KM3, which uses right heating port 4R or left heating port 4L, input key 152R or 152L must be pressed.

The input key 153M also serves as the selection section for the voice input mode 1. Therefore, if the input key is "pressed and held" in step SA4 and the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds), the mode will automatically switch to voice input mode 1 at that point (step SA5).

Therefore, the mode switches to voice input mode 1 from step SA5 shown in FIG. 49, and during this voice input mode 1, the control conditions for the cooperative cooking mode KM1 can be set by voice input.
The voice input mode 1 is automatically terminated when a command to start the heating operation is given by the input key 151M.

Next, the combined cooking mode KM2 will be described with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 50, the user US operates the (specific) input key 154M to select the combined cooking mode KM2 (step SA4).
Then, during the initial waiting period TP, at the time of step SA4 when the input key 154M is pressed, the "recipe acquisition condition" is satisfied.

If the "recipe acquisition conditions" are met during the initial standby period TP, the data acquisition unit 53 can acquire recipe data CD for the control menu of the combined cooking mode KM2 (e.g., "warming") once via the communication unit 51.

Furthermore, during the initial standby period TP, the recipe data CD of the cooking menu of the composite cooking mode KM2 acquired from the outside can be cancelled by the input key 152M.
In practice, during the initial standby period TP, the second specific screen 16M2 is displayed first, and after the identification information 160 of the recipe data CD is displayed on that screen, the input key 152M may be pressed.

Furthermore, during the initial standby period TP, the control conditions of the acquired recipe data CD can be changed as appropriate by operating input keys 156M-159M (some control conditions cannot be changed). The control conditions are also displayed on the displayed second specific screen 16M2, so all you have to do is look at the display and press input key 156M, etc.

The input key 154M also serves as the selection section for the voice input mode 1. Therefore, if the input key is "pressed and held" in step SA4 and the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds), the mode will automatically switch to voice input mode 1 at that point (step SA5).

Therefore, the mode is switched to voice input mode 1 from step SA5 shown in FIG. 50, and during this voice input mode 1, the control conditions for the combined cooking mode KM2 can be set by voice input.
The voice input mode 1 is automatically terminated when a command to start the heating operation is given by the input key 151M.

50, the initial standby period TP also ends when the input key (start key) 151M is operated (SA7), and the actual heating operation starts immediately thereafter (SA9).
As described above, the initial standby period TP ends at step SA9, and thereafter, recipe data CD for another composite cooking mode KM2 cannot be acquired from outside (however, if the composite cooking mode KM2 is canceled with input key 152M during the cooking process, recipe data CD can be acquired again).

In Figure 50, the time difference between obtaining recipe data CD in step SA3 and step SA4 is limited to 30 minutes. If 30 minutes is exceeded, the control device 40 will forcibly turn off the main power switch 20 for safety reasons, as there is a possibility that the user US may have forgotten to enter an operation. Alternatively, it will instruct the audio notification unit 51 to issue an alarm or other such action (see step SL8 in Figure 38).

Instead of restricting the time difference between obtaining recipe data CD in step SA3 and step SA4 to within 30 minutes, the period from step SA3A to step SA4 at the start of the initial waiting period TP may be restricted to within 30 minutes.

As is clear from Figure 50, the period from steps SA4 to SA7 during the initial standby period TP is the period TB1 during which recipe data CD for composite cooking mode KM2 can be acquired.

Within the initial standby period TP, the period from steps SA4 to SA7 is a cancellation period TB2 for the recipe data CD of the composite cooking mode.
The period from steps SA4 to SA7 is a period TB3 during which the control conditions (control data) of the recipe data CD of the composite cooking mode KM2 can be changed.

Next, we will explain Figure 51.
Fig. 51 is a time chart showing a first modification of the time chart shown in Fig. 49. Similar to Fig. 49, SA1 to SA9 show the operation of the heating control unit 43 of the control device 40 when cooking in the combined cooking mode KM1 is performed.
Step SA4 is the time when the user US touches the input key 153M to select the cooperative cooking mode KM1. In the case of Fig. 51, the initial standby period TP also starts from step SA3A and ends when the input key 151M is pressed (step SA7).

Even in the case of the collaborative cooking mode KM1 shown in Figure 51, the input key 153M is pressed during the initial standby period TP, which is limited to a predetermined time (for example, within 30 minutes), so the "recipe acquisition permission condition" is met at the time of step SA4.

When the "recipe acquisition permission conditions" are satisfied, the data acquisition unit 53 can acquire the recipe data CD of the cooperative cooking mode KM2 via the communication unit 51 only once.
In FIG. 51, the timing of acquiring the recipe data CD differs from that in the example shown in FIG. 49, as will be explained below.

If the input key 153M, which also serves as the selection section for the voice input mode 1, is not pressed during the initial standby period TP, the cooking menu for the linked cooking mode KM1 cannot be selected. In other words, the recipe data CD to be acquired cannot be identified.

When input key 153M is operated, the "recipe acquisition permission condition" is satisfied. In other words, the data acquisition unit 53 is programmed to permit acquisition of the recipe data CD. From this point on, recipe data CD can be acquired. (Note that in reality, due to constraints such as the performance of the communications infrastructure, acquisition of recipe data CD may not be completed instantly, and may take several to 20 seconds.)

The input key 153M also serves as the selection section for the voice input mode 1. Therefore, if the input key is "pressed and held" in step SA4 and the touch time TA exceeds the threshold value (5 seconds), the mode will automatically switch to voice input mode 1 at that point (step SA5).

However, the user US may not realize that the mode has been switched to voice input mode 1 at the above stage. Alternatively, the user may not be aware of the long press operation.
51, after the automatic switching, when the first specific screen 16M1 displays that the recipe data CD has been acquired, the screen also displays that the mode has been switched to voice input mode 1 (step SA5A). At the same time, the voice notification unit 50 also notifies the user. An example of the actual first specific screen 16M1 is shown in FIG.

Therefore, from step SA5A shown in Fig. 51, input is accepted in voice input mode 1. Therefore, from step SA5A, the control conditions for the cooperative cooking mode KM1 can be set by voice input.
The voice input mode 1 is automatically terminated when a command to start the heating operation is given by input key 151M (step SA7).

Next, we will explain Figure 52.
FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the input operation unit 15 and the central display unit 16M in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 corresponding to the modified example of FIG.
52 shows two types of auxiliary information 179. One is voice input mode display information 179D, which indicates that voice input is being accepted because the voice input mode is active. The other is reference information 179E, which recommends input of control conditions and includes examples of control conditions that can be input (e.g., a standard value for preheating temperature).

At the stage shown in FIG. 52, as is clear from the fact that the light-emitting units 21M corresponding to the input keys 156M to 169M are not emitting light, it is not possible to input control conditions by touching these input keys (because in this example they are set to the above-mentioned "touch input mode 1A").
Furthermore, as is clear from the fact that the light-emitting section 21M corresponding to the input key 151M is not emitting light, the heating operation cannot be started at this stage even if the input key 151M is pressed, because the input of the control conditions has not been completed.

Next, we will explain Figure 53.
FIG. 53 is a time chart for explaining the entire control operation and the period in which recipe data CD can be acquired in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, and shows a second modified example of the time chart shown in FIG.

In FIG. 53, SA1 to SA9 indicate the operation of the control device 40, similarly to FIG.
53, the hardware configuration of the dedicated voice input key 180 is changed. Specifically, the operation surface of the input key 180 is configured to be illuminated from below by a light-emitting element (LED) (not shown) arranged below the operation surface.

After the control device 40 is started, the input function of the input key 180 is enabled when the input key 153M or the input key 154M is touched (step SA4). Furthermore, once the input function is enabled, the light-emitting element (not shown) illuminates the input key 180, making the operation section (key operation surface) of the input key 180 stand out prominently within the operation section 15.

The initial standby period TP begins when the standby initial screen 16MH prompts the user US to select a cooking mode (step SA3A).

As in FIG. 50, step SA4 is the point in time when either input key 153M or input key 154M is touched. At this point, the "recipe acquisition permission conditions" are met, so acquisition of recipe data CD can be executed. Thereafter, when input key 151M is operated, the initial standby period TP ends.

In the example of Figure 53, after input key 153M is touched, recipe data for linked cooking mode KM1 can be obtained from outside via communication unit 51. Note that if input key 154M is touched without touching input key 153M, recipe data for combined cooking mode KM2 can be obtained.

After the input key 153M or 154M is operated, if the input key 180 is touch-input operated at the time of step SA5, the control device 40 transitions to voice input mode 2. Therefore, from step SA5 onwards, the user US can input the control conditions by voice.
53, since the voice input mode 2A is selected, the input functions of (some of) the input keys (for example, 156M) other than the dedicated voice input key 180 are temporarily disabled. Therefore, even if the input keys 156M and 157M are touched, no input can be made.

Next, we will explain Figure 54.
54 shows the main processing of the control device 40 during the period up to the start of cooking based on recipe data CD obtained from the outside. In particular, it shows the processing for displaying data on food ingredients and nutritional components.

In FIG. 54, the recipe data CD (at least the first part M1 and second part M2) acquired from the communication terminal 200 or cloud server 300 via the communication unit 51 is stored in the recipe data storage unit 42 of the storage device 41 (step SS30). Then, it is displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 (step SS31). This stage corresponds to step SS13 described in FIG. 39.

At step SS31, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed in the central display unit 16M. In other words, at least the identification information 167 is displayed (see, for example, Figures 46 and 52).

In the next step SS32, a determination is made as to whether a display command has been issued from the user US to display the food ingredients. In the example of Figure 52, since the system has already transitioned to voice input mode 1, if a specified term (phrase) such as "food ingredients" or "calories" is uttered, the determination in step SS32 will be "Yes." The voice signal is analyzed by the voice signal analysis unit 58 (see Figure 10), and the food ingredient data for the target cooking menu is read from the storage device 41.

In the central display section 16M, the first specific screen 16M1 displays a food component display screen 16M1A as shown in Fig. 24(A) (step SS33). The amounts of energy, protein, fat, and iron are displayed in grams.
Next, the process proceeds to step SS34, which determines whether the input key 151M has been pressed. In step SS34, the process waits for a certain period of time until an operation by the user US is performed. If the input key 151M is pressed during this waiting period, the display returns to the first specific screen 16M1. Then, the heating means (such as the first heating means HM1) starts to be driven (SS35).

If the input key 158M is not pressed or a voice command to display food ingredients is not given within a certain period of time from step SS31, the determination in step SS32 will be "No."

If the determination in step SS32 is "No," the process proceeds to step SS36. In step SS36, a determination is made as to whether a command to display the nutritional components of the food has been received. In the example of Figure 52, since voice input mode 1 has already been entered, a specified term (phrase) such as "nutrients" or "nutrition" is spoken in step SS36.

The audio signal is then analyzed by the audio signal analysis unit 58 (see Figure 11) and the nutritional component data for the target cooking menu is read from the storage device 41. Step SS36 then returns a "Yes" result. Note that pressing input key 180 again to cancel audio input mode 2 and then pressing input key 156M also returns a "Yes" result in step SS36.

If step SS36 returns "Yes," the display unit 16 (central display unit 16M) displays a nutritional component display screen 16M1B as shown in FIG. 24(B) (step SS37). The amounts of energy, protein, fat, and iron are then displayed in grams. The process then proceeds to step SS34.

As mentioned above, if the function setting input key 151KP has not been operated in advance to set the food ingredients and nutritional information to be displayed individually each time before cooking begins, steps SS33 and SS37 shown in Figure 54 will not be performed.

Note that although the examples in Figures 49 to 53 do not show the single cooking mode KM3, recipe data CD can be acquired from outside via the communication unit 51 during the initial standby period TP, just like the recipe data CD for the combined cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM1.

Next, the communication terminal 200 shown in FIG. 55 will be described.
The communication terminal 200, such as a smartphone, has a transmitting unit and receiving unit 210, a communication control unit 211, a central processing unit (CPU) 212, a ROM and RAM 213, a speaker 214, a touch-type operation unit 215, a terminal display unit 216 having a display screen, a cooking appliance database (storage unit) 217, an attitude detection unit 218, a remote operation information generation unit 219, and a storage unit 220. The transmitting unit and receiving unit 210 has an NFC input/output unit 221 for short-range wireless communication. Therefore, two paths can be used: wireless communication via the Internet and near-field wireless communication (NFC).

Reference numeral 222 denotes a voice input unit that converts speech (voice) of a user US or the like into an input signal.
The touch input type operation unit 215, terminal side display unit 216, and voice input unit 222 are integrated in hardware to form a display operation unit 225. Note that a search unit that analyzes the voice signal from the voice input unit 222 and performs term search, information search, etc. is not shown. The search unit may be provided inside the communication terminal 200, or may be provided in an external cloud server 300, so that the search function is provided outside the communication terminal 200.

The attitude detection unit 218 is equipped with various sensors, such as a gyro sensor, acceleration sensor, and gravity sensor, and can detect the tilt and orientation of the communication terminal 200. This allows it to output a signal detecting the up-down orientation of the communication terminal 200 to the central processing unit 212.

The central processing unit 212 receives a detection signal from the orientation detection unit 218 and controls the display orientation of the terminal-side display unit 216 .
The central processing unit 212 inputs a signal received from the communication unit 51 of the cooking appliance 1 to the remote control information generating unit 219 .

The central processing unit 212 has a recipe data acquisition unit 230, a recipe data transmission unit 231, a terminal-side recipe selection unit 232, and a food composition data acquisition unit 233. The recipe data acquisition unit 230, recipe data transmission unit 231, terminal-side recipe selection unit 232, and food composition data acquisition unit 233 may all be functionally realized by a single computer program, or may be configured as separate control circuits.

The cooking appliance database 217 holds "notification data" 223 for the cooking appliance 1. This notification data is used to generate notification information (including image information) for the central display unit 16M, left and right display units 16L and 16R, and audio notification unit 50 of the cooking appliance 1. The cooking appliance database 217 also holds "remote control data" 224 for the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1.

Furthermore, the cooking appliance database 217 stores food ingredient and nutrient component data 226 related to the recipe data CD. In this embodiment, information on food ingredients (energy, lipids, protein, etc.) and nutrient components (potassium, calcium, etc.) is collectively referred to as "food ingredient information" DD.

The notification data 223, remote control data 224, and food ingredient/nutrient component data 226 may be stored in the communication terminal 200 from the beginning, or the food ingredient information may be acquired by connecting to a cloud server 300, which is an information providing means, via a network NW and downloading it from the cloud server 300. In other words, the cooking appliance database 217 does not need to be constructed as a fixed storage, but may instead be in a form in which information is acquired as needed and temporarily stored in volatile memory.

The cooking appliance database 217 may obtain recipe data CD for various cooking methods that can be performed by the cooking appliance 1, particularly cooking menus that can be used in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 (e.g., "ratatouille"), from the cloud server 300 or from another communication terminal 200 via the NFC input/output unit 221.

The remote control information generation unit 224 processes the signal acquired from the cooking appliance 1 via the central processing unit 212 and the input signal from the display operation unit 225, and generates remote control information for the cooking appliance 1.

The term "remote operation information" in this first embodiment refers to information transmitted from communication terminal 200 to remotely operate cooker 1. Therefore, when cooking data is transmitted from communication terminal 200 to cooker 1, the data becomes a type of remote operation information.
The "remote operation information" includes information regarding input operations of the cooking appliance 1 corresponding to all cooking modes including the cooperative cooking mode KM1 and the combined cooking mode KM2, display information of the central display unit 16M in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the combined cooking mode KM2, etc., and display information regarding the right display unit 16R and the left display unit 16L. However, in all cooking modes including the cooperative cooking mode KM1, information that serves as a command to start a heating operation is not included. Therefore, this remote operation information does not cause the cooking appliance 1 to start a heating operation.

Note that the "remote operation information" may not include the display information for the central display unit 16M and the display information for the right display unit 16R and the left display unit 16L. Furthermore, command information for functions that can be set using the function setting keys 115 described above cannot be transmitted from the communication terminal 200, nor can it be generated by the communication terminal 200. In other words, the function setting mode of the cooking appliance 1 cannot be activated from the communication terminal 200.

The central processing unit 212 executes the overall processing of the communication terminal 200 in accordance with control programs stored in ROM/RAM, reading data required in the process of executing the processing from ROM/RAM, and storing data generated in the process of executing the processing in the ROM/RAM.

The storage unit 220 is a non-volatile semiconductor memory that can store information about the cooking appliance 1 read from the transmission unit and reception unit 210. For example, it can be used to temporarily store the recipe data CD for a specific cooking menu that has been downloaded (read) from the cloud server 300.

Information about the cooking appliance 1 is obtained from a first server 321 (not shown), which is a component of the cloud server 300. The communication terminal 200 may then obtain the information from the first server 321 via the network NW.

When the user US touches a specific portion of the terminal display unit 216 of the communication terminal 200, the remote operation information generating unit 219 generates remote operation information based on this touch signal.
The remote control information is transmitted from the transmitting and receiving unit 210 to the cooking appliance 1 .

If the cooking appliance 1 is already powered and activated, the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 treats the received remote operation information as cooking mode input operation information. For example, when a remote operation signal related to the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is received, the standby initial screen 16MH of the central display unit 16M transitions to a reception operation display screen 16MM (not shown) for one cooking menu item (e.g., hamburger steak) in the cooperative cooking mode KM1.

Meanwhile, on the communication terminal 200 side that transmitted the remote operation information, the display on the terminal display unit 216 changes based on the remote operation information. In other words, the content of the display screen of the terminal display unit 216 on the display operation unit 225 of the communication terminal 200 and the display content of the central display unit 16M of the cooking appliance 1 change in coordination as needed, but the timing of these changes is not completely synchronized with the cooking appliance 1.

Even if the communication terminal 200 generates command data for a specific cooking menu as remote operation information, it will only be recognized as legitimate setting information by the cooking appliance 1 once the cooking appliance 1 has completed a predetermined process (including determination).

The recipe data CD for the cooking menu (e.g., hamburger steak) in cooperative cooking mode KM1 includes data specifying the heating method from cooking step 1 to the final cooking step 2, as well as information on the default control conditions (e.g., heat level, heat value, heating time, etc., but not limited to these). This control condition information (recipe data CD) is transmitted all at once for each cooking step when a specific transmission key 240 (see Figure 60) on the communication terminal 200 is pressed.

In other words, the data of detailed control conditions that the user US can arbitrarily set on the first specific screen 16M1 can be transmitted to the cooking appliance 1. As mentioned above, the recipe data CD here may be simplified recipe data CD. The simplified recipe data CD does not include information specific to the heating means (including information indicating the attributes of the heating means and information about the heating ports), information about the cooking process, information indicating the order in which the heating means are driven, etc., but is mainly composed of instructions and data (hereinafter referred to as "commands" or "command data") that determine control conditions such as heating capacity and heating time.
That is, the "simplified recipe data" CD mainly consists of identification information specifying a cooking menu (for example, "hamburger steak") and setting data (command data) for the control conditions.

The food component data acquisition unit 233 stores data (food component data) on the components (e.g., energy content, protein, etc.) and nutritional components (e.g., vitamins A, C, iron, minerals, etc.) of various foods.

The "food composition data" of the food composition data acquisition unit 233 does not have to be stored at the time of manufacture of the communication terminal 200. For example, in Japan, the Ministry of Education, Culture, Sports, Science and Technology has made the "Standard Tables of Food Composition in Japan" available to the public (via the Internet, etc.). Therefore, the communication terminal 200 may acquire data on specific foods from this data and store it in the food composition data acquisition unit 233 for each food item.

When the food component data acquisition unit 233 acquires recipe data CD for a cooking menu (e.g., hamburger steak) from the cloud server 300, if data on nutritional components, etc. for the food cannot be obtained from the cloud server 300, the communication terminal 200 can supplement the data on nutritional components, etc. and provide it to the cooking appliance 1. This will be explained in more detail later.

Next, we will explain Figure 56.
In FIG. 56, steps SE1 to SE12 show the main operation steps from the start of the communication terminal 200, and mainly show the operation of transmitting the recipe data CD.

The user US operates the touch operation unit 215 of the communication terminal 200 to connect to the cloud server 300 or to activate the search function (step SE1), and then operates the search condition input keys and cooking menu name input keys, etc., displayed on the terminal display unit 216 to search for cooking menus (step SE2).
The user US can touch the terminal display unit 216 to display the desired cooking menu on the terminal display unit 216 (for example, one or more cooking menu options are displayed on one display screen) (step SE3).

The terminal display unit 216 may be configured to simultaneously display a list of various cooking menus in a predetermined order or rule by default. For example, the menus may be displayed in alphabetical order based on the name of the cooking menu, or the user US may use the search function to search by voice input, such as by uttering the name of the cooking menu, such as "hamburger steak."

When one of the cooking menu items displayed on the terminal display unit 216 is selected (by touch operation), the screen switches to a dedicated screen for that cooking menu item. In other words, when only such a specific cooking menu item is selected, the determination in step SE4 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SE5.
On the other hand, on the terminal display unit 216, the screen displaying the search results also displays input keys (icons) such as "Search for other menus" and "Search again," so when these are touched, this step SE4 is judged as "No," and the display returns to the search input screen.

In step SE5, what is displayed on the terminal display unit 216 is a first screen 216A, which will be described later.
The first screen 216A is a screen on the terminal display unit 216 that displays identification information (such as the name of the cooking method) relating to one selected cooking menu and information such as the heating means to be used.

When a cooking menu item is selected by touch operation on the first screen 216A showing such search results (by touching the input key 237A shown in, for example, FIG. 60, which will be described later), or when a cooking menu item within the displayed range is selected by voice input, the recipe selection unit 232 detects that a cooking menu item has been selected (step SE6). Then, it transmits advance notice information 1 (201), which will be described later. Furthermore, the display on the first screen 216A on the terminal display unit 216 is changed to the display on the second screen 216A.

The central processing unit (CPU) 212 displays identification information (such as the name of the cooking method) relating to the selected cooking menu and information such as the heating means to be used on the first screen 216A.
The first screen 216A will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 59(A) and 60, and the information displayed on the first screen 216A is, for example, as follows:
(1) Cooking time (2) Amount (serves 2, 4, etc.)
(3) Ingredients (4) Preparation (5) Cooking method (such as the name of the cooking mode to be selected on the cooking device 1 and the input operation section).

When the user US touches the confirmation keys (icons) 237A, 237B (see FIG. 59) for the cooking menu on the first screen 216A, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 receives the input from the touch operation and switches the display content from the first screen 216A to the second screen 216B (step SE7). If the user does not select the cooking menu displayed on the first screen 216A, the process returns from step SE6 to step SE2, where the user can search for and select another cooking menu.

When the confirmation key (icon) 237A (see Figure 59) for this cooking menu is touched, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 reads from the storage unit 220 or the cooking appliance database 217 the corresponding information KID that can identify the specific input key (e.g., 153M) that corresponds to the confirmed cooking menu, and transmits this information together with the "advance notice information 1" (201) described below.

In Figure 56, step SE6A is indicated by a dashed line because it is an optional function. In this step SE6A, when the cooking menu confirmation key (icon) 237A (see Figure 60) is touched, the second screen 216B displays a message indicating that "Advance Notice 1" (201) regarding cooking process 1 has been sent to the cooker 1.

The advance notice information (also called "advance notice") 201 is intended to indicate to the cooker 1 that it is in the preparation stage for sending one piece of recipe data CD. However, in the case of a cooking menu that requires multiple cooking steps, such as cooperative cooking mode KM1, the information is sent in multiple parts, such as "advance notice information 1", "advance notice information 2", etc., for each cooking step, such as cooking step 1, cooking step 2, etc. Note that this advance notice information (201) may be simple data that is sufficient to identify the type of cooking mode. In other words, it may contain only identification information indicating one cooking menu, and does not need to include information that identifies which of the three types, cooperative cooking mode KM1, combined cooking mode KM2, or single cooking mode KM1, is being used.

After the advance notice information (201) is transmitted, that is, when the confirmation key (icon) 237A (see FIG. 60) of the cooking menu is touched, the display switches from the first screen 216A to the second screen 216B.
The second screen 216B includes information for requesting a decision as to whether or not to transmit the recipe data to the cooking appliance 1. Details will be described with reference to Fig. 60(B).
Depending on the cooking menu, either the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L may be usable. In such a case, the advance notice information (201) includes information prompting the user US to select whether to use the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L.

Upon receiving the advance notice 1 (201), the operator must press a specific input key (for example, 152L or 152R) on either the right operation unit 15R or the left operation unit 15L in the cooking appliance 1. In response to this operation, the cooking appliance 1 transmits to the communication terminal 200 "selection information A (confirmation information A)" 202 indicating that a specific heating port has been selected.
Correspondence information KID capable of identifying one specific input key may be included in the selection information (confirmation information) A and transmitted together with the advance notice information 1 (201). With this configuration, the cooking appliance 1 can reliably determine the specific input key that requires the user US to operate. However, in the cooking appliance 1 of this embodiment 1, the correspondence information KID is held (stored) in the storage device 41, so it is not necessarily necessary to transmit the correspondence information KID from the communication terminal 200.

When cooking step 1 in linked cooking mode KM1 is performed using the right heating port 4R or left heating port 4L, and recipe data CD is not used, the two-step method is to press the start key 151M on the central operation unit 15M, and then press the input key 153R on the right operation unit 15R or the input key 153L on the left operation unit 15L.

In contrast, when cooking using recipe data, even if cooking step 1 of cooperative cooking mode KM1 is performed using the right or left heating port 4R or 4L, the second screen 216B prompts the user to confirm the operation on the cooker 1 using the left and right operation units 15L and 15R (specific input keys 152L and 152R). In other words, when preview information 1 (201) or preview information 2 (202) of recipe data CD related to cooking step 1 or cooking step 2 is received, "selection information A" or "selection information B" (202), indicating the selection of a specific heating port, is transmitted by turning on the specific input key 152L or 152R on the left or right operation unit 15L or 15R. In other words, operating the central operation unit 15M does not transmit selection information A, which selects the left or right heating port 4L or 4R. This differs from the case of cooperative cooking with manual settings, as described in FIG. 20 . In FIG. 20, adjacent input keys 157M and 156M on the left and right are operated to select either the right IH coil 9R or the left IH coil 9L.

When the above-described heating port is selected in cooking step 1, if the communication terminal 200 receives "selection information A" (confirmation information A) 202, the determination in step SE8 is "Yes."
In FIG. 56, steps SE6A and SE8 are shown with broken lines because they are provided as optional functions.
If the optional function is not used, the process proceeds to step SE9 while the second screen 216B that started to be displayed at step SE6 remains in that state.

Step SE8 is for determining whether or not any of the input keys (152L or 152R) of the right operation unit 15R or the left operation unit 15L of the cooking appliance 1 has been pressed.
When a specific input key 152L, 152R on either the right operation unit 15R or the left operation unit 15L is pressed, the cooking appliance 1 sends a signal indicating the result to the communication terminal 200, so the judgment in step SE8 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SE8A.

Since the signal for advance notice information A (201) was sent to the cooking appliance 1 in step SE6, upon receiving advance notice information A (201) (step SE8), the control device 40 may start processing to prepare for cooking using the recipe data CD obtained from the communication terminal 200. For example, a warning message such as "Recipe data will now be received, so other cooking cannot be started" may be displayed on all display units 16 (16M, 16L, 16R).

Meanwhile, the communication terminal 200 repeatedly checks at regular intervals whether selection information A (202) has arrived from the cooking appliance 1, and if it has not been received, proceeds to time limit processing (step SE12). The time limit processing measures the elapsed time from step SE6, and if a certain time limit (e.g., 10 minutes) has elapsed, error processing is performed and the operation shown in Figure 56 is stopped. In other words, even if the user US forgets to perform the transmission operation midway through, the process will automatically return to the step SE2 stage.

If selection information A (202) for the heating ports 4L and 4R is received from the cooking appliance 1, step SE8 will be judged as "Yes", and the second screen 126B shown in Figure 60 (B), which began to be displayed in step SE6, will be changed to second screen A (216B1) shown in Figure 61 (A).
Then, the user is advised to touch the input key 240 for sending displayed on the second screen A (216B1) (FIG. 61).

In step SE9, if the user US touches the send key (icon) 240 on the second screen A (216B1), or touches the send key 240 on the second screen B (216B) shown in Figure 60 (B), step SE9 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SE10.
In step SE10, the cooking menu selected in step SE6 (the first part M1 or the second part M2 of the recipe data CD) is transmitted to the cooker 1.

Next, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 switches the display content from the second screen 216B or second display screen A (216B1) to the third screen (step SE11). There are two types of third screens 216C1 and 216C2, as shown in Figure 62. This will be explained in Figure 62.

Next, we will explain Figure 57.
FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram (flowchart) of the operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) 200 shown in FIG. 55, showing the relationship between the recipe data receiving process and the cooking process.
Steps SD1 to SD14 show the operation of the central processing unit (CPU) 212 of the communication terminal 200.

The user US transmits the first part M1 and the second part M2 of the recipe data CD to the cooking appliance 1 using the communication terminal 200 in the following order:
First, when the confirmation key (icon) 237A (described in FIG. 59) for the cooking menu is touched on the first screen 216A, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 receives the input from the touch operation and selects cooking process 1 (step SD1).

In the next step SD2, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 transmits advance notice information A (201) to the cooking appliance 1 (step SD2). The display of the first screen 216A at step SD1 is switched to the display of the second screen 216B as shown in FIG. 60(B). That is, the operation of a specific input key (e.g., 152R) is used as a trigger to display a screen awaiting the arrival of selection information A (202) transmitted from the cooking appliance 1 (step SD3). At this stage, the second screen 216B displays an input key 240 for transmitting the first portion M1 of the recipe data CD, which includes data related to cooking step 1.

When the specific input key 152R of the right operation section 15R of the cooking appliance 1 is touched, the cooking appliance 1 transmits the selection information A (202), which is received by the communication terminal 200 (step SD4).
Next, communication terminal 200 changes to display second screen A (216B1) as shown in Fig. 61(A). Second screen A (216B1) displays input key 240 for transmitting first portion M1 of recipe data CD, which includes data related to cooking step 1. When input key 240 is pressed, the data of first portion M1 is transmitted to cooking appliance 1 (step SD5).

The second screen A (216B1) described in Figure 61 (A) is displayed depending on the option setting, so it is not necessary to display this second screen A (216B1). In that case, after operating a specific input key (such as 152R), you can simply touch the input key 240 on the second screen 216B shown in Figure 60 (B).

When the data of the first part M1 transmitted in step SD5 is received normally by the cooking appliance 1, the data of the first part M1 is used as setting information for cooking process 1, and the cooking appliance 1 can set the control conditions for cooking process 1 and start cooking process 1.
When cooking step 1 is completed, the cooker 1 transmits information indicating the completion of cooking step 1 (step SD6). However, step SD6 shown in Fig. 57 is added as an optional setting and is not essential, but the presence of step SD6 allows the communication terminal 200 to know that the cooker 1 has entered the heating pause period P3. This allows advance preparation for providing the cooker 1 with the data of the next second portion M2.

When the first portion M1 of data is successfully received by the cooking appliance 1, the communication terminal 200 automatically returns to displaying the first screen 216A. Alternatively, if the input key (icon) 244C for returning to the cooking menu display screen is pressed on the third screen (described in FIG. 62) 216C1, which notifies the user of the successful communication result, the display returns to displaying the first screen 216A. Then, preparations can be made to send the second portion of data related to cooking step 2. The terminal display unit 216 for "preparing to send" as referred to here is described in FIG. 59 (B).

Next, the user US transmits the second part M2 of the recipe data CD to the cooking appliance 1 using the communication terminal 200 in the following order:
First, when the confirmation key (icon) 237B (described in Figure 59) for the cooking menu is touched on the first screen 216A, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 receives the input from the touch operation and selects cooking process 2 (step SD7).

In the next step SD8, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 transmits advance notice information 2 (201) regarding cooking process 2 to the cooker 1 (step SD8). The display also switches from the first screen 216A to the second screen 216B (step SD9). That is, the operation of the specific input key (153M) that is the prerequisite for cooking process 2 is used as a trigger to display a screen that awaits the arrival of selection information B (202) transmitted from the cooker 1 (step SD9). At this stage, the second screen 216B displays an input key 240 that transmits the second portion M2 of the recipe data CD, which includes data related to cooking process 2.

When the specific input key 153M of the central operation unit 15M of the cooking appliance 1 is touched, the cooking appliance 1 transmits the selection information B (202), which is received by the communication terminal 200 (step SD10).
Next, although not specifically shown, communication terminal 200 changes to display second screen A (216B1). Second screen A (216B1) displays input key 240 (not shown) for transmitting second portion M2 of recipe data CD, which includes data related to cooking step 2. When input key 240 is pressed, the data of second portion M2 (setting information B) is transmitted to cooking appliance 1 (step SD11).

When the data of the second part M2 transmitted in step SD11 is normally received by the cooking appliance 1, the cooking process 2 can be started in the cooking appliance 1.
To end cooking process 2, the input key 152M of the cooking appliance 1 is touched, thereby ending cooking process 2. However, if cooking process 2 uses the heating chamber 6 and is a cooking process using either the left or right heating port 4L, 4R, cooking process 2 ends when the stop operation is performed using the left or right operating units 15L, 15R.

The cooking appliance 1 transmits information indicating the end of cooking process 2, which is received by the communication terminal 200 (step SD12). This allows the user US to know the end of cooking process 2 not only from the cooking appliance 1 but also from the communication terminal 200.

Next, we will explain Figure 58.
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the operation of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 after receiving data from the communication terminal (information processing terminal) 200 shown in FIG.
In the control device 40, the communication unit 51, which is responsible for data acquisition processing, works in cooperation with the data acquisition unit 53 (see FIGS. 10 and 11) to perform the operations of steps SC1 to SC11 described below. As mentioned above, the recipe data CD is acquired from the communication terminal 200 for each cooking step (first part M1, second part M2, etc.). However, in FIG. 58, the acquisition of each part is not distinguished, and only the common parts are described.

In the heating cooker 1, at the stage of establishing the initial communication state with the communication terminal 200, the communication unit 51 provides the communication terminal 200 with data including the "device identification information" (also referred to as "preparation information 203").
In the state where communication is established, when recipe data CD is subsequently received from the outside via the communication unit 51, the data is temporarily stored in the temporary memory (step SC1).
The communication unit 51 first acquires the overall "status information" of the cooking appliance 1. This "status information" is information indicating the status of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1. Therefore, for example, the "status information" is information ascertained by the heating control unit 43 as to what status the first heating means HM1 to the third heating means HM3 are in.

For example, the communication unit 51 acquires information such as the fact that the control conditions have already been set and that the heating device is in a standby state immediately before starting heating, and that the device is receiving temperature detection signals from the temperature sensor group 30 (step SC2).

The communication unit 51 repeatedly performs this state confirmation operation for each component of the cooking appliance 1 at regular time intervals to collect the latest accurate data.
In this way, information that can determine whether or not the cooking appliance 1 is in a state where it can transition to control in accordance with the contents of the received recipe data CD is collected by the communication unit 51. That is, the communication unit 51 of the cooking appliance 1 compares the contents of the data, including the device identification information, transmitted immediately before with the contents of the recipe data CD received from the communication terminal 200 in step SC1 (step SC3). Note that, as shown by the dashed lines between steps SC3 and SC2 in Figure 58, data collection and comparison are performed multiple times within a certain time limit.

If it is determined that there is no discrepancy between the content of the data sent from the communication unit 51 and the content of the received recipe data, the determination of the status information ends (step SC4). Note that in this step SC4, it is also determined whether the "permission condition 1" and "permission condition 2" are met, such as the temperature of the heating chamber 6 and the status of the "peak cut value" that specifies the upper limit of the maximum power consumption.

If the determination result in step SC4 is "Yes," the data acquisition unit 53 receives the determination result from the communication unit 51 and stores the recipe data CD in a specified memory area in preparation for the heating and cooking that will be performed immediately afterwards (step SC5).

Next, the process proceeds to step SC6, where the data acquisition unit 53 transmits a signal (status check result) from the communication unit 51 to the communication terminal 200, which is the sender of the recipe data CD, indicating that the recipe data CD has been successfully acquired. The "status check result" here corresponds to the processing of step SG10 in Figure 64. In addition, upon receiving the status check result information, the communication terminal 200 determines that the transmission of the recipe data CD was successful (step SG11 in Figure 64).

Furthermore, the data acquisition unit 53 displays on the display unit 51 that the recipe data CD has been acquired (step SC6). An example of this display is described with reference to FIG.
At this stage, the "setting information A" included in the recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200 is the control conditions (for example, heating power of 1000 W, heating time of 10 minutes) that are prepared in advance on the communication terminal 200 side. In other words, the remote operation information 219 includes information on the control conditions that are set as defaults.

Next, in step SC7, it is determined whether the user US has agreed to the control conditions. If the user US presses the start key 151M, it is considered that the user US has agreed to the control conditions, and the control device 40 treats the setting information A as "confirmed setting information" and stores it in the "confirmed setting information" storage area in the recipe data storage unit 42 (step SC8). Then, if cooking process 1 is started using the right operation unit 15R, the control device 40 transitions to a standby processing state where it waits for the input key 153R to be touched (step SC9).

On the other hand, if the user US wishes to change the control conditions displayed in step SC6, by touching the input keys 156M and 157M, different control conditions will be displayed in the central display section 16M in response to that operation (step SC10). Then, since the user can return to step SC7, they can agree to the revised control conditions and proceed to step SC8. In other words, some of the control conditions in setting information A have been changed by input from the user US, and the setting information A becomes the "confirmed setting information."

In step SC8, the state of the central display unit 15M immediately before pressing the start key 151M is, for example, as described in FIG. 45, a message stating "Press the start key to begin heating." In contrast, after pressing the start key 151M, a message is displayed on the display unit of the corresponding heating unit to encourage the final operation. As described above, when using the right heating port 4R, a message is displayed on the right display unit 15R recommending pressing the input key 153R. In addition, the light-emitting unit 21R of the corresponding input key (153R) flashes.

On the other hand, if the determination result in step SC4 is "No," the data acquisition unit 53 receives the determination result from the communication unit 51 and transmits a signal (non-permission notification) containing information indicating that the recipe data CD cannot be received from the communication unit 51 to the outside (the communication terminal 200, the sender) (step SC11). The "non-permission notification" here is transmitted to the communication terminal 200 at step SG10 in Figure 64. Note that while Figure 58 shows the case of a cooking menu belonging to the collaborative cooking mode KM1, such a "non-permission notification" message is also transmitted for the combined cooking mode KM2 and the individual cooking mode KM1.

When the communication terminal 200 receives the denial notification of step SC11 from the cooking appliance 1, it displays that fact on the terminal display unit 216. The notification may also be made via the speaker 214 of the communication terminal 200. These details will be explained in detail in Figure 61.

Next, we will explain Figure 59.
FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the recipe data display screen and cooking steps of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) 200 shown in FIG.
59(A) shows the first screen 216A, which shows the state in which the user US has already found and displayed recipe information for one cooking menu item (in this case, "acquapazza") that he or she desires.

59A, reference numeral 245 denotes a display area for identifying information (cooking menu name) of the recipe data CD, which displays, for example, the name or abbreviation of the cooking method.
Reference numeral 235 denotes an image display section that displays a schematic diagram or a photograph (still image) that clearly shows the food to be cooked on the cooking menu, and is displayed in a position close to the identification information display section 245 .

59(A), the first screen 216A simultaneously displays the following six pieces of information in addition to the information in the identification information display section 245. However, due to limitations on the display area of the terminal-side display section 216, not all of the information can be viewed in a list.
(1) Cooking time (2) Serving size (2 servings, 4 servings, etc.)
(3) Ingredients (4) Preparation (5) Cooking method (cooking direction in cooking step 1, cooking step 2, etc. performed in cooking device 1, etc.)
(6) Cooking process information (heating means and its control conditions, etc.) 236A, 236B.
59(A), as shown in a first display portion 251 and a second display portion 252 described later, default values of control conditions such as "IH optimum temperature 200°C" and "grill for 10 minutes" are shown. These default values of control conditions can also be included in the recipe data CD and transmitted. Therefore, the cooking appliance 1 can obtain data such as "preheat temperature 200°C" as setting information for the control device 40.

The cooking process information 236A, 236B is displayed in one place for each cooking process. For example, in a cooking menu having cooking process 1 and cooking process 2 (such as the above-mentioned "Aquapazza"), the cooking process information 236A, 236B is displayed in one place at the end of the display of the contents of cooking process 1 and cooking process 2.
59(A) shows only a portion of the first screen 216A. By touching this first screen 216A with your fingertip FG and moving it upward as shown by the dashed line, you can scroll the screen upward. In other words, this first screen 216A continues vertically, with new information being displayed sequentially from the bottom. This allows detailed information such as ingredients and preparation instructions to be displayed sequentially.

237A is a confirmation key (icon) for selecting cooking step 1 of one of the cooking menus (for example, the above-mentioned "Aquapazza") displayed on this first screen 216A. This confirmation key 237A is the confirmation key (icon) for the cooking menu described in step SE5 of FIG.
Reference numeral 251 denotes a first display portion relating to cooking step 1 in the cooking instructions (recipe). The first portion M1 may or may not include information in the first display portion 251 in addition to the information in the identification information display portion 245 and the cooking step information 236A.
As is clear from Figure 59 (A), the first screen 216A has a screen configuration in which the input key 237A and the cooking process information 236A are located at the very end of the section displaying the "how to make" for cooking process 1, i.e., adjacent to the bottom end of the first display section 251.

Next, FIG. 59(B) will be described.
Since Figure 59 (B) is a screen that continues from the bottom end of the first screen 216A shown in Figure 59 (A), neither the identification information (cooking menu name) display section 245 of the recipe data CD nor the image display section 235 is displayed.
In the cooking instructions (recipe), the cooking step information 236B and input keys (icons) 237B are arranged adjacent to and below the second display portion 252 related to cooking step 2. As shown in Fig. 59(B), the cooking method for the "heating pause period P3" between cooking step 1 and cooking step 2 is also displayed.
As shown in Figures 59 (A) and (B), the first screen 216A displays, in the order of the cooking steps, what the user US should do from cooking step 1 through the heating pause period P3, as well as information on the cooking method and ingredients for cooking step 2, and information on control conditions such as heat and heating time.

The second portion M2 may, but need not, include information from this second display portion 252 in addition to the information from the identification information display portion 245 and cooking process information 236B.

Next, we will explain Figure 60.
FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display operation of the communication terminal 200 shown in FIG.
60(A) shows the first screen 216A, which shows a state in which the user US has already found and displayed recipe information for one desired cooking menu.

In Figure 60(A), 234 is a text display section that indicates the type of information displayed on the first screen 216A. In Figure 60(A), "IH Menu" is displayed to indicate that this is an induction heating cooking menu. Note that this text display section 234 does not have to be displayed as shown in Figure 59(A). Furthermore, if there are multiple cooking processes separated by the heating pause period P3, this text display section 234 may display the cooking process number (process identification information 182), such as "Process 1," "Process 2," etc.

On the first screen 216A, the image display section 235, which displays schematic diagrams or photographs (still images) that clearly show the dishes to be cooked on the cooking menu, is displayed adjacent to the identification information (cooking menu name) display section 245.

237A is a confirmation key (icon) for selecting one of the cooking menus displayed on this first screen 216A. This confirmation key 237A is the selection key (icon) for cooking process 1 described in step SD1 of FIG. 57. 238 is an input key (icon) for issuing a command to close this first screen 216A.

Next, FIG. 60(B) will be described.
When the user US touches the confirmation key (icon) 237A (or 237B) for the cooking menu on the first screen 216A, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 receives the input from the touch operation and switches the display from the first screen 216A to the second screen 216B as shown in Figure 60 (B).

In the second screen 216B, the reference numeral 239 denotes a character display section that indicates the type of display information of the second screen 216B. In Fig. 60(B), "Preparing to send IH settings" is displayed to indicate that the second screen 216B is in the preparation stage for sending the setting information for induction heating cooking.
240 is an input key (icon) that commands transmission, and when this is pressed, the recipe data of the cooking menu selected in Figure 60 (A) is sent sequentially to the heating cooker 1 in two parts, a first part M1 and a second part M2.

The second screen 216B shown in FIG. 60(B) is the "cooking process 1 transmission waiting screen" in step SE7 shown in FIG.
When the user US sees the contents displayed on this second screen 216B, he or she will recognize that he or she needs to touch a specific input key (icon) 152R or 152L on either the right operation unit 15R or the left operation unit 15L of the cooking appliance 1.
After that touch operation, press the input key 240 on this second screen 216B. Note that 241 is an input key for canceling, and by touching this, it is possible to return to the state shown in Fig. 60(A).

Next, we will explain Figure 61(A).
Figure 61 (A) is a second screen 216B1 showing a standby state for transmission of the first part M1 or the second part M2 of the recipe data CD for executing one cooking menu, upon receiving selection information A (202) by touching a specific input key (152R, etc.).
FIG. 61(B) shows another second screen 216B2 that displays a transmission result different from that shown in FIG. 61(A) upon receiving selection information A (202) by touching a specific input key (such as 152R).
These two types of second screens 216B1 and 216B2 are not dedicated screens that are necessarily displayed on the terminal display unit 216 after recipe data CD is transmitted from the communication terminal 200. A transition from the state of Fig. 60(A) or Fig. 60(B) to Fig. 62(A) or Fig. 62(B) may also be made.

There are at least two types of second screens 216B1 and 216B2, as shown in Fig. 61(A) and (B). The first screen, like second display screen 216B1 shown in Fig. 61(A), displays a message requesting that a specific input key (e.g., 152R) on the cooking appliance 1 side be operated, and therefore that the setting information (either the first part M1 or the second part M2) be transmitted by operating input key 240.
The other is a second screen 216B2 that notifies the user that the desired heating port or heating means is unavailable due to circumstances on the side of the cooking appliance 1. In other words, this second screen B (216B2) is displayed when the input key (icon) 237A on the first screen 216A is pressed and the heating means to be used in the selected cooking menu is being used for another cooking operation.
As is clear from the second screen 216B2 of Figure 61 (B), advice information is displayed indicating that the recipe data should be sent after the cooking currently being used (right heating port 4R) is finished.

Next, we will explain Figure 62.
Fig. 62(A) is a third screen 216C1 that displays the transmission result, and Fig. 62(B) is another third screen 216C2 that displays the transmission result.
Either one of the third screens 216C1 and 216C2 is a dedicated screen that is always displayed on the terminal display unit 216 after the recipe data CD is transmitted from the communication terminal 200.

There are two types of third screens 216C1 and 216C2. The first screen is the third screen 216C1 shown in Fig. 62(A). The fact that the transmission was successful is displayed in text on the display unit 244A.
The other is a third screen 216C2 that is displayed when the transmission from the cooking appliance 1 ends in failure, as shown in FIG. 62(B).

As shown in Figure 62 (B), the third screen 216C2 displays in text on the display section 244B that transmission from the cooking appliance 1 has failed, along with the cause of the failure.

Next, FIG. 63 and FIG. 64 will be described.
Fig. 63 shows the main operation steps of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 and the related operation steps of the communication terminal 200. Further detailed steps will be explained in Fig. 64.
63 to 65 do not illustrate wireless communication between the cloud server 300 and the cooking appliance 1. Therefore, transmission of the status information periodically performed by the cooking appliance 1 to the cloud server 300, etc., is not shown in these figures.

In FIG. 63, steps SG1 to SG12 indicate operation steps of the control device 40 and the communication terminal 200.
SP1 is a "communication establishment step" (preparation step) after the communication state is established, in which information regarding specific recipe data CD is not yet transmitted or received.

The next step, SP2A, is a "key identification step" in which advance notice information 1 (201) (cooking step 1) is transmitted from communication terminal 200 and the contents of advance notice information 1 (201) are determined by control device 40. In this key identification step SP2A, the specific input key to be operated on cooking appliance 1 is determined from the cooking menu (identification information) in advance notice information 1 (201).

The next step SP2B is a "notification step" in which, based on the determination result of key identification step SP2A, the specific input key is displayed on display unit 16. Note that the correspondence between the specific input key and display unit 16 is stored in advance as data on the control device 40 side. For example, if the specific input key is determined to be "153M" on central operation unit 15M, a command is issued from control device 40 to display it on central display unit 16M.

SP3 is a “confirmation step” in which the cooking appliance 1 confirms the contents of the advance notice information 1 (201) and transmits a confirmation signal (selection information A) 202 to the communication terminal 200.
SP4 is a "receiving step" for acquiring information on recipe data CD relating to one food item to be cooked.
SP5 is a "standby step" (standby state before cooking) in which the cooking appliance 1 waits for a command to start cooking after successfully acquiring the recipe data CD.
In FIG. 63, the following description will be given focusing on the process from the point in time when a communication state is established between the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal 200 (step SG1).
Figure 63 shows the acquisition of the data portion of cooking process 1 of recipe data CD, i.e., the data of the first portion M1. To acquire the data portion of cooking process 2, i.e., the data of the second portion M2, it is necessary to execute step SG3B and subsequent steps again.

The communication state is established by, for example, sending and receiving a preparation signal (preparation information) 203 for mutual authentication between the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal 200. This preparation signal (preparation information) 203 is automatically transmitted when the cooking appliance 1 is started up, or transmitted when a specific input key (the input key 153M) is pressed. The preparation signal 203 is a unified signal regardless of the heating means or cooking menu, and includes at least the device identification information of the cooking appliance 1. Furthermore, as described in FIG. 41, two-dimensional information 60B that guides the communication terminal 200 to the cloud server 300 is displayed on the initial standby screen 16MH, so that the communication terminal 200 can easily prepare to obtain recipe data from the cloud server 300.

Figure 63 illustrates the execution of a cooking menu related to cooperative cooking mode KM1. Note that, as described above, the communication terminal 200 does not allow users to specify a cooking mode and search for cooking menus by that cooking mode. Furthermore, since it is more efficient to search by cooking type (e.g., Japanese, Chinese, etc.), name, abbreviation, etc. rather than by cooking mode, the communication terminal 200 of this embodiment 1 employs a method for extracting cooking menus by cooking name (including abbreviation), etc.

First, the communication terminal 200 searches for a cooking menu. Recipe data for the desired cooking menu may be obtained in advance from the cloud server 300 (step SG2). At this point, the terminal display unit 216 displays a search screen 216P (not shown) that displays the search results for the cooking menu.

On the communication terminal 200, when one of the multiple cooking menus displayed on the search screen 216P is selected by touch operation, only the specific (one) cooking menu that the user US wants to cook can be displayed on the first screen 216A (step SG3). At this point, the setting information for executing the specific one cooking menu is read from the cooking appliance database 217 and temporarily stored in the recipe selection unit 232.

When the user US touches the confirmation key 237A on the first screen 216A (see Figure 60) at this step SG3 stage (step SG3A), the central processing unit (CPU) 212 receives the input from the touch operation and displays the second screen 216B on the terminal display unit 216 instead of the first screen 216A (step SG3B) (see Figure 60).

In this embodiment 1, up until the time of step SG3B, a specific input key (for example, 153M) can be freely touched on the cooking appliance 1. When a touch operation (input operation) is performed, selection information (202) specific to the specific input key is transmitted to the communication terminal 200 (see FIG. 65).
Therefore, in step SG3B, just before the second screen 216B is displayed on the terminal display unit 216, that is, at the stage of generating the advance notice information 1 (advance notice) 201 described below, it is determined whether the input key (e.g., 153M) to be operated has already been operated.

If this determination shows that the previously operated input key (e.g., 153M) does not match the specific input key (e.g., 152L) that must be operated for the cooking appliance 1 to obtain the cooking menu displayed on the first screen 216A, advance notice information 1 (advance notice) 201 is sent to the cooking appliance 1 (step SG3B).

In this way, when the confirmation key (icon) 237A for the cooking menu is pressed, the presence or absence of a specific input key (e.g., 152L) that requires operation is determined, and the central processing unit (CPU) 212 of the communication terminal 200 generates and transmits advance notice information 1 (201).

As described in Fig. 60(B), the second screen 216B displays information (selection request information) requesting a confirmation input operation on the cooking appliance 1 side. This information includes the advance notice information 1 (201).
In the example of Fig. 60(B), the operation of either the right operation unit 15R or the left operation unit 15L is specified. In this example, the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is used and the first cooking step 1 is induction heating, so for example, it is necessary to touch the specific input key 152L of the right operation unit 15R.
In this case, the touch operation may be either the "long press" operation or the "short press" operation described above, but if the "long press operation" is performed, "voice input mode 1" is started.

In this way, upon receiving the advance notice information 1 (201), the cooking appliance 1 displays on the display 15 (center display 15M, left and right display 15L, 15R) that operation of either the right operating unit 15R or the left operating unit 15L is required (step SG4).

In this way, when the confirmation key (icon) 237A for the cooking menu is pressed, the presence or absence of a specific input key (e.g., 152L) that requires operation is determined, and the central processing unit (CPU) 212 of the communication terminal 200 generates and transmits advance notice information 1 (201).

If it is determined in step SG3A that a specific input key (e.g., 152L) has already been operated, the first screen 216A in FIG. 60(A) transitions to the second screen 216B as shown in FIG. 61(A), and the advance notice information 1 (201) stating "A specific input key needs to be operated" as shown in FIG. 60(B) is not sent again to the user US. In other words, as shown in FIG. 61(A), because the specific input key (e.g., 152L) has already been operated, a message is displayed requesting that the user press input key 240 (send button) to send.

As shown in FIG. 63, the key identification process SP2A continues up to step SG4. If the user US touches a specific input key (e.g., 152L) before receiving the advance notice information 1 (advance notice) 201, such input is detected by the input signal analysis unit 52 (see FIG. 10) of the control device 40 in the key identification process SP2A, and information about the operated input key is recorded (saved) in chronological order in the storage device 41.

When the advance notice information 1 (201) is received, the key identification process SP2A reads out the corresponding information KID corresponding to the cooking menu of the advance notice information 1 (201) from the storage device 41, and identifies the specific input key that requires input operation.
If the extracted specific input key is the input key 153 of the central operation unit 15M and the specific input key 153M has already been touched before receiving the advance notice information 1 (201), there is no need to operate it again, and this fact is displayed on the central display unit 16M.

On the other hand, the extracted specific input key is not necessarily one. As in the first embodiment, there are right heating port 4R and left heating port 4L, and cooking can be performed using either one of the right and left heating port 4R and left and right heating port 4L in the specific cooking menu selected by the user US.
In this case, if a predetermined specific input key corresponding to the cooking menu has never been touched before receiving the advance notice information 1 (201), the control device 40 displays information on the display unit 16, such as the central display unit 16M, that identifies the specific input key that requires input operation.
The following describes a case where, after receiving the advance notice information 1 (201), the key identification process SP2A notifies the user that there are two specific input keys to be operated: the specific input key 152R on the right operation unit 15R and the specific input key 152L on the left operation unit 15L.

In step SG4, when the specific input key 152L is touched to select the left heating port 4L, the "occupied state" of the heating means is initiated as described above. If, at step SG4, the input key 152R of the right operation unit 15R is operated before the input key 152L is operated, the operation of this input key 152R is recognized by the control device 40. Then, in the next step SG5, operation information of the specific input key is transmitted to the communication terminal 200.
Then, communication terminal 200 can detect that specific input key 152R has been operated.

Continuing with the explanation of FIG.
In the notification step SP2B, when the specific input key 152R is touched (step SG5), data indicating the result of this touch operation is acquired by the communication terminal 200 (step SG6). The data indicating the result of this touch operation from the cooking appliance 1 may be referred to as a "confirmation signal" or "selection information A" 202 in the following description.
In this step SG6, it is determined from the received contents of the selection information A that a specific input key (for example, 152R) has been operated, based on the specific selection information (202B).
Therefore, as shown in Fig. 61(A), the message "The right IH ON button has been pressed" is displayed on the second screen A (216B1) of the terminal display unit 216 of the communication terminal 200 (when the option is set). If the option is not set, the state of the second screen 216B shown in Fig. 60(B) is maintained.

Next, when the input key 240 on the second screen 216B shown in FIG. 60(B) is pressed, or when the input key 240 on the second screen A (216B1) shown in FIG. 58(A) is pressed, the recipe data CD (first part M1) for executing a specific cooking menu is transmitted in a batch from the communication terminal 200 (step SG7). In other words, the "command data" (setting information A) for setting the cooking appliance 1 to a specific state and enabling cooking step 1 to be executed is transmitted in a batch from the communication terminal 200.

In this embodiment 1, the communication unit 51 of the cooking appliance 1 is attached to the outer wall surface of the cooking appliance 1 in the form of an adapter, and therefore, hereinafter, the communication unit 51 will be referred to as the "communication adapter."

When the communication adapter 51 receives the command data (step SG8), it acquires status information of the cooking appliance 1 itself, as will be described later. As described in Fig. 58, this "status information" is information indicating the status of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1. Therefore, for example, it is information ascertaining the status of the first heating means HM1 by the heating control unit 43.
In this way, the status information of the cooking appliance 1 and the contents of the received command data are analyzed to determine whether there is any problem with the execution of cooking according to the received command data (see step SG9 in FIG. 64).

If the cooking appliance 1 determines that there are no problems with carrying out the cooking, the communication adapter 51 transmits the status check result to the communication terminal 200 (step SG10). This transmission process corresponds to the transmission of the "permission notification" in step SC5 described in Figure 58. If the cooking appliance 1 determines that there are problems with carrying out the cooking, the communication adapter 51 of the cooking appliance 1 transmits to the communication terminal 200 a signal (notification of non-permission) containing information indicating that the recipe data CD cannot be received. This corresponds to the processing of step SC11 shown in Figure 58.

In the communication terminal 200, the central processing unit 212 analyzes the content of the "permission notice" or "non-permission notice" from the cooking appliance 1 (step SG11).
Then, either the third screen 216C1 shown in FIG. 62(A) or the third screen 216C2 shown in FIG. 62(B) is displayed (step SG12).

As explained in Figure 47 etc., there is a recipe data reception restriction period TZ1, so if data for a specific cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger steak") is acquired through recipe data, that cooking menu cannot be changed to another cooking menu (e.g., "fried chicken" or "pork cutlet"). Therefore, there is no need to input using the input keys 154M and 155M corresponding to the first area 22, and the corresponding light-emitting element 21M will not emit light. Furthermore, the cooking menu cannot be changed by voice input at this stage.

When cooking a specific cooking menu based on received recipe data, the user US can change the control conditions (e.g., cooking time, target heating temperature, etc.) as needed using the input operation unit 15 or voice input before starting cooking, but some cooking menus do not allow the control conditions to be changed. Furthermore, the "allowable setting range" for the control conditions is set in advance on the cooking appliance 1 side, and even cooking menus obtained from the communication terminal 200 cannot deviate from this "allowable setting range."

Pressing the start key 151M on the central operation unit 15M starts cooking step 1 of the linked cooking mode KM1 (step SG12 in Figure 63). However, if cooking step 1 is an induction heating source (first heating means HM1) that drives the right heating port 4R or left heating port 4L, starting cooking step 1 requires again touching the input key 153R or 153L on the right operation unit 15R or left operation unit 15L.

Next, we will explain Figure 64.
In FIG. 64, steps SG1 to SG16 indicate the main operation steps of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 and the associated operation steps of the communication terminal 200.
In Figure 64, the same parts as in Figure 63 are given the same reference numerals, so the following explanation will focus on the different parts.

Step SG9 analyzes the status information of the cooking appliance 1 and the received command data (related to cooking step 1) to determine whether there is any problem with the execution of cooking according to the received command data.
Here, the "status information" of the cooking appliance 1 is, for example, information such as "the heating power of induction heating is zero and the appliance is in a standby state immediately before heating starts," and information such as the state upon receiving a temperature detection signal from the temperature sensor group 30 and the detected temperature, which is acquired by the communication adapter 51. Note that the communication adapter 51 repeatedly performs such status confirmation operations at regular intervals to collect the latest accurate data.
In this way, the status information of the cooking appliance 1 and the contents of the received command data are analyzed to determine whether there is a problem with the execution of cooking according to the received command data. Note that this determination process has been explained in detail in step SC4 of Figure 58, so details will be omitted here.

In the heating cooker 1, when cooking can be started using the received recipe data, the light-emitting units 21M, 21L, and 21R are illuminated to indicate to the user US the input key that can be operated first in the input operation unit 15 to be operated.
For example, in the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM1,
(1) When cooking step 1 is performed in heating chamber 6, light emitting portions 21M of input keys 156M and 157M are illuminated (step SG13), and the process prepares for input of control conditions.
(2) If cooking step 1 is performed using either the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L, the light emitting portions 21L and 21R of the input keys 154L, 154R, 155L and 155R are illuminated (step SG13).

As described above, in step SG13, the light emitting section 21 (21L, 21M, 21R) of the specific input key in the input operation section 15 selected in step SG5 is made to emit light continuously or flash light, thereby clearly indicating the presence of the specific input key (e.g., 152L) that should be operated first.
When the input key 152L of the left operation unit 15L is touched in step SG5, selection information A is transmitted. The light-emitting element 21L of the input key 153L (see FIG. 7) in the left operation unit 15L flashes or lights up continuously (step SG13). Then, the user US is guided to operate this input key (start key) 153L to start induction heating.

At this point, the light-emitting elements 21L of the input keys 155L and 154L may be flashing or lit continuously so that the heat level and other adjustments can be made. However, since the heat level and time can be adjusted once induction heating has actually started, it is not necessary to flash or light them continuously.

Next, the process proceeds to step SG15. In this step SG15, pressing the start key 153L on the left operation unit 15L starts induction heating cooking. Immediately after the start of heating, the communication adapter 51 of the cooking appliance 1 again performs an operation to obtain status information at regular intervals and transmits the information to the communication terminal 200.
In the linked cooking mode KM1 that does not use recipe data CD, even if cooking step 1 is the left heating port 4L, cooking is started in two steps by pressing input key 151M on the central operation unit 15M and then input key 153L. In this respect, the cooking start procedures for the left and right heating port 4L, 4R when recipe data CD is used and when it is not used are different.

In the next step SG16, the communication terminal 200 acquires status information data from the cooking appliance 1 and can monitor on the terminal display unit 216 that cooking is being performed according to the recipe data set by the user US. At this point, the third screen 216C is no longer displayed on the terminal display unit 216.

The aforementioned reception restriction period TZ1 begins at step SG5 shown in Figure 64. That is, if the control device 40 (input signal analysis unit 52) determines that one of the specific input keys 152L, 152R, 153M has been operated after the notification step SP2B (see Figure 63), the reception restriction period (TZ1: see Figure 47) begins from that point.

If a specific input key (e.g., 153M) is operated before the notification step SP2B, a reception restriction period (TZ1: see FIG. 47) begins from the time the specific input key (e.g., 153M) is operated. When this reception restriction period TZ1 begins, the input functions of the specific input keys 152L, 152R, 153M and all other input keys (excluding the start and stop switches of input keys 151M, 152M, etc.) in an "illegal state" are disabled. In other words, valid input signals cannot be transmitted from the input operation unit 15 to the control device 40. As a result, it becomes impossible to obtain recipe data CD for another cooking menu or enter a cooking mode (e.g., linked cooking mode KM1).

The "irregular state" refers to a state other than when the cooking appliance 1 requests the user US to touch a specific input key (e.g., 153M) upon receiving advance notice information 1 (advance notice) 201 from the communication terminal 200. In other words, this refers to a state in which a new cooking menu is selected or a control condition is set by operating an input key other than the specific input key displayed on the display unit 16 in the notification step SP2B.

Next, we will explain Figure 65.
Figure 65 is a time chart 3 showing the cooperative operation between the communication terminal (information processing terminal device) 200 and the cooking appliance 1 in the cooking system of embodiment 1. Basically, after advance notice information 1 (201) arrives from the communication terminal 200, a specific input key (e.g., 153M) is operated on the cooking appliance 1 in accordance with the advance notice information 1 (see Figures 63 and 64). However, Figure 65 shows an exceptional case. That is, Figure 65 shows a case where a specific input key (e.g., 153M) is operated on the cooking appliance 1 before advance notice information 1 (201) arrives from the communication terminal 200.

In FIG. 65, steps SG1 to SG12 indicate the main operation steps of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 and the associated operation steps of the communication terminal 200.
SP1 is a "communication establishment step" (preparation step) after the communication state is established, as explained in Fig. 63. This is a stage in which information regarding specific recipe data CD is not transmitted or received.

The next step SP2A is a "key identification step" in which advance notice information 1 (201) is transmitted from communication terminal 200 and the content of advance notice information 1 (201) is determined by control device 40. This key identification step SP2A starts when a specific input key (e.g., 153M) is touched on cooking appliance 1. Alternatively, it starts when display screen 2C is displayed on display unit 16 (central display unit 16M) and acquisition operation support information 60P is displayed, as described in FIG. 41 .
Step SG1A is a step in which the display screen 2C (see FIG. 41) is displayed. In step SG1A, when the approach of the communication terminal 200 is detected and the communication establishment step SP1 is started, the display unit 16 can prompt the user to operate a specific input key at this initial stage in order to acquire recipe data CD from the outside (display screen 2C in FIG. 41).

When the user US touches an appropriate specific input key (e.g., 153M) to execute a desired cooking menu (step SG1B), history information of this input operation is recorded (stored) in the storage device 41. The cooking appliance 1 also transmits information on the specific input key that was operated (corresponding information KID) to the communication terminal 200 as selection information A (202). The central processing unit (CPU) 212 of the communication terminal 200 stores the selection information A (202) including the information on the specific input key that was operated (corresponding information KID) in the cooking appliance database 217 or the storage unit 220.
SG3 indicates the stage at which a specific cooking menu is displayed on terminal display unit 216 of communication terminal 200.

As explained in Figure 63, step SG4 is a display step performed by the cooking appliance 1 upon receiving the advance notice information 1 (201), but this may be performed immediately after the "first determination" in the next step SG5A. For this reason, it is indicated by a dashed frame. For example, the display unit 15 (central display unit 15M, left and right display units 15L, 15R) displays that operation of either the specific input key 152R or 152L on the right operation unit 15R or left operation unit 15L is required. In the case of the specific input key 153M, it may be displayed only on the central display unit 15M.

Step SG5A is a process corresponding to step SG5 described in Fig. 63. This step SG5A is also called a "key determination step" performed in the confirmation process SP3.
In this step SG5A, it is determined whether the information on the specific input key to be operated (key correspondence information KID) corresponding to the identification information of one cooking menu sent in the advance notice information 1 of step SG4 matches the specific input key operated in the key identification process SP2 (hereinafter, this is referred to as the "first determination").

Next, if the first determination results in no match, a determination is made as to whether the specific input key to be operated (e.g., 152R) has been operated (hereinafter, this is referred to as the "second determination").

If the first determination results in no match, information about the specific input key to be operated is displayed on the display unit 16 (e.g., central display unit 16M, right display unit 16R), and text or other information is displayed indicating that the displayed specific input key is to be operated. In other words, in step SG5A, similar to step SG4 in FIG. 63, information is displayed to identify the input key to be operated (e.g., 152L) and prompt the user to operate it, and then the second determination is made.

If the first determination results in a "match" and then the second determination results in an "operated" determination, selection information A (202) is transmitted to communication terminal 200 (step SG5A).
In this way, in either case, when the appropriate specific input key is operated before receiving advance notice information 1 (201) from communication terminal 200, or when the appropriate specific input key is operated after receiving advance notice information 1 (201), recipe data CD selected by user US can be acquired by heating cooker 1. Moreover, since the specific input key to be operated only needs to be operated once for one cooking step, operation by user US is simple.

As described above, when a specific input key (e.g., 152L) is pressed in step SG5A to transmit selected information A, the left display unit 16L corresponding to this specific input key 152L displays a receiving operation display unit 174 (not shown) using text and graphics to indicate that the selected information A has been transmitted and that the device is entering a receiving state for recipe data CD. If a command to transmit selected information A is issued using specific input key 153M on the shared operation unit 15M, the receiving operation display unit 174 (not shown) is displayed on the central display unit 16M.

Furthermore, in this step SG5A, a display may be displayed to notify the user US of the latest situation.
For example, when it is confirmed in the confirmation step SP3 that the specific input key (e.g., 153M) has been operated, the control device 40 displays information indicating that the selection information A (202) has been transmitted (e.g., text information such as "A response signal has been transmitted") or information indicating the receiving process of the recipe data CD (e.g., text information such as "The receiving process will now begin") on the display unit 16 (e.g., 16M) corresponding to the input operation unit (e.g., central operation unit 15M) where the input key is located. This step is included in the step SG5A shown in FIG. 65.

Next, we will explain Figure 66.
66 is a time chart showing the cooking operation in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 of the cooking appliance 1 in the cooking system of embodiment 1. Steps SS40 to SS55 show the main control operations of the control device 40. In the case of cooking with one cooking step, such as the single cooking mode KM3, one cooking step ends at step SS47.
FIG. 66 provides a more detailed explanation of the operational steps shown in FIG. 43, and the corresponding steps in FIG. 43 are designated in FIG. 66 by the symbols SU3, SU4, SU5, SU6, SU8, SU9 and SU10.

Step SS40 is the stage where advance notice information 1 (201) corresponding to the data of the first part M1 for executing cooking process 1 is received from the communication terminal 200.
In the next step SS41, the contents of the advance notice information 1 are analyzed. As described above, the advance notice information 1 includes identification information that specifies the cooking menu, process identification information 182 (not shown) that indicates cooking process 1, etc. Therefore, upon receiving the advance notice information 1, specific input keys that need to be operated on the cooking appliance 1 side are extracted from the data in the storage device 41.

In step SS42, information indicating the extracted specific input key is displayed on the display unit 16. In addition, the audio notification unit 50 may prompt the user to operate the specific input key by audio. Furthermore, the (center) light-emitting unit 21M or the (right) light-emitting unit 21R corresponding to the right operation unit 15R may indicate the specific input key to be operated by continuous light emission or flashing light.

In step SS43, when a specific input key (e.g., 152R on the right operation unit 15R) is operated while referring to the information indicating the specific input key displayed on the display unit 16, the control unit 40 generates selection information A (202) corresponding to the specific input key (e.g., 152R) and transmits it from the communication unit 51.

In step SS44, the setting information (for the first portion M1 related to cooking process 1) transmitted from the communication terminal 200 is received.
As explained in steps SC4 to SC6 of FIG. 58, the communication unit (communication adapter) 51 determines whether it is in a state where it can transition to control in accordance with the contents of the received recipe data CD relating to the first portion M1.

If the communication unit (communication adapter) 51 judges "Yes," the data acquisition unit 53 receives the judgment result from the communication unit 51 and stores the data of the first portion M1 acquired immediately before in a specified storage area of the recipe data storage unit 42, in preparation for the heating and cooking that will be performed immediately afterwards.

Next, step SS45 is not a required process, as indicated by the dashed line, but rather a function that can be added as an option. In this step SS45, the data acquisition unit 53 sends a signal (status check result) indicating that the data was successfully acquired from the communication unit 51 to the communication terminal 200, which is the sender of the recipe data CD (data of the first part M1). The "status check result" here corresponds to the processing of step SG10 in Figure 64.

Next, in step SS46, the contents of the acquired recipe data CD (data of the first part M1) are displayed on the display unit 16, and if the start of cooking is input using the input operation unit 15, cooking (cooking process 1) will begin. After that, cooking (cooking process 1) will end (step SS47).

Since the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is selected, the heating pause period P3 starts from step SS47.
During this heating pause period P3, if the data of the second part M2 of the recipe data CD is not acquired, the cooking process 2 cannot be proceeded to.
Therefore, during this heating pause period P3, operations similar to those in steps SS40 to SS45 are performed.

The user US operates the communication terminal 200 to transmit advance notice information 2 of the second part M2 for carrying out the cooking process 2.
Therefore, in step SS48, the notice information 2 (201) is received from the communication terminal 200.
In the next step SS49, the contents of the advance notice information 2 are analyzed. Then, in response to the advance notice information 2, specific input keys that require input operation are extracted from the data in the storage device 41.

In step SS50, information indicating the extracted specific input key is displayed on the display unit 16. In addition, the audio notification unit 50 may prompt the user to operate the specific input key by audio. Furthermore, the (central) light-emitting unit 21M or the light-emitting unit 21M corresponding to the central operation unit 15M may indicate the specific input key to be operated by continuously emitting light or flashing light.

In step SS51, when a specific input key (e.g., 153M on central operation unit 15M) is operated while referring to the information indicating the specific input key displayed on display unit 16, control unit 40 generates selection information A (202) corresponding to the specific input key (e.g., 153M) and transmits it from communication unit 51.

In step SS52, the setting information (for the second portion M2 related to cooking process 2) transmitted from the communication terminal 200 is received.
In step SS52, as explained in step SS44, it is determined whether or not it is possible to transition to control according to the contents of the recipe data CD relating to the second portion M2 received by the communication unit (communication adapter) 51.

If the communication unit (communication adapter) 51 judges "Yes," the data for the second portion M2 acquired immediately before is stored in a specified storage area in the recipe data storage unit 42 in preparation for cooking step 2, which is performed immediately afterwards.

Next, step SS53, as indicated by the dashed line, is not a required process, but rather an optional function that can be added. In this step SS53, similar to step SS45, the status check result is sent to communication terminal 200. This allows communication terminal 200 to check whether communication was successful.

Next, in step SS54, the contents of the acquired recipe data CD (data of the second part M2) are displayed on the display unit 16, and cooking (cooking step 2) is started by inputting the start of cooking via the input operation unit 15. At this point, the heating pause step P3 ends.
Thereafter, the cooking process (cooking step 2) is terminated by a stop operation by the user US, or the cooking process (cooking step 2) is terminated automatically after the set heating time has elapsed (step SS55).

Although not explained in steps SS46 and SS54, the user US can modify control conditions such as heat level and set temperature as needed before starting cooking process 1 and cooking process 2. However, depending on the cooking menu, it may not be possible to change the received setting conditions for the first part M1 or second part M2. It is also possible to modify the control conditions midway through the cooking operation after it has started.

Summary of embodiment 1.
As is clear from the above description, in this first embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one embodiment of the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure is as follows:
an input operation unit 15;
a first heating means HM1 and a second heating means HM2;
a communication unit 51 for wireless communication with the outside;
Notification means 90;
a control device (40) that executes cooking using the recipe data (CD) acquired via the communication unit (51);
The control device 40 acquires the recipe data CD in two stages: a first portion M1 that sets a cooking process 1 using one or two of the heating means, and a second portion M2 that sets a cooking process 2 that uses one or two of the heating means;
The control device 40
(1) a communication establishment step SP1 of establishing a communication state with a specific communication terminal 200;
(2) a notification step 1 (SP2A) in which, after the communication establishment step SP1, the notification means 90 performs a specific notification A regarding the operation of the input operation unit (necessity, existence of a specific input key, etc.);
(3) after the notification step 1 (SP2A), a notification step 2 (SP2B) in which the notification means 90 performs a specific notification B regarding the operation of the input operation unit (necessity, existence of a specific input key, etc.);
(4) a confirmation step (SP3A) of transmitting selection information when the input operation unit notified in the notification step 1 is operated for input;
(5) a confirmation step 2 (SP3B) of transmitting selection information 2 when the input operation unit notified in the notification step 2 is operated;
To carry out
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

With this configuration, the cooking appliance 1 can reliably acquire the external recipe data CD and use it for actual cooking.
Furthermore, in embodiment 1, in either case, when the user US operates in advance the input operation unit (for example, the central operation unit 15M with input keys 153M) on the side of the cooking appliance 1 that is suitable for obtaining the selected recipe data (cooking menu), or when the user US receives advance notice information 1 (and advance notice information 2 if there are multiple cooking processes) from the communication terminal 200 and then performs input operation on the input operation unit that is to be operated, the user US performs a confirmation operation on the cooking appliance 1 side (whether or not a specific operation has been performed on the input operation unit 15) before proceeding to the operation of obtaining the recipe data CD, thereby preventing operating errors by the user US and improving usability.
Furthermore, recipe data CD for a cooking menu with multiple cooking steps can be reliably obtained for each cooking step through receiving the preview information 1, preview information 2, etc. and the confirmation operation (selection information A, selection information B), which is expected to improve the operability of a heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking using multiple cooking steps.

In the first embodiment, the specific notification A is further performed in response to the acquisition of the advance notice information 1 (201) regarding the first portion M1 from the communication unit 51 (notification step 1).
Furthermore, after the notification step 1, the specific notification B is made in response to the acquisition of advance notice information 2 (201) regarding the second part M2 from the communication unit 51 (notification step 2), so that the specific notification A and the specific notification B are executed reliably, and reliable operation of the input operation unit 15 by the user US can be expected.

Furthermore, in this first embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the second disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one embodiment of the cooking device 1 according to the second disclosure is as follows:
an input operation unit 15;
First heating means HM1 to third heating means HM3;
a communication unit 51 for wireless communication with the outside;
Notification means 90;
a control device (40) that executes cooking using the recipe data (CD) acquired via the communication unit (51);
The control device 40 acquires the recipe data CD in two stages: a first portion M1 that sets a cooking process 1 that uses one or more of the first heating means HM1 to the third heating means, and a second portion M2 that sets a cooking process 2 that uses one or more of the first heating means HM1 to the third heating means;
The control device 40
(1) After the notification means 90 notifies that the recipe data CD related to the first portion M1 can be acquired, when the specific input key A (e.g., 152L) is operated, the process proceeds to a step of acquiring the setting information A of the first portion M1;
(2) After the notification means 90 notifies that the recipe data CD related to the second portion M2 can be acquired, when the specific input key B (e.g., 153M) is operated, proceeding to a step in which the setting information B of the second portion M2 can be acquired;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

With this configuration, the cooking appliance 1 can reliably acquire the external recipe data CD and use it for actual cooking.
In other words, when the cooking appliance 1 acquires the recipe data (cooking menu) selected by the user US, it receives advance notice information 1 (and advance notice information 2 if there are two cooking processes) from the communication terminal 200, and then proceeds to acquire the recipe data CD only when the specific input key (e.g., 152L) notified (to be operated) by the notification means 90 is operated, thereby preventing the user US from making operating errors and improving usability.
Furthermore, the recipe data CD for a cooking menu with multiple cooking steps can be reliably obtained for each cooking step through three steps: receiving the advance notice information (201), being notified of a specific input key by the notification means 90, and confirming the specific input key. This is expected to improve the operability of a heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking using multiple cooking steps.

Furthermore, in this first embodiment, a cooking system relating to the third disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one embodiment of the cooking system according to the third disclosure is
A cooking device 1 having a plurality of input operation units 15 (15L, 15M, 15R) and a communication function (communication unit 51);
a communication terminal 200 connected to the cooking appliance 1 by wireless communication;
The communication terminal 200
(1) The first screen 216A and the second screen 216B are displayed sequentially on the terminal display unit 216;
(2) The first screen 216A displays the recipe data CD for the selected food in the order of a first display portion 251 for cooking step 1 and a second display portion 252 for cooking step 2 (step SG3 in FIG. 59).
(3) When the first display portion 251 displayed on the first screen 216A is selected, the display is switched to the second screen displaying information specifying the input operation unit 15 to be used in the cooking process 1 (see FIG. 61 ).
(4) The second screen 216B displays input keys 240 for transmitting setting information A related to the cooking process 1 of the recipe data CD,
(5) When the input key 240 is operated, the setting information A related to the cooking process 1 selected on the first screen 216A is transmitted to the cooking appliance 1;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

With this configuration, recipe data CD stored in the external communication terminal 200 can be sequentially acquired by the cooking appliance 1 for each cooking step and used for actual cooking.
Furthermore, the communication terminal 200 displays cooking process information on the terminal display unit 216 in the order of a first display portion 251 related to cooking process 1 and a second display portion 252 related to cooking process 2, and further displays an input key 240 for sending the first portion 251, thereby visually guiding the user US to operate the device so as to reliably acquire the recipe data CD. This prevents operational errors and confusion by the user US, and improves usability, even when executing a cooking menu with two or more cooking processes.

Furthermore, in this first embodiment, a cooking system according to the fourth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one embodiment of the cooking system according to the fourth disclosure is
a cooking device (1) having a display unit (16), a plurality of specific input keys provided on an input operation unit (15), and a communication function;
a communication terminal 200 connected to the cooking appliance 1 by wireless communication;
The communication terminal 200 has a recipe selection section 232 that displays recipe data CD relating to food to be cooked on a terminal display section 216,
The communication terminal 200
(1) The first screen 216A and the second screen 216B are displayed sequentially on the terminal display unit 216,
(2) The first screen 216A displays the recipe data of the food to be cooked that is the subject of the recipe data CD in the order of a first display portion 251 relating to cooking step 1 and a second display portion 252 relating to cooking step 2.
(3) The first screen 216A displays a transmission input key 237A (for advance notice information 1) for notifying that the cooking process 1 displayed on the first screen 216A has been selected,
(4) When a transmission process is performed using the input key 237A, the display is switched to the second screen 216B,
When the cooking appliance 1 receives the advance notice information 1, the cooking appliance 1 displays on the display unit 16 information specifying the specific input key corresponding to the cooking process 1 indicated in the advance notice information A, and when the specific input key to be displayed is operated, the cooking appliance 1 issues selection information A;
When the communication terminal 200 receives the selection information A, the communication terminal 200 becomes capable of transmitting setting information A related to the cooking process 1 to the cooking appliance 1;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

With this configuration, the recipe data CD stored in the external communication terminal 200 can be reliably acquired by the cooking appliance 1 and used for actual cooking.
Moreover, the communication terminal 200 can display the input key 237A for sending in the first display portion 251 related to the cooking process 1, and guide the user US to operate the device to acquire the recipe data CD.
Furthermore, in the heating cooker 1, after the main power switch 20 is turned on, information identifying the specific input keys 152L, 152R, 153M corresponding to the cooking process 1 is displayed on the display unit 16, and the selection information A required to obtain the recipe data CD is transmitted only when the correct specific input key is operated, thereby preventing the user US from making an operational error and improving usability.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment,
After the main power switch 20 is turned on, the control device 40
(1) When any one of the specific input keys 153M, 152L, and 152R is operated for input, individual selection information A (202A, 202B, and 202C) corresponding to the specific input key is generated;
(2) When the advance notice information 1 (advance notice signal) (201) of a specific cooking menu (e.g., “hamburger steak”) targeted by the recipe data CD is received, a specific input key (e.g., 153M) corresponding to the cooking menu is identified from among the specific input keys, and a confirmation step SP3 is initiated to determine whether the identified specific input key has been operated for input;
(3) The selection information A (202A, 202B, 202C) is transmitted when the specific input key (e.g., 153M) identified in the confirmation step SP3 is operated.
The configuration is characterized by the above.

With this configuration, the cooking appliance 1 can reliably acquire the external recipe data CD and use it for actual cooking.
Furthermore, in either case, when the user US has previously operated a specific input key (e.g., 153M) on the cooking appliance 1 that is suitable for obtaining the selected recipe data (cooking menu), or when the user US receives advance notice 1 from the communication terminal 200 (including advance notice information 2, etc., in the case of a cooking menu with two cooking steps) and then operates the specific input key, the cooking appliance 1 performs a confirmation operation (whether or not the specific input key 153M has been operated) before proceeding to the operation of obtaining the recipe data CD, thereby preventing operating errors by the user US and improving usability.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of this embodiment 1,
a first heating means HM1 for heating an object to be heated at a first location (above the top plate 3) where the object to be heated is placed;
a second heating means HM2 for heating the food to be cooked in a second location (inside the heating chamber 6) where the food to be cooked is accommodated;
First input operation units 15L and 15R of the first heating means HM1;
a second input operation unit 15M of the second heating means HM2;
a control device 40 that controls the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 and performs cooking using recipe data CD obtained from an external device;
Equipped with
The first input operation units 15L, 15R and the second input operation unit 15M are respectively provided with specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 153M;
After the main power switch 20 is turned on (ON state), the control device 40
(1) a notification step SP2B of, when acquiring the recipe data CD, notifying one of the specific input keys 152L, 152R of the first input operation unit 15L, 15R or the specific input key 153M of the second input operation unit 15M, which is determined by a cooking menu of the recipe data;
(2) a confirmation step SP3 of transmitting selection information A (202) for the sender of the recipe data CD when the specific input keys 152L and 152R notified in the notification step SP2B are operated for input;
The configuration is characterized by executing the above.

With this configuration, the cooking appliance 1 can reliably acquire the external recipe data CD and use it for actual cooking.
Furthermore, in order to ensure that the specific input key to be operated can be operated on the side of the cooking appliance 1, the cooking appliance 1 undergoes a confirmation operation (whether or not the specific input key 153M has been operated) before proceeding to the operation of acquiring the recipe data CD, thereby preventing the user US from making an operational error and improving usability.

Furthermore, in the heating and cooking system of this embodiment 1,
In the cooking device, specific input keys 153M, 152L, 152R to be operated on the input operation unit 15 are determined for each cooking menu, and when the specific input keys are operated, selection information A (202A, 202B, 202C) is transmitted to the communication terminal 200,
The communication terminal 200
(1) A first step of displaying recipe data CD relating to one selected food item on the terminal display unit 216 (step SG3 in FIG. 63 );
(2) a second step (step SG3B in FIG. 63) of determining whether the specific input key corresponding to the recipe data CD displayed in the first step is operated;
(3) a third step (step SG6 in FIG. 65 ) of displaying, on the terminal display unit 216, input keys 240 for transmitting setting information A (201) related to the recipe data CD to the cooking appliance 1 when it is determined in the second step that the specific input key has been operated;
The above steps are executed sequentially.

With this configuration, if a specific input key suitable for obtaining recipe data (cooking menu) is previously operated on the cooking appliance 1, the communication terminal 200 can confirm (determine) whether or not such a specific input key was operated, and then display the second screen 216B and guide the user to the operation for transmitting the setting information for the recipe data CD (see step SG7 in Figure 65), thereby preventing operational errors by the user US and improving usability.

Furthermore, as explained in FIG. 65, if the specific input key specified in the cooking menu notified in the advance notice information 1 has been operated before receiving the advance notice information 1 (201), the display operation of step SG4 in FIG. 63 is not performed (see FIG. 65), thereby preventing the user US facing the cooking appliance 1 from having an unnecessary misunderstanding (interpreting that the specific input key needs to be operated again).

Furthermore, in the heating and cooking system of this embodiment 1,
The communication terminal 200
(1) The first screen 216A and the second screen 216B are displayed sequentially on the terminal display unit 216;
(2) The first screen 216A displays the recipe data CD relating to the selected food (for example, step SG3 in FIG. 63).
(3) When the recipe data CD displayed on the first screen 216A is selected, the display is switched to the second screen 216B displaying the preview information 1 (201) specifying the cooking menu of the recipe data CD (step SG3A in FIG. 63 ).
(4) If the selection information A (202A, 202B, 202C) has been received before the display of the advance notice information 1, it is determined whether the specific input key (e.g., 153M) related to the selection information A matches the specific input key (e.g., 153M) corresponding to the cooking menu of the recipe data CD related to the advance notice information 1 (step SG3B in FIG. 63),
(5) When the judgment confirms that the specific input key (e.g., 153M) matches, the setting information A regarding the recipe data CD of the cooking menu displayed on the first screen 216A can be transmitted to the heating cooker 1 (see step SG7 in Figure 65).

With this configuration, if the user US previously operates a specific input key (e.g., 153M) on the cooking appliance 1 that is suitable for obtaining the selected recipe data (cooking menu), the communication terminal 200 confirms (determines) whether the user US previously operated the specific input key on the cooking appliance 1, and then displays the second screen 216B as shown in FIG. 60(B) and guides the user to the operation of sending the setting information for the recipe data CD, thereby preventing operational errors by the user US and improving usability.

Furthermore, as explained in FIG. 61, if the specific input key specified in the cooking menu notified in the advance notice information 1 is operated before receiving the advance notice information 1 (201), the cooking appliance 1 will not perform the display operation of step SG4 in FIG. 63 (see FIG. 65), thereby preventing the user US facing the cooking appliance 1 from having an unnecessary misunderstanding (interpreting that the specific input key needs to be operated again).

Furthermore, in this first embodiment, the following cooking system is disclosed.
That is, one embodiment of the heating and cooking system is as follows:
a cooking device 1 having a plurality of input operation units 15, a display unit 16, a communication function, and a plurality of heating means (HM1 to HM3);
a communication terminal 200 connected to the cooking appliance by wireless communication,
The input operation unit 15 has individual operation units 15L and 15R corresponding to only one of the heating means, and a common operation unit 15M corresponding to a plurality of the heating means,
The cooking appliance 1 has first specific input keys 152L and 152R arranged on the individual operation units 15L and 15R, and a second specific input key 153M arranged on the shared operation unit 15M,
By selecting the first specific input keys 152L and 152R, first menu information (single cooking mode of induction heating cooking) can be displayed on the display unit 16 (16L and 16R),
By selecting the second specific input key 153M, second menu information (cooperative cooking mode) can be displayed on the display unit 16 (16M),
The communication terminal 200
(1) Having a function of receiving selection information A (202A, 202B, 202C) issued from the cooking appliance 1 as a result of input operations of the first specific input keys 152L, 152R and the second specific input key 153M,
(2) displaying either the first menu information or the second menu information on the first screen 216A in response to a user input;
(3) When one cooking menu item belonging to either the first menu information or the second menu information displayed on the first screen 216A is selected (when the input key 237 is selected), the display is switched to the second screen 216B,
(4) In the second screen 216B, when the selection operation (input) of either the first specific input key or the second specific input key corresponding to the selected cooking menu has been completed, “first information” (see second screen 216B1 in FIG. 61 ) for transmitting recipe data CD corresponding to either the first menu information or the second menu information is displayed, and when the selection operation (input) of neither the first specific input key nor the second specific input key has been completed, “second information” (see advance notice information 201 in FIG. 60(B)) for requesting the selection operation of either the first specific input key or the second specific input key is displayed.
(5) When the second information (notice information 201) is displayed on the second screen 216B, determining whether the selection operation of the first specific input key or the second specific input key has been completed by waiting for reception of the selection information A (202A, 202B, 202C) from the cooking appliance (step SG6).
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

With this configuration, the recipe data CD stored in the external communication terminal 200 can be reliably acquired by the cooking appliance 1 and used for actual cooking.
Furthermore, if the user US has previously operated a specific input key (e.g., 153M) on the cooking appliance 1 that is suitable for obtaining the selected recipe data (cooking menu), the communication terminal 200 will confirm (determine) whether the user US has previously operated the specific input key on the cooking appliance 1, and then display the second screen 216B1 as shown in Figure 61 (A), which will display the "first information" for sending the recipe data CD, thereby ensuring that the user is guided to the operation of sending the setting information for the recipe data CD.
This prevents the user US from making operational mistakes and improves usability.

Furthermore, the cooking appliance 1 of embodiment 1 is configured to have, as multiple heating means, a first heating means HM1 controlled by the individual operation units 15L and 15R, and a second heating means HM2 and a third heating means HM3 controlled by the shared operation unit 15M.

This configuration allows you to select three heating means HM1 to HM3 and sequentially perform cooking in the single cooking mode KM3, combined cooking mode KM2, and linked cooking mode KM1 without interfering with each other. This makes it possible to provide a heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking methods.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 has a function of executing at least two or more cooking modes, including a single cooking mode, a combined cooking mode, and a cooperative cooking mode, by using the various heating means.
The single cooking mode is controlled by the first specific input keys 152L and 152R arranged on the individual operation unit,
The composite cooking mode KM2 is characterized in that it is controlled by the third specific input key 154M arranged on the common operation unit 15M.

This configuration allows cooking in the single cooking mode KM3, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the cooperative cooking mode KM1 to be performed sequentially without interfering with each other.
Furthermore, the third specific input key 154M arranged on the shared operation unit 15M can control the acquisition of recipe data for the composite cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM1, so the input operation unit 15 can be realized without increasing the number of input keys and switch operation buttons according to the number of cooking modes.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 1, the specific input keys 153M, 152L, 152R are provided one by one on each of the input operation units 15 (15L, 15M, 15R), regardless of the selected cooking mode KM1 to KM3, and when the specific input key is operated, unique selection information A (202A, 202B, 202C) that can identify the specific input key is transmitted to the communication terminal 200.
The communication terminal 200 holds information capable of individually identifying (distinguishing) the specific input keys 153M, 152L, 152R in a cooking appliance database 217, and determines whether the specific input key 15 (15L, 15M, 15R) corresponding to the specific recipe data CD has been operated (see FIG. 63).The communication terminal 200 is provided with a transmitting means (input key 240) for transmitting the setting information to the cooking appliance 1 when the selection information A indicating that the specific input key has been operated is acquired.
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

With this configuration, if a specific input key (e.g., 152R) to be operated has been operated in advance, the communication terminal 200 checks whether or not the specific input key on the cooking appliance 1 side has been operated in advance by the user US (see step SG6 in Figure 63), and then displays the second screen 216B1 as shown in Figure 61 (A), which displays the first information for transmitting the recipe data CD, thereby guiding the user to the operation of transmitting the setting information for the recipe data CD.
This prevents the user US from making operational mistakes and improves usability.
Furthermore, the specific input keys 153M, 152L, 152R are provided one for each of the input operation units 15 (15L, 15M, 15R) regardless of the selected heating cooking mode KM1 to KM3. Therefore, even when cooking in the combined cooking mode KM2 or the linked cooking mode KM1, which use the shared operation unit 15M, there is always one specific input key (153M) to be operated, which prevents the user from getting confused about how to operate the unit.

Furthermore, the communication terminal 200 is configured to sequentially display on the terminal side display unit 216 a first screen 216A that displays identification information of the recipe data CD, a second screen 216B that allows input operations to be performed to transmit the setting information to the heating cooker 1, and a third screen 216C that displays transmission result information of the setting information.
Therefore, the contents of the recipe data, the necessity of input operations to send the setting information, and the results of sending the setting information can be individually confirmed on each display screen (first screen to third screen), allowing the user US to accurately and easily check the situation.

Furthermore, the second screen 216B is configured to display the result of determining whether the specific input key corresponding to the recipe data CD has been operated, as shown in second screen A (216B1) of Figure 61 (A).
Therefore, the user US can accurately and easily confirm the necessity of inputting the specific input key.

Furthermore, the second screen 216B is configured to separately display a state 1 (see FIG. 60(B)) that displays a request to operate the specific input key corresponding to the recipe data CD, and a state 2 (see FIG. 61(A)) that displays that the operation of the specific input key has been completed.
Therefore, the user US can accurately and easily confirm the necessity of inputting the specific input key.

Furthermore, one form of the cooking device 1 disclosed in this first embodiment is
Furthermore, when one recipe data CD is selected using a specific input key 153M, etc., a reception restriction period TZ1 is set, and the process of acquiring recipe data CD for another cooking menu cannot be started (see Figures 47, 65, etc.).
Therefore, when it is decided to acquire specific recipe data CD and a specific input key 153M or the like is pressed, it is possible to prevent the inadvertent reception of another cooking menu (including a control menu for another cooking mode or a control menu for a single cooking mode) from an external communication terminal 200 or the like during the process of setting the cooking menu, and to stably execute the cooking menu of the received recipe data CD.

Furthermore, the cooking system disclosed in the first embodiment has the following features:
a communication terminal 200 connected to the cooking appliance 1 by wireless communication;
The input operation units 15L, 15M, 15R of the cooking device 1 include an individual operation unit 15M corresponding to only one of the heating means and common operation units 15L, 15R corresponding to a plurality of the heating means,
Furthermore, the cooking appliance 1 has first specific input keys 152L and 152R on the individual operation units 15L and 15R, and a second specific input key 153M on the shared operation unit 15M,
By selecting the first specific input keys 152L, 152R, a first cooking program (induction heating cooking program) is selected from the storage device 40, and first menu information (induction heating cooking menu) can be displayed on the display unit 15.
By selecting the second specific input key 153M, a second cooking program (for coordinated cooking, composite cooking, or induction heating) is selected from the storage device 41, and second menu information (coordinated cooking menu, composite cooking menu, or induction heating menu) can be displayed on the display unit 16.
The recipe data CD executable by the second cooking program is divided into cooking step 1 and cooking step 2 and transmitted from the communication terminal 200,
The communication terminal 200
(1) In response to an input from the user US, one cooking menu item corresponding to a specific recipe data CD is selected from the range of the first menu information and the second menu information, and displayed on the terminal display unit (first screen 216A),
(2) When the cooking menu displayed on the first screen 216A is confirmed, the second screen 216B is displayed.
(3) The second screen 216A displays selection request information indicating whether or not the first specific input key 152L, 152R or the second specific input key 153M corresponding to the recipe data CD displayed on the second screen 216B has been selected (see FIG. 60(B) ).
(4) When a transmission command is received after the selection of the first specific input key 152L, 152R or the second specific input key 153M has been completed (step SG7; see FIGS. 63 and 64), the specific recipe data CD is transmitted to the cooking appliance 1.
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

With this configuration, the recipe data CD stored in the external communication terminal 200 can be transmitted to the heating cooker 1 sequentially for each cooking step (cooking step 1, 2, etc.), ensuring that the data can be reliably acquired and used for actual cooking.
Furthermore, the notification means 90 (display unit 16) of the cooking appliance 1 can present specific input keys 152L, 152R, 153M of the input operation unit 15 that should be operated in advance in response to an operation by the user US, in accordance with the correspondence information KID corresponding to the advance notice information 1. Therefore, when advance notice information 1 is received from the communication terminal 200, the notification means 90 can notify the correct specific input key, and the user US can be correctly guided to operate the confirmation step SP3.
This prevents the user US from making operational mistakes and improves usability.

Furthermore, the cooking appliance 1 illustrated in the first embodiment can individually notify the user US of the specific input keys in the input operation unit 15 (15L, 15M, 15R) that must be operated in advance, by using the key identification unit 21 (light-emitting units 21M, 21L, 21R) of the notification means 90.
This guides the user US to operate the confirmation step SP3 (to the correct specific input key), thereby preventing the user US from making an operational mistake and improving usability.

In the first embodiment, the communications terminal 200 further adopts a configuration characterized in that, upon receiving the selection information A (202), the communications terminal 200 transmits setting information A related to the recipe data CD displayed on the first screen 216A to the cooking appliance 1, and if it determines that the setting information A has reached the cooking appliance 1 (see step SG11 in FIG. 63), it displays transmission success information 244A indicating that the transmission of the setting information A was successful on the third screen 216C (see step SG12 in FIG. 63).

With this configuration, the transmission status of the recipe data CD can also be confirmed on the communication terminal 200 side on the terminal side display unit 216 (third screen 216C).
These features make it possible to realize a heating and cooking system that improves usability for the user US.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 shown in the first embodiment employs the following configuration.
That is, the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment is
The input operation unit 15 has touch-type input keys (153M, 154M, 153L, 153R, etc.) for selecting cooking contents,
The input operation unit 15 instructs the control device 40 to start a voice input mode in response to the touch state of the input key,
After starting up the display unit 16, the control device 40 displays a standby initial screen 16MH on the display unit 16,
The control device 40 is characterized in that, when it receives a command to start the voice input mode from the input operation unit 15 while the standby initial screen 16MH is being displayed, it enables the recipe data CD to be acquired via the communication unit 51 and accepts a command to set control conditions for the recipe data CD.
Specifically, the input operation unit 15 has touch-type input keys (153M, 154M, 153L, 153R, etc.) for selecting three types (linked, combined, and single) of cooking modes or cooking menus,
The input operation unit 15 determines whether or not switching to the voice input mode (voice input mode 1) is necessary based on the touch state of the input keys, and issues a voice input mode corresponding signal MC1.
The control device 40 is configured such that, when it receives the voice input mode corresponding signal MC1, it is able to acquire the recipe data CD via the communication unit 51 and also accepts a command to set control conditions from the user US.

With this configuration, the timing for externally acquiring various recipe data CD can be controlled using the input keys (153M, 153L, 153R, etc.) on the input operation unit 15. Furthermore, the touch-type input keys (153M, etc.) on the input operation unit 15 for selecting the heating cooking mode, control mode, cooking menu, etc. can also be used to switch to voice input mode, allowing voice input to be used instead of the tedious input process before starting the heating operation. This improves operability and reduces the workload for the user US. Furthermore, there is no need to increase the number of input keys, which is advantageous in terms of cost and operability.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 shown in the first embodiment has
The control device 40 has a cooperative cooking mode KM1 in which the first heating means HM1 and the second heating means HM2 are driven with a time lag to perform one cooking operation,
When the control device 40 receives a command 1 (see step SB1 in FIG. 28) for selecting a cooking menu of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 from the input operation unit 15, if the permission conditions (see FIG. 29) are satisfied, the control device 40 displays a first specific screen 16M1 for executing the cooperative cooking mode KM1 on the display unit 16,
The control device 40 is configured to display, on the display unit 16, information on at least one of the amounts of food ingredients or nutritional ingredients for a specific dish (see Figure 24) that can be cooked in the collaborative cooking mode KM1 when command 2 is received from the input operation unit 15 (input keys 158M, 159M or audio signal receiving unit 56) while the first specific screen 16M1 is being displayed (see Figures 17 and 18).

That is, if the user US issues a command to display either the food ingredients or the nutritional ingredients by voice input at the stage shown in Figures 20 to 23, or if the input key 158M or 159M is touched while the operational support information 170 is being displayed (see Figure 20), the first specific screen 16M1 temporarily switches to the display screens shown in Figures 24(A) and 24(B), and can display the food ingredient display screen 16M1A and the nutritional ingredient display screen 16M1B.

With this configuration, when selecting a specific cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger steak") in the collaborative cooking mode KM1, the user can easily obtain information about the ingredients and nutrients of the food related to that cooking menu. This improves the convenience of the cooking menu selection operation for the user US.

For example, users US can select appropriate cooking menus based on information on food ingredient and nutritional content, depending on their family's health management, dietary restrictions, etc., which can contribute to improving their eating habits.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 shown in the first embodiment has
The display switches between identification information 167 of one cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger steak"), a dedicated food ingredient display screen 16M1A showing food ingredients, and a dedicated nutritional ingredient display screen 16M1B showing nutritional ingredients, so the user US can easily and clearly identify each piece of information.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 disclosed in the first embodiment,
The control device 40 enables the data acquisition unit 53 to acquire the recipe data CD during the initial standby period TP,
When the control device 40 receives a command 1 to select the cooperative cooking menu KM3 from either the voice input means or the touch input means, and if the permission conditions are met, it displays a specific cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger steak") of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 on the display unit 16 as a first specific screen 16M1,
When the control device 40 receives command 2 from either the voice input means or the touch input means while the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, it displays information on at least one of food ingredients or nutrients related to the cooking menu (food ingredient display screen 16M1A or nutritional ingredient display screen 16M1B),
The control device 40 acquires the recipe data CD (the first part M1 of the cooking process 1) when the voice input means and the touch input means are operated within a first limited period TX,
The input operation unit 15 determines whether or not switching to a voice input mode (voice input mode 1) is necessary based on the touch state of the input keys, and issues a voice input mode corresponding signal MC1.
When the control device 40 receives the voice input mode corresponding signal MC1 from the input operation unit 15 during the display period of the first specific screen 16M1, the control device 40 enables acquisition of the recipe data CD (the first part M1 of the cooking process 1) via the communication unit 51, and also receives a command to set control conditions by voice from the user US via the voice signal receiving unit 56.
The configuration was characterized by the following.

This configuration allows the user US to easily obtain information about the ingredients and nutrients of each food item when selecting a specific cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger steak") using the cooperative cooking mode KM1. This improves the convenience of the cooking menu selection operation for the user US. For example, the user US can select an appropriate cooking menu based on information about food ingredients and nutritional components depending on the family's health management, dietary restrictions, etc., which can contribute to improving their eating habits.

Furthermore, since the recipe data CD relating to the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is received by a special operation of the user US, the timing of data acquisition from outside is controlled.
In other words, the recipe data CD can be acquired when the conditions for operation of the voice input means and the touch input means within the first limited period TX are met (see FIG. 38 in particular), so that the recipe data CD will not be received inadvertently due to the communication terminal device 200 coming too close, etc. This can improve the sense of security of the user US.

Furthermore, in the cooking appliance 1 according to the first disclosure, the specific input keys (input keys 153M, 154M) of the input operation unit 15 are also used as the selection unit for the voice input mode 1.
This configuration makes it possible to avoid increasing the number of operation keys (operation units) on the input operation unit 15 and to prevent a decrease in operability, since the user US can easily switch to voice input mode 1. Note that, in the right operation unit 15R and the left operation unit 15L, the input keys 153R and 153L that can select voice input mode 1 may be set as specific input keys.

Furthermore, in the cooking appliance 1 according to the first disclosure, the first specific screen 16M1 is not displayed unless the prerequisites for starting the cooperative cooking mode KM1 (permission conditions 1 and 2) are met. Therefore, after the user US sets (selects) various conditions for the cooperative cooking mode KM1 (for example, heat level, target temperature, heating time, etc.), it is not determined that permission condition 1 or permission condition 2 is not met, and the screen is not forced to return to the initial standby screen 16MH. This prevents the user US from being forced to perform unnecessary input operations.

Furthermore, the determination of permission conditions 1 and 2 is performed at the first cooking step 1 of recipe data CD, so it is possible to eliminate the acceptance of cooking in an inappropriate state at the initial stage when a cooking menu is selected. This prevents subsequent unnecessary input operations by the user US.

Furthermore, in the cooking appliance 1 according to the first disclosure, the input operation unit 15 is provided with a selection key 180 for selecting the voice input mode 2 using the voice input means.
Therefore, even if the user US has his/her hands full during cooking and cannot perform touch operations, he/she can conveniently give instructions by voice.

Furthermore, in the cooking appliance 1 according to the first disclosure, the acquisition condition for acquiring recipe data CD from outside is met when the input key 180 and one input key of the touch input unit (e.g., specific input key 153M) are operated within the first time limit (TX).

In other words, the initial waiting period TP cannot exceed the first limit period (first time limit TX). For example, it can be up to 30 minutes.

As a result, even if the user US interrupts operation of the input operation unit 15 for some reason, the cooking appliance 1 automatically disables input (by forcibly opening the main power switch 20). This prevents cooking control data and the like from being acquired from an external source without the user US's knowledge, improving safety.

The input operation unit 15 is equipped with an input key 180 as a selection unit for voice input mode 2 and an input key (e.g., input key 158M) for commanding the display of information on the food composition data DD, providing good operability for the user US.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 11 of embodiment 1, in a configuration in which the input keys 180 and the input key (e.g., input key 158M) that commands the display of information on food composition data DD are located on the central operation unit M, and the central display unit 16M is also located nearby, when the user US is standing in front of (near) the central operation unit 15M to cook, the necessary display and operation units are within the range of operation and visibility of the user US, allowing the user US to perform operations without moving from their standing position. This is expected to have benefits such as reducing the physical burden on the user US while cooking.

Furthermore, in the cooking appliance 1 according to the first disclosure, if the input key 180 is not operated and one specific input key (153M) of the input operation unit 15 is not operated within a first time limit (TX), the control device 40 is configured to perform at least one of the following actions: cut off the supply of main power or instruct the alarm unit 90 to issue an alarm (see automatic shut-off process 1 in step SL11 of Figure 38).

That is, as explained in FIG. 39, the time elapsed from the determination step (SS10) of whether the input key 180 or the specific input key 153M that can switch to voice input mode 1 has been operated is limited to, for example, 30 minutes. Alternatively, the time elapsed from the first step SS5 in which the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed is limited to 30 minutes.

For this reason, if the user US forgets to perform an input operation or is unable to perform an input operation for some reason, the control device 40 will forcibly open the main power switch 20 or issue an alarm from a safety perspective, thereby improving safety.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure, the input operation unit 15 has a function setting key 151KP,
When the function setting key 151KP is operated, the control device 40 shifts to a function setting mode,
The function setting mode is configured to enable setting of whether or not the food ingredients or nutritional ingredients are to be displayed in the central display section 16M, and the conditions under which they are to be displayed.
This configuration allows the functions to be set according to the user US's wishes, level of proficiency, etc.

Furthermore, in this embodiment 1,
The heating cooker 1 is characterized in that the restriction unit 55 restricts the acquisition of new recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 (sets a reception restriction period TZ1) until the cooking process of the cooking menu to which the acquired recipe data CD is applied is started or until the cooking process is completed.

This configuration allows the two heating means to be selected and cooking in the single cooking mode KM3, combined cooking mode KM2, and linked cooking mode KM1 to be performed sequentially without interfering with each other. This makes it possible to provide a heating cooker that can handle a wide range of cooking methods.

Furthermore, thanks to the restriction unit 55, once recipe data for one specific linked cooking menu A is acquired, the control device 40 will not inadvertently acquire recipe data CD for another linked cooking menu B immediately before the start of a cooking process or during a cooking process. Therefore, for example, there is no risk of accidentally receiving another cooking menu (including a control menu for combined cooking mode or a control menu for single cooking mode) during linked cooking. Therefore, there is no risk of confusion for the user US or interference with the operation of the cooking appliance 1 due to reception.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment,
The input operation unit 15 is disclosed to have a configuration in which input keys 153L and 153R for selecting the single cooking mode KM3, input keys 154M and 155M for selecting the combined cooking mode KM2, and an input key 153M for selecting the linked cooking mode KM1 are separately provided.

This configuration allows the three cooking modes to be selected individually using each input key (input means), improving operability for the user US even in cookers 1 with an increased number of heat sources.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 of the first embodiment,
the restriction unit 55 restricts acquisition of new recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 until the cooking process of the cooking menu to which the acquired recipe data CD is applied is completed;
After the recipe data is acquired, if the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is canceled by the input operation unit 15 before the cooking process is started, the data acquisition unit 53 can acquire the recipe data CD again.

This prevents the inadvertent reception of another cooking menu (including the control menu for the combined cooking mode or the control menu for the single cooking mode) during coordinated cooking, and allows the cooking menu of the received recipe data CD to be executed stably.

Furthermore, it is possible to prevent problems with the operation of the control device 40 and to prevent misunderstandings or confusion among the user US caused by inadvertently receiving recipe data CD for a different cooking menu during the cooking process.

Furthermore, when the collaborative cooking mode KM1 is canceled, recipe data CD that was previously acquired but not used for cooking can be canceled, and the desired recipe data CD can be acquired, thereby avoiding confusion on the part of the user US when acquiring or canceling recipe data CD.

Furthermore, in the cooking device 1 disclosed in the first embodiment,
After the main power is turned on by the input operation unit 15, the control device 40
(1) The display unit 16 displays the standby initial screen (common screen) 16MH,
(2) When the touch-type input keys 153M and 154M for selecting either the cooperative cooking mode KM1 or the composite cooking mode KM2 are operated, the restriction unit 55 restricts the acquisition and use of the recipe data CD acquired from the communication unit 51,
(3) When the input keys 153M and 154M are operated, the display of the initial screen (common screen) 16MH is automatically changed to the display of the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2.
(4) With the first specific screen 16M1 or the second specific screen 16M2 displayed, the process moves to an initial standby period TP in which a cooking start command is received from the input operation unit 15,
(5) During the initial standby period TP, in the case of the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the acquisition of the recipe data CD from the communication unit 51 is limited to two times, that is, the first portion M1 and the second portion M2.
(6) When a specific input key (154M) among the input keys 153M and 154M is touched, a voice input mode corresponding signal MC1 is received from the input operation unit 15 in accordance with the touch state, and the mode shifts to the “voice input mode of control conditions” for executing the recipe data CD.

According to this configuration, once the standby initial screen (common screen) 16MH is displayed, it can be easily understood that by operating the selection input keys 153M and 154M thereafter, the first specific screen 16M1 and the second specific screen 16M2 dedicated to the linked cooking mode and the combined cooking mode can be displayed, and recipe data can be acquired from outside.
You can also use some of the input keys to switch to voice input mode.
This makes it possible to avoid confusion and misunderstandings in the input operations of the user US from immediately after the main power is turned on until cooking begins, and it is expected that usability will be improved by utilizing voice input and touch input.

Furthermore, when the cooking appliance 1 of embodiment 1 completes the input process for one cooking cycle and starts cooking, it automatically cancels the voice input mode and returns to the default touch input mode. This means that when starting input for the next cooking cycle, there is no need to touch input keys just to cancel the voice input mode, making it easy to use.

In addition to the above, the cooking device 1 disclosed in the first embodiment has the following characteristic configuration.
(1) At least one input key for selecting "Voice Input Mode 1" (long press operation) is provided for each heating cooking menu. That is, a total of four input keys are provided corresponding to three types of menus: the linked cooking menu, the "RG menu group" in FIG. 18 (excluding the "IH menu group" in FIG. 12), and the control menu group for the induction heating single cooking mode KM3.
That is, for selecting the voice input mode 1, a total of four input keys 153M (for the linked cooking mode), 154M, 153L, and 153R are provided.
That is, the three input operation units 15L, 15M, and 15R are provided with input keys for selecting at least one voice input mode 1, so that the voice input mode 1 can be selected at each of the three input operation units located at different locations, which is convenient.

(2) The control menu group for the induction heating single cooking mode KM3 can be executed by heating cooking at the heating port 4R using the right operation unit 15R and by heating cooking at the left heating port 4L using the left operation unit 15L. Therefore, input keys 153L and 153R are provided corresponding to the left and right operation units 15L and 15R, respectively, which can select “voice input mode 1” (which can be operated by “long press”).
Therefore, when manually setting induction heating cooking using the left and right operation units 15L and 15R, the voice input mode 1 can be selected using each of these operation units, providing good operability.

(3) Although there are three input operation units, when an input key (e.g., 154M) that can select "Voice Input Mode 1" on one input operation unit (e.g., central operation unit 15M) is pressed on that operation unit, the input process on the other input operation units (in this case, left and right operation units 15L and 15R) cannot be started, and therefore Voice Input Mode 1 cannot be selected. However, in the above case, if cooking is being performed on the other input operation units (in this case, left and right operation units 15L and 15R), it is possible to operate the input keys on those input operation units by "touch input." Therefore, changing the heat level or stopping heating during cooking can be performed without any restrictions.

In other words, when one input key (e.g., 154M) is pressed to set "voice input mode" on one of the multiple input operation units, the input process for "starting a new cooking session" cannot be started on the other input operation units. On input operation units that are already performing cooking, input operations other than voice input mode are possible. Therefore, cooking that is currently being performed can be controlled (e.g., stopping heating, changing heat, etc.) by operations (touching, pressing) other than voice input.

This unique configuration prevents simultaneous voice input from one input operation unit and another. This means that when cooking in two locations at the same time, or when cooking in one location and attempting to start another cooking operation, there is no interference between input commands, ensuring reliable input operations and a high level of safety.

Embodiment 2.
Figures 67 to 77 show a cooking device and a cooking system according to embodiment 2. Note that parts that are the same as or equivalent to the configuration of embodiment 1 described in Figures 1 to 66 are given the same reference numerals.

In this embodiment 2, the configuration of the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 is different from that of embodiment 1. The configuration of the cloud server 300 is also changed.
Furthermore, in this second embodiment, only one specific input key 151KP, 152L, 152R is selected for each of the three input operation units 15L, 15M, 15R, and the input key 151KP in particular is significantly different from the first embodiment in that it does not have the function of selecting a cooking menu or cooking mode.

In this second embodiment as well, when recipe data (including the "display condition data") is acquired from an external communication terminal 200 or the like, the restriction unit 55 restricts some of the input and display functions of the cooking appliance 1. To this end, the data acquisition unit 53 issues various control commands in response to the operation of acquiring recipe data from the communication terminal 200 or cloud server 300 via the communication unit 51. Note that in this second embodiment as well, the control device 40 acquires the recipe data CD in two stages: a first part M1 that sets cooking process 1 using one or more of the heating means, and a second part M2 that sets cooking process 2 using another of the heating means.

Referring to Figure 67.
A refrigerator 331 and a cooking appliance 1 are installed inside the kitchen 601, and the refrigerator 331 and the cooking appliance 1 can exchange information with the wireless router 340 via wireless communication.

The wireless router 340 also serves as an access point to a network NW such as the Internet, and can access the first server 321 in an external space.
In this embodiment 2, the cloud server 300 described in embodiment 1 includes a first server 321, a second server 322, a recipe data providing server 301, and a food ingredient information server 326 described later.

The cooking appliance 1 can acquire at least recipe data CD via wireless communication 330BT or 330WF with the communication terminal 200. This recipe data CD includes not only cooking control data for executing the cooking menu of the linked cooking mode KM1, but also cooking control data for the combined cooking mode KM2, etc.

In this second embodiment, the communication terminal 200 can also communicate directly wirelessly with the wireless router 340. The basic configuration of this communication terminal 200 is the same as the communication terminal 200 described in the first embodiment.

As described in embodiment 1 (FIG. 55), communication terminal 200 has notification data 223 and remote control data 224. In embodiment 2, notification of this notification data 223 and remote control data 224 may be obtained by connecting to first server 321, which is an information providing means, via network NW and downloading the data from first server 321.

The cooking appliance database 217 also stores food ingredient and nutrient component data 226, which is obtained via the second server 322 from a food ingredient information server 326 that provides various types of food ingredient information. The symbol DD represents food ingredient information (ingredient data) that includes both food ingredient and nutrient component data.

The food composition information server 326 may, for example, use data from the "Standard Tables of Food Composition in Japan" published publicly by the Ministry of Education, Culture, Sports, Science and Technology.

The communication terminal 200 can transmit recipe data CD and remote control information RS, such as commands to perform cooking operations, to the cooking appliance 1.

The communication terminal 200 has a voice input unit 222 (see FIG. 55) that converts voice from the user US into a predetermined voice input signal VS.
Therefore, when the user US speaks into this communication terminal 200, a voice input signal (voice data) VS can be transmitted to the second server 322. In other words, necessary input operations can be performed without touching the touch operation unit 215 (see FIG. 55).

When the cooking appliance 1 is activated, the user US can provide speech information to the communication terminal 200 by voice, for example, to extract the desired recipe data CD from the recipe data providing server 301 and provide it to the cooking appliance 1 via the communication terminal 200.

For example, since the recipient of the voice input signal VS is the second server 322, the speech information may include, for example, "XXX (an example of a name or nickname that identifies the second server 322), looking for a recipe for collaborative cooking."
The speech information "XXXX, looking for a recipe" is one type of external command information that can be applied to the cooking appliance 1.

Furthermore, the spoken information "XXXX, looking for a recipe for collaborative cooking" is information that specifies the cooking mode for the cooking appliance 1.

Furthermore, the speech information "Looking for recipes that can be made with both microwave and induction" is speech information that extracts cooking menus that are possible in the collaborative cooking mode KM1.

This speech information can be converted into pre-prepared standard commands on the second server 322.

The speech information sent by the user US to the communication terminal 200 is converted into text data in the communication terminal 200 and transmitted to the second server 322 in the form of text data (voice input signal VS) of the speech information.

The control unit 322C of the second server 322 receives text data (voice input signal VS) via the input/output unit 322A and determines whether it can be converted into a standard command stored in the memory unit 322R.

The control unit 322C converts the text data of the speech information (voice input signal VS) into various commands (also referred to as "command data") prepared as standard commands. The "commands" here include instructions to extract recipe data for performing one cooking step from the recipe database stored in the recipe data providing server 301. The input/output unit 322A is, for example, an API gateway.

The first server 321 and the second server 322 are connected by a network NW such as the Internet.
An inquiry signal (inquiry data) SN is transmitted from the input/output unit 322A of the second server 322 to the first server 321. This inquiry signal SN is, for example, a command requesting that the recipe data CD be extracted from the recipe data providing server 301. It is also a command signal generated by an input operation on the communication terminal 200 when a user wishes to know various data on the operating status of the cooking appliance 1 (for example, the content and progress of the cooking process). In other words, these data are operation support data GS for the user US.

In addition, since the second server 322 does not require special control or processing specific to the cooking appliance 1, it is possible to use existing servers, such as servers for various systems such as AI assistants, intelligent assistants, and smart speakers.

The first server 321 shown in Figure 67 is operated by the company (manufacturer) that produced the cooking appliance 1, and has a thorough understanding of the special controls and processes unique to the cooking appliance 1 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "cooker control information"), making it possible to accurately grasp the operating status of the cooking appliance 1 (including both heating and non-heating operations). The memory unit 321R stores data corresponding to the "cooker control information." Therefore, if the first server 321 acquires the operating status data OS, which will be described later, the first server 321 can accurately analyze the actual operating status of the cooking appliance 1.

The first server 321 is configured to acquire various "operating status data" OS from the cooking appliance 1 as described below via the wireless router 340 at any time.

The operating status data OS includes data indicating the ON/OFF status of the main power switch 20, selection data for the combined cooking mode KM1, control condition data such as heating temperature and heating time, and the latest temperature measurement data for the top plate 3 and heating chamber 6.

The recipe data providing server 301 is capable of wirelessly communicating with the first server 321. The "system control server" that serves as the control means for linking the recipe data providing server 301, the first server 321, etc. is not shown. Of the individual recipe data CDs prepared on the recipe data providing server 301, those related to the linked cooking mode KM1 are prepared for each of multiple cooking steps, but when provided to the communication terminal 200, all of the multiple cooking steps are provided to the communication terminal 200 together.

The recipe data providing server 301 may be incorporated into the first server 321. The food ingredient information server 326 is connected to the first server 321 via a wired or wireless communication network NW.

The first server 321 is configured so that each individual cooking appliance 1 is pre-registered, and the operating status data OS transmitted from each cooking appliance 1 is acquired in association with the user US of that cooking appliance 1.

The first server 321 has an input/output unit 321A for individually communicating wirelessly with the wireless router 340 and the second server 322. This input/output unit 321A is, for example, an API gateway. This input/output unit 321 receives recipe data from the recipe data providing server 301.

The first server 321 has a control unit 321C. The control unit 321C decodes an inquiry signal (command) SN from the second server 321, generates necessary control information in response to the inquiry signal SN, and transmits it to the second server 322.
Furthermore, the first server 321 analyzes the operating status data OS transmitted from the multiple cookers 1 and the user identification information of each cooker 1. In other words, the cooker 1 of each user US can be identified from information in the database of user identification information held in the memory unit 321R.

The first server 321 stores a database of pre-registered control information for each individual cooker 1 in the memory unit 321R. Therefore, if the data requested by a cooker 1 does not match that cooker 1, the data is not transmitted.

Similarly, even if the first server 321 receives an inquiry signal SN from the communication terminal 200, it will send specific operation support data GS to the communication terminal 200 via the second server, along with data such as the model identification number. Therefore, for example, if the communication terminal 200 inputs control conditions that are incompatible with specific recipe data CD, the first server 321 will not accept such input or will notify the communication terminal 200 of the reason for not accepting it. Therefore, in the voice input mode, if the control conditions input (spoken) by the user via the communication terminal 200 exceed the range allowed by the cooking appliance 1, the communication terminal 200 will be notified and asked to input different control conditions.

Furthermore, the first server 321 also has the function of controlling the timing of providing the recipe data CD for a specific cooking menu obtained from the recipe data providing server 301 to the second server 322. This will be explained in more detail later.

In this second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, an input key 180 for selecting voice input is arranged in the central operation section 15M of the input operation unit 15. This input key 180 may be a mechanical switch, or it may be a touch-type input switch input key like input keys 153M to 159M.

Next, we will explain Figure 68.
FIG. 68 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the cooking appliance 1, and corresponds to FIG. 10 of the first embodiment.
As is clear from Fig. 68, the control device 40 of this embodiment 2 does not have a configuration equivalent to the audio signal analysis unit 58 shown in Fig. 10 of embodiment 1. In other words, this control device 40 does not have the function of receiving an audio signal from the outside and analyzing it.

Furthermore, the control device 40 of this embodiment 2 does not have a configuration equivalent to the audio signal receiving unit 56 shown in Figure 10 of embodiment 1. In other words, the input operation unit 15 of this embodiment 2 does not have the function of receiving audio signals from the outside. The other configuration is the same as that shown in Figure 10 of embodiment 1, so duplicate explanations will be omitted.

Next, we will explain Figure 69.
Figure 69 is a block diagram illustrating the relationship between the control device 40 and the central operation unit 15M. This Figure 69 corresponds to Figure 11 of embodiment 1. The right operation unit 15R and the left operation unit 15L also have basically the same configuration as the central operation unit 15M.

As is clear from Fig. 69, the control device 40 has an input signal analysis section 52. This input signal analysis section 52 has an input mode determination section 52C.
The input mode determination unit 52C receives the measurement time data MJ from the input operation unit 15 (15M, 15L, 15R), and determines that the operation is "voice input mode 1" if the measurement time data MJ is 5 seconds or more, with a predetermined threshold value (for example, 5 seconds) as the boundary. If the measurement time data MJ is less than this threshold value, the operation is determined to be a normal "short press."

The "measurement time data MJ" input from the input operation unit 15 to the control device 40 corresponds to a voice input mode corresponding signal.

Meanwhile, each of the input operation units 15L, 15M, and 15L including the central operation unit 15M is provided with a time measurement unit 15T. The measured time data MJ measured by the time measurement unit 15T is transmitted as is to the input signal analysis unit 52 of the control device 40.
That is, the time measurement unit 15T measures the “touch time” from when the user US touches the screen with their finger until when they release it, and transmits the measured time data MJ to the input signal analysis unit 52.

The input mode determination unit 52C analyzes the measured time data MJ (voice input mode corresponding signal) and, if it determines that the setting conditions for "voice input mode 1" are met, outputs an input mode switching signal MC2 to the input control unit 70. For example, if the measured time data MJ is time data with a length equal to or greater than a threshold value (e.g., 5 seconds), it determines that the setting conditions for voice input mode 1 are met and outputs the input mode switching signal MC2.

15D is a memory unit. This memory unit 15D stores various control parameters for the touch detection unit 15A and time measurement unit 15T, as described above, as well as program information for the judgment process.

Reference numeral 15E denotes a central processing unit (CPU) that performs various information processing operations as an input operation unit (central operation unit 15M).
An input signal transmitting unit 15F transmits the above-mentioned unique identification signal of the input key, the measurement time data MJ of the "touch time", etc. to the input signal analyzing unit 52 of the control device 40.

In Figure 69, the touch detection unit 15A, time measurement unit 15T, memory unit 15D, etc. are depicted as individual, independent blocks, but rather than being configured as separate hardware, each of these functions may be realized, for example, by software on a single microcomputer.

In Figure 69, the input mode determination unit 52C is depicted as part of the input signal analysis unit 52, but it may also be configured separately in hardware. Furthermore, for example, the functions of the input mode determination unit 52C, input signal analysis unit 52, etc. may be realized by software on a single microcomputer.

Although Figure 69 illustrates the central operation unit 15M as an example, the control device 40 also identifies inputs from the right operation unit 15R and left operation unit 15L as being from each operation unit. Therefore, the input key identification unit 15A in the right operation unit 15R includes data identifying the input key as being present on the right operation unit 15R in the signal from the input key and transmits this data to the control device 40. The same is true for the left operation unit 15L.

Upon receiving the input mode switching signal MC2, the input processing unit 70 enters an input standby state in preparation for any input related to the recipe data CD from the first server 321.

In Figure 69, the touch detection unit 15A, time measurement unit 15T, etc. are depicted as individual, independent blocks, but rather than being configured as separate hardware, each of these functions may be realized, for example, by software on a single microcomputer.

In this second embodiment, mutual authentication has been performed between the communication terminal 200 and the cooking appliance 1. Therefore, when the cooking appliance 1 is started up, if the cooking appliance 1 transmits a signal for automatic connection (also called a "scan signal"), mutual communication for automatic connection will be performed between the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal 200. Note that the scan signal may also be transmitted from the communication terminal 200.

Once a connection is established between the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal device 200, the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal device 200 will continue to be able to communicate directly and wirelessly with each other. If the communication terminal device 200 moves with the user US and becomes distant from the cooking appliance 1, communication may be temporarily disabled, but the connection will be automatically restored once the communication range (distance) is restored.

During the period from the time the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed until the specific input key 151KP is pressed (for example, to select the linked cooking mode KM1), acquisition of recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200 is basically prohibited. Recipe data CD cannot be acquired. (However, recipe data CD for cooking menus performed using the left and right operation units 15L and 15R can be acquired by operating the specific input keys 152L and 152R.)

Furthermore, during the period from when the main power switch 20 is turned ON until the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed, no recipe data CD can be obtained from the communication terminal 200.

When the cooking appliance 1 receives recipe data CD, it temporarily stores the recipe data in a specified storage area (or dedicated buffer memory) of the recipe data storage unit 42. In other words, the first part M1 specifying cooking step 1 and the second part M2 specifying cooking step 2 are linked to the identification information of one cooking menu (processed so that they can be identified in a one-to-one relationship) and stored in the form of one recipe data. Reception of the notification data 223 and remote control data 224 described above is also permitted, and these are linked to the recipe data CD of a cooking menu (for example, "Ratatouille") and temporarily stored in the storage unit 42.

Next, FIG. 70 will be described.
FIG. 70 is a plan view of the central display unit, central operation unit, left and right operation units, and central heating status display unit of the cooking appliance 1 in the second embodiment.
One of the features of this second embodiment is the display unit 16. As shown in Fig. 70, the display unit 16 is made up of three parts: a left display unit 16L, a central display unit 16M, and a right display unit 16R.

The three display units 16L, 16M, and 16R have the same display functions, effective display screen area, and planar shape. In other words, the functions of the central display unit 16M shown in embodiment 1 are also provided by the left display unit 16L and the right display unit 16R in embodiment 2. The initial standby screen 16MH displayed at startup immediately after main power is applied to the cooking appliance 1 is not only displayed on the central display unit 16M, but similar content is also displayed simultaneously on the right display unit 16R and the left display unit 16L.

First specific screens 16M1, 16L1, and 16R1 are displayed at appropriate timing on the central display section 16M, the left display section 16L, and the right display section 16R.
Similarly, the second specific screens 16M2, 16L2, and 16R2 and the third specific screens 16M3, 16L3, and 16R3 are also displayed at appropriate times, respectively, although as will be described below, the central display section 16M has a partial priority in terms of display timing.

The central display section 16M displays information about the cooperative cooking mode KM1, which combines the first heating means HM1 to the third heating means HM3, and also displays information about the independent cooking mode KM3 and cooking in the composite control mode.
The left display section 16L displays information related to the left heating port 4L and the left operation section 15L.
The right display section 16R displays information relating to the right heating port 4R and the right operation section 15R. Note that Fig. 70 does not show the input key 180 for selecting the voice input mode, which is common to all input operation sections.

The integrated display unit 30, left display unit 31L, and right display unit 31R display various information in the collaborative cooking mode. That is, the first specific screen 16M1 is displayed, and relevant information is displayed when operating in the collaborative control mode.

The cooking modes for the cooking appliance 1 shown in Figure 70 can be broadly divided into two: one that selects the range grill-related "combined cooking mode/single cooking mode," and one that selects the "linked cooking mode."

As shown in FIG. 70, the central operation unit 15M, like in embodiment 1, has a collection of various input keys that are shared among four cooking modes: the microwave heating source (microwave oscillator) 11 single cooking mode KM3, the radiant heat heating means 12 single cooking mode KM3, the combined cooking mode KM2, and the cooperative cooking mode KM1.

The second feature of this second embodiment is the input key 151KP. The input key 151KP shown in FIG. 70 is the input key for the function setting mode described in the first embodiment, but it is also a specific input key that can transmit a signal (selection signal A) to which the user US responds when it receives preview information 1 (or preview information 2) (201) from recipe data CD. Note that this input key 151KP can select the function setting mode only when it is "pressed and held." Furthermore, input keys 153M and 154M do not have the function of a specific input key.

Next, we will explain Figure 71.
FIG. 71 is an enlarged plan view of the central display unit 16M, central operation unit 15M, and central heating status display unit 17M of the cooking appliance 1.
One of the features of this second embodiment is that the input key 151KP is the (only) "specific input key" on the central operation unit 15M. The touch operation surface of this input key 151KP has the function description "prepare for reception" written on the top surface of the central operation unit 15M.
The input key 153M located to the right of the input key 151KP can select the cooperative cooking mode KM1, similar to the input key 153 in embodiment 1. However, as explained in Fig. 70, the input key 153M does not have the function of a specific input key.

Furthermore, the two input keys 155M and 154M to the right are used to select the composite cooking mode KM1. The functions of these three input keys 153M, 154M, and 155M are the same as those described in embodiment 1, and include the ability to select cooking menus and control menus by touch operation.

As explained in embodiment 1, the function of input keys 153M, 154M, and 155M is to select "voice input mode" by performing a "long press" operation. Therefore, as shown in Figure 71 (on the top surface of central operation unit 15M), the function description "voice input" is displayed.

FIG. 71 shows the display contents of the central display unit 16M in the middle of obtaining recipe data CD for a cooking menu using the central operation unit 15M from the communication terminal 200.
Reference numeral 174 denotes a receiving operation display section, which in this scene indicates that the device is on standby to receive recipe data CD from the outside.

Here, "standby" refers to a state in which the operation of receiving recipe data CD has not yet actually started, i.e., the operation of receiving neither the first part M1 defining cooking step 1 nor the second part M2 defining cooking step 2 has yet been started.
Reference numeral 175 denotes operation support information, which in this scene displays text instructing the user US to press the input key 151KP, guides the user US in the operation to acquire recipe data, and supports the progress of the operation.

Figure 71 shows the stage when selecting one of the cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode KM1 described in embodiment 1, where advance notice information 1 (201) has already been received and a response is required to touch a specific input key (in this case, 151KP). If the selected cooking menu is "hamburger," which is one of the cooking menus in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, then it is not the specific input key 151KP that will be illuminated (including blinking) by the light-emitting element 21L or 21R corresponding to either the specific input key 152L or 152R on the left or right operation unit 15L, 15R. Figure 71 shows an example in which the light-emitting element 21M on the central operation unit 15M is illuminated.

In this second embodiment, as mentioned above, at least the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed not only on the central display unit 16M but also simultaneously on the left and right display units 16L and 16R. Figure 71 shows the case of "Hamburger," but unlike in the first embodiment, the standby initial screen 16MH in Figure 71 is displayed simultaneously on the central display unit 16M and the left and right display units 16L and 16R.

Next, we will explain Figure 72.
FIG. 72 shows an example of a specific display screen that displays that recipe data for "hamburger steak," one of the cooking menu items cooked in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, is being received from the communication terminal 200.
Fig. 72 shows the case of "hamburger steak", but unlike the first embodiment, the receiving operation display screen 16MM of Fig. 72(B) is simultaneously displayed on the central display unit 16M and the left and right display units 16L and 16R. This is because, for example, input of the preheating temperature on the right operation unit 15R is required in the preheating process of this "hamburger steak".

Figure 72 (A) is a schematic diagram showing an enlarged view of the reception operation display screen 16MM. The initial standby screen 16MH switches to the reception operation display screen 16MM, which indicates that an external recipe is being received, as shown in Figure 72 (A).

In Figure 72(A), 16F denotes multiple progress marks that appear on the receiving operation display screen 16MM according to the progress of the receiving operation. These progress marks 16F come in two types: black triangles and white triangles. In Figure 72(A), 174 denotes the receiving operation display section, which displays text indicating that recipe data CD is currently being received from an external device. Note that in Figure 72(A), the receiving operation display section 174 does not display whether the first portion M1 defining cooking step 1 or the second portion M2 defining cooking step 2 is currently being received. However, appropriate display information such as "Cooking step 1" or "First step" may be added. Additionally, identification information 167 of the cooking menu (in this case, "hamburger steak") may also be displayed.

The receiving operation display screen 16MM is displayed by switching from the standby initial screen 16MH immediately after, for example, pressing one specific input key to transmit selection information A. In this second embodiment, as described above, recipe data CD is received for "hamburger" as the cooking menu for linked cooking mode KM1, so, for example, specific input key 152R on the right operation unit 15R is touched before acquiring the data for cooking step 1.

As shown in Figure 72 (A), immediately after the start of the recipe data CD reception operation, there is one black triangular progress mark 16F, but as the reception operation progresses, the number gradually increases, and eventually there are five black triangular progress marks 16F lined up. Note that as the number of black triangular progress marks 16F increases, the same number of white rectangular progress marks 16F disappear.

The progress mark 16F may display the degree of progress by changing the size or color of a single graphic, or may be expressed by animation.
FIG. 72(B) is a schematic diagram showing the first specific screen 16M1 immediately after the recipe data CD has been received.
As shown in FIG. 72(B), auxiliary information 179 is displayed in the large area formed by combining the second area 23 and the third area 24.
Three types of auxiliary information 179 are displayed.
One is reception information 179F indicating that recipe data CD for "hamburger steak" in which cooking step 1 is performed using the right heating port 4R has been received.
The second is reference information 179E that recommends input of control conditions and includes examples (standard values) of control conditions that can be input.
The third is voice input mode display information 179D, which indicates that voice input is being accepted. If the voice input mode is not selected, this voice input mode display information 179D is not displayed. The voice input mode can be selected by pressing the input keys 153M, 154M, etc. after the external recipe identification section 173 is displayed. Alternatively, when advance notice information 1 (201) is received and one of the specific input keys 152L, 152R of the left and right operation units 15L, 15R is the specific input key to be operated, the voice input mode can also be selected by "pressing and holding" one of the specific input keys 152L, 152R.

As shown in Figure 72 (B), the received information 179F does not indicate whether the first part M1 specifying cooking step 1 or the second part M2 specifying cooking step 2 was received, but such information specifying the cooking step may also be displayed.

As explained in the first embodiment, in the second embodiment as well, the external recipe identification unit 173 makes it easy to see that the cooking menu currently displayed on the first specific screen 16M1 is based on recipe data CD acquired from an external source. In the linked cooking mode KM1, the external recipe identification unit 173 may also display the cooking step number or cooking step name (for example, "first half step" or "first half recipe").

In the example of Figure 72 (B), the reference information 179E on the first specific screens 16M1 and 16R1 indicates that the standard temperature for initially preheating a hamburger steak is 180°C. This preheating temperature setting can be changed by the user US through voice input (e.g., by saying "Preheat 190°C"). Note that this reference information 179E is displayed on the first specific screens 16M1 and 16R1 of the central display section 16M and the right display section 16R corresponding to the selected right heating port 4R.

If the recipe data CD is determined to be "not permitted processing" based on the determination of the permission conditions, the reception operation display section 174 changes to a not permitted display 174F indicating that the reception operation has failed, as shown in FIG. 71(C).
72(B) shows that the recipe data CD was not permitted because the peak cut power setting value, which is one of the permitted conditions, was less than 5000 W. Therefore, a remedy is displayed and the user US is prompted to change the setting using the function setting key 151KP.

As shown in Figure 72 (B), the information of the recipe data CD stored in the recipe data storage unit 42 is displayed in the first specific screen 16M1 (when cooking hamburger steak in the collaborative cooking mode KM1).

Instead of the receiving operation display screen 16MM shown in Figure 72 (A), multiple light-emitting elements (LEDs) may be provided, as in the left heating power display unit 17L of embodiment 1, and the progress of the receiving operation may be displayed in multiple stages by the light emitted by the LEDs. For example, at the beginning of the receiving operation, only one LED may be lit, and the number of lit LEDs may increase as the receiving operation progresses. Alternatively, progress may be expressed by flashing the LEDs or by changing the color of the light. This may provide an intuitive and easy-to-understand notification to the user US that the receiving operation has been completed.

Next, we will explain Figure 73.
73 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the central operation unit 15M and the central display unit 16M in the recipe data reception process. This diagram is a modified example of the display form in FIG.
Figure 73 shows the process of receiving recipe data CD from the communication terminal 200. The display design of the receiving operation display screen 16MM is unified for all cooking modes, including the combined cooking mode KM2, as shown in Figure 73(A). In other words, a wide display area is secured by combining the first area 22 to the third area 24.

Immediately after starting to receive recipe data CD from the outside, the standby initial screen 16MH is switched to a receiving operation display screen 16MM, which indicates that the receiving operation is in progress, as shown in FIG. 73(A).
Reference numeral 174 denotes a reception operation display unit, which displays in text the fact that recipe data CD is currently being received from an external device. The display information of the reception operation display unit 174 may also include the name of the cooking mode, the name of the control menu, and the identification information 160, 167. In FIG. 73, "microwave heating" is displayed, and it can be confirmed at this stage that cooking is being performed using the heating chamber 6. In the case of the linked cooking mode KM1, the reception operation display unit 174 may also display whether the first portion M1 defining cooking step 1 or the second portion M2 defining cooking step 2 is currently being received. For example, appropriate display information such as "cooking step 1" or "first step" may be added.

Figure 73 (A) shows an example of the reception operation display screen 16MM on the central display unit 16M, but if operation is required using specific input keys 152L, 152R on the right operation unit 15R and left operation unit 15L, similar reception operation display screens 16ML, 16MR will be displayed on the left and right display units 16L, 16R (not shown in Figure 73).

If the recipe data CD is determined to be "not permitted processing" based on the judgment of the permission conditions (such as permission condition 1), as shown in FIG. 73 (B), the reception operation display unit 174 changes to display non-reception information (not permitted information) 174F indicating that the reception operation failed.
174A is reception support information. In FIG. 73(B), the reason for the denial of the recipe data CD was that the peak cut power setting, one of the permission conditions, was less than 5000 W. Therefore, a remedy is displayed, and it is recommended that the user US change the setting of the peak cut function of the cooking appliance 1 using the function setting key 151KP. In the case of the linked cooking mode KM1, when the data of the first portion M1 defining the cooking process 1 is received, the permission conditions 1 and 2 are determined. If permission is not granted, the user cannot proceed to acquire the second portion M2 of the cooking process 2.

Note that Figure 73 illustrates an example in which "Permission Condition 1" is used as the criterion for determining "non-permission processing" for the cooking appliance 1, but this is for the control menu (microwave heating "warm") of the combined cooking mode KM2 that uses the heating chamber 6. Other conditions may also be added to the criteria for "Permission Condition 1."

Next, we will explain Figure 74.
FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram 1 showing the display contents on the terminal display unit 216 of the communication terminal 200 used in the heat cooking system of the second embodiment.
Figure 74 (A) is an explanatory diagram of the first screen 216A, which displays identification information (such as the name of the cooking method) related to one cooking menu selected by the user US, and information such as the heating means to be used.

As explained in detail in Figures 59 and 60(A) of the first embodiment, the first screen 216A displays various information for one cooking menu (food), such as cooking time, quantity (for two people, four people, etc.), ingredients, preparation, and cooking method (such as the name of the cooking mode selected on the cooking appliance 1 and the input operation section).

When the user US touches the confirmation key (icon) 237 for the cooking menu on the first screen 216A, the communication terminal 200 receives the input from the touch operation and sends advance notice information 1 (201) to the cooking appliance 1.

The second screen 216B, which begins to be displayed after the advance notice information 1 (201) is sent, includes information requesting a decision on whether or not to send recipe data CD relating to the selected cooking menu to the cooking appliance 1. In the example of Figure 74, the central operation unit 15M is used in cooking step 1, so after receiving the advance notice information 1 (201), the user US must operate the specific input key 151KP on the central operation unit 15M.

In Figure 74(A), reference numeral 236 denotes cooking process information indicating one type of heat source as part of the "recipe" mentioned above. In the example of Figure 74(A), it can be seen that cooking is being performed in the "range grill" control mode (of the combined cooking mode KM2). "Range grill" cooking involves cooking using both the microwave oscillator 11 and the radiant heat heating means 12, and is a type of automatic cooking. Note that because this is combined cooking mode KM2, there are no (multiple) cooking processes that change the cooking location by moving the food being cooked. In other words, since there is only one cooking process, the cooking process information 236 is only displayed in one place.

Reference numeral 237 denotes a confirmation key (icon) for the cooking menu displayed on this first screen 216 A. When this key is touched, communication terminal 200 receives the input from the touch operation and switches the display content from first screen 216 A to second screen 216 B.
Reference numeral 234 denotes a character display section that indicates the type of display information (one of the display menus) of the first screen 216A. In Fig. 74(A), "Heating Chamber Menu" is displayed to indicate that the heating chamber 6 is used for cooking.

Next, FIG. 74(B) will be described.
When the user US touches the confirmation key (icon) 237 for the cooking menu on the first screen 216A in Figure 74 (A), the central processing unit (CPU) 212 receives the input from the touch operation and switches to displaying the second screen 216B shown in Figure 74 (B).

In the second screen 216B, 239 is a character display section that indicates the type of information displayed on the second screen 216B. In Fig. 74(B), "Preparing to send heating chamber settings" is displayed to indicate that the setting information for the heating chamber 6 is being prepared for transmission.
Reference numeral 240 denotes an input key (icon) for issuing a command to send, and when this key is pressed, the recipe data CD of the cooking menu selected in FIG.

The second screen 216B shown in Fig. 74(B) displays the preparation work on the cooking appliance 1 side for the user US. Specifically, it indicates that the central operation unit 15M to be used in cooking step 1 should be operated, and recommends pressing the "preparation button on the central operation unit." This "preparation button" refers to the input key 151KP shown in Fig. 71.
At this point, the cooking appliance 1 has already received the advance notice A (201) and illuminates the light emitting unit 21M of the central operation unit 15M in preparation for the user's operation of pressing the input key 151KP. The illumination of the light emitting unit 21M is an operation support operation corresponding to step SG13 described in FIG. 64 of the first embodiment.

When the input key 151KP is pressed, in response to this action, the cooking appliance 1 transmits to the communication terminal 200 "selection information A (confirmation information A)" 202 indicating that a specific heating section (in this case, the heating chamber 6) has been selected.
Therefore, when the input key 240 on the second screen 216B displayed in Figure 74 (B) is pressed, the recipe data CD for one cooking menu selected in Figure 74 (A) is sent to the heating cooker 1.

Next, we will explain Figure 75.
FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example of the display content on the terminal display unit 216 shown in FIG.
In the second screen 216B shown in Fig. 75, 201 is the advance notice information 1 (201) (related to cooking step 1). Part of this advance notice information 1 (201) has already been transmitted to the cooking appliance 1 as advance notice information 1 (201) on the first screen 216A before the second screen 216B is displayed. In other words, the cooking appliance 1 has acquired both or either of the information that the central operation unit 15M and the heating chamber 6 will be used. Therefore, the cooking appliance 1 starts flashing the light emitting unit 21M corresponding to the corresponding input key 151KP.

As shown in FIG. 75, the advance notice information 1 (201) includes information requesting that the central operation unit 15M used in this recipe (cooking) be operated before the recipe data CD is transmitted.
74(B), the input operation unit 15 to be operated is displayed as the central operation unit 15M. Furthermore, in the actual central operation unit 15M, the light emitting units 21M corresponding to the input keys 151KP are blinking, and in the central operation unit 15M, the other light emitting units 21M are neither blinking nor continuously emitting light.
Therefore, as in the advance notice information 1 (201) in Fig. 75, it is possible to clearly indicate that the input key that the user US should operate is only the input key 151KP by highlighting it on the cooking appliance 1 side with light, thereby making it possible to more reliably identify the input key 151KP compared to the example in Fig. 74(B), and it is expected that the user US will perform an input operation reliably.

Next, we will explain Figure 76.
FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram 2 showing another example of the display content on the terminal display unit 216 shown in FIG.
If the communication terminal 200 has already received a signal indicating that the specific input key to be operated is being operated before the input key 237 shown in Figure 74 (A) is pressed, the second screen 216B shown in Figure 76 is displayed.
The second screen 216B in Fig. 76 informs the user that the specific input key (on the cooking appliance 1) that should be operated to acquire the recipe data CD has already been operated. This indicates that there is no need to operate the specific input key again on the cooking appliance 1. If it is OK to send the recipe data CD as is, the second screen 216B displays a message to press the send input key 240.

The second screen 216B of FIG. 76 is displayed when the specific input key (e.g., 151KP) operated in the "key identification step SP2A" matches the "specific input key" (e.g., 151KP) (corresponding to a specific cooking menu) when the confirmation key (icon) 237 is touched on the first screen 216A of FIG. 74(A), as explained in FIG. 65 of the first embodiment.
Operation information of the specific input key in the key identification step SP2A is transmitted from the cooking appliance 1 to the communication terminal 200 at the time of operation. That is, the communication terminal 200 has acquired the operation information of the specific input key in the key identification step SP2A in advance. Therefore, the central processing unit 212 determines that the specific input key (on the cooking appliance 1 side) that should be operated to acquire the recipe data CD has already been operated, and causes the second screen 216B of Fig. 76 to be displayed.

Next, we will explain Figure 77.
77(A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams 3 showing the display contents on the terminal display unit 216 of the communication terminal 200 used in the cooking system.
In the third screen 216C shown in Fig. 77(A), 239 is a character display section that indicates the type of information displayed on the third screen 216C. In Fig. 77(A), "Heating chamber transmission result" is displayed to indicate the status after the setting information for heating chamber 6 has been transmitted.
FIG. 77(A) is a display screen of the transmission result, which is a dedicated screen that is always displayed after the recipe data CD is transmitted.

There are two types of screens for displaying the transmission results. The first screen is the screen shown in Fig. 77(A). This is the stage at which the final result transmitted from the cooking appliance 1 has not yet been received, and simply displays the contents transmitted from the communication terminal 200, particularly the cooking menu and main control conditions (heating time, microwave output value).
The second screen is the screen shown in Fig. 77(B). This is the stage at which the communication terminal 200 determines whether the transmission of the recipe data CD was successful or not after receiving the transmission result (determination result) from the cooking appliance 1. Information indicating the success or failure of the transmission is displayed.

In Figure 77 (A), 525 is a transmission information display section, which displays a list of the name (identification information) of the transmitted cooking menu and two types of control conditions (set temperature and microwave output value) as shown in the figure. The transmission action "Transmitted" is also displayed at the same time. 332 is a menu screen display section (icon) for selecting to return to the initial menu display screen. In the case of cooperative cooking mode KM1, the transmission information display section 525 may also display the number and name of the cooking process ("first half process", "second half process", etc.).

333 is a storage command input key (icon) that stores the transmitted cooking menu in the communication terminal 200 or the first server 321, allowing for easy retrieval when searching for a cooking menu at a later date. Pressing this key causes the "transmitted" cooking menu shown in Figure 77(A) to be stored together with setting information such as control conditions in the communication terminal 200 or the first server 321. For example, recipe data older than this may be stored sequentially in the communication terminal 200's memory unit 220 (see Figure 55) for 30 days in order of transmission date and time. Older recipe data may be stored sequentially by user US or device identification information in the memory unit 321R of the first server 321 (see Figure 66). In the case of recipe data CD for cooperative cooking mode KM1, the first part M1 specifying cooking step 1 and the second part M2 specifying cooking step 2 are linked to the identification information of a single cooking menu and saved as a single piece of recipe data.

Next, FIG. 77(B) will be described.
Reference numeral 507A denotes an auxiliary information display section A. In the example of Fig. 77(B), the reason for the "non-permission process" from the cooking appliance 1 is simply explained in text.
Reference numeral 507B denotes auxiliary information display section B displayed near auxiliary information display section 507A. Figure 77(B) shows an example in which the cooking appliance 1 has received status information indicating that the heating chamber 6 is in a high temperature state and has performed a disallowance process for the recipe data CD. As a countermeasure to this disallowance process, it is recommended that the door 7 of the heating chamber (grill chamber) 6 be opened. This countermeasure will lower the temperature of the heating chamber 6, so it is expected that no error will occur when the recipe data CD is sent again.

In Figure 77 (B), 541 is a voice input mode display unit that indicates that the communication terminal 200 is set to voice input mode. When this voice input mode display unit 541 is displayed, the user US can input using their voice by speaking directly into the voice input unit 222.

In Figure 77 (B), 542 is reference information extracted by the central processing unit 212 of the communication terminal 200 by referring to the information in the cooker database 217 in accordance with the content of the "non-permission process" from the cooker 1, and is a type of operation support data GS (see Figure 67).

When the cooking appliance 1 notifies the user of the "non-permission process," the cooking appliance 1 may transmit a unique error code (such as a simple number) to the communication terminal 200, and the central processing unit 212 of the communication terminal 200 may compare the error code with the error codes in the cooking appliance database 217 and display the reference information 542.

In the example of Figure 77 (B), it is shown that heating is possible using "Manual Heating," which allows the user to individually specify the heating time, rather than the "Auto Microwave" control menu, which detects the temperature of the food being cooked and automatically stops heating. In other words, it is recommended that the user US set "time" as a control condition. Note that when heating manually, the heating time (control condition) can be determined by inputting the specific cooking name from the communication terminal 200 to the first server 321 and obtaining reference information regarding the time from the first server 321.

In Figure 77 (B), 543 is an error notification section (error display section) that indicates that a "non-permission process" notification has been received from the cooking appliance 1. Note that this error notification section is displayed in both cases where an error occurs due to the actual state of the cooking appliance 1 (temperature, peak cut conditions, etc.), as in the case of "permission condition 1" described above, and in cases where there is poor communication with the network NW or wireless communication 330BT.

In the above explanation, the communication terminal 200, such as a smartphone, performs wireless communication 330BT using Bluetooth (registered trademark) with the cooking appliance 1. As an alternative method, since the cooking appliance 1 has an NFC input/output unit 221 (see Figure 55) for short-range wireless communication, the communication terminal 200 may be brought into direct proximity with or in direct contact with the NFC input/output unit (not shown) on the cooking appliance 1 for input.

Summary of embodiment 2.
As is clear from the above description, in this second embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the fifth disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one form of the cooking device 1 according to the fifth disclosure exemplified in the second embodiment is as follows:
a first heating means HM1 and a second heating means HM2;
Individual operation units 15L and 15R dedicated to one of the heating means,
a common operation unit 15M for the first heating means and the second heating means;
a communication unit 51 for wireless communication with the outside;
Notification means 90;
a control device (40) that executes cooking using the recipe data (CD) acquired via the communication unit (51);
The individual operation unit has first specific input keys 152L and 152R,
The common operation unit 15M has a second specific input key 151KP,
The control device 40
(1) a notification step SP2 in which one of the first specific input keys or the second specific input keys is specified and notified by the notification means 90;
(2) a confirmation step SP3 in which, when the specific input key (152L, 152R, 151KP) specified by the notification means 90 is operated, selection information (202A, 202B, 202D) specific to the specific input key is transmitted;
Execute the following in sequence.
The control device 40 has a function of acquiring recipe data CD necessary for executing one cooking menu in two stages: a first part M1 for setting a cooking process 1 using the first heating means, and a second part M2 for setting a cooking process 2 using the second heating means;
the control device 40 transmits the selection information (202A, 202B, 202D) in response to operation of the specific input key (152L, 152R, 151KP) specified in the notification step SP2;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

With this configuration, the cooking appliance 1 can reliably acquire the external recipe data CD and use it for actual cooking.
In other words, when the user US operates a specific input key on the cooking appliance 1 that is suitable for obtaining recipe data (cooking menu) for the selected cooperative cooking mode KM1, the cooking appliance 1 performs a confirmation operation (for example, whether the specific input key 151KP has been operated) before proceeding to obtain the recipe data CD, thereby preventing the user US from making an operating error and improving usability.
Furthermore, in embodiment 1, the recipe data CD for the linked cooking mode KM1, which has multiple cooking steps, can be reliably obtained for each cooking step through multiple steps, namely, receiving the advance notice information 1 (201) and the confirmation operation (sending selection information A) and receiving the advance notice information 2 (201) and the confirmation operation (sending selection information B). Therefore, it is expected that the operability of the heating cooker 1, which can handle a wide range of cooking using multiple cooking steps, can be improved.

Furthermore, the cooking device 1 exemplified in this second embodiment has:
The cooking device includes a plurality of input keys (154M, 155M, etc.), a plurality of specific input keys 152L, 152R, 151KP, a notification means 90, a communication unit 51, and a control device 40 that controls heating means HM1 to HM3 using recipe data CD obtained from an external source to perform cooking,
The control device 40
(1) When acquiring the recipe data CD for the cooperative cooking mode in which a cooking step 1 using one of the heating means and a cooking step 2 using a plurality of the heating means are performed, the cooking step 1 and the cooking step 2 are acquired separately.
(1) a notification step SP2B of notifying the specific input keys 152L, 152R, and 151KP when advance notice information 1 (201) corresponding to the cooking process 1 is received;
(2) a confirmation step SP3 in which, after the notification step SP2B, it is determined whether the specific input keys 152L, 152R, 151KP have been operated, and if it is determined that the specific input keys have been operated, confirmation information A (201) is transmitted;
(3) When the confirmation information A (202) is transmitted, information regarding the receipt of the recipe data CD is displayed on the display unit 16 of the notification means 90 (progress marks 16F, 174, see FIG. 73 ).
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

With this configuration, the recipe data CD stored in the external communication terminal 200 can be reliably acquired by the cooking appliance 1 for each cooking step and used in actual cooking.
Furthermore, the notification means 90 (display unit 16) of the cooking appliance 1 notifies the user US of a specific confirmation input key (e.g., 151KP) that must be operated in advance in response to the operation of the user US by using advance notice information 1 (201) from the communication terminal 200, and guides the user US to operate the confirmation process SP3, thereby preventing the user US from making operational mistakes and improving usability.

Furthermore, one form of the cooking device 1 according to this second disclosure is configured to transmit the confirmation information A (202) in the confirmation step SP3, and then proceed to a receiving step SP4 to prepare for receiving the recipe data CD.
Therefore, as explained in the second embodiment, by pressing the specific input key (151KP) for confirmation, the user can proceed directly to the receiving process of the recipe data CD, which is convenient for the user US.

Furthermore, in this second embodiment, the following cooking device 1 is disclosed.
That is, one form of the heating cooker 1 according to the second embodiment is as follows:
the notification means 90 includes a key identification unit 21 (light-emitting units 21M, 21L, 21R) for identifying the second specific input key 151KP and the first specific input keys 152L, 152R, respectively, and a condition display unit 16 (liquid crystal display units 16M, 16L, 16R) for displaying control conditions for cooking according to the recipe data CD,
The control device 40
(1) After the communication establishment step SP1, a notification step SP2B is performed in which the first specific input key 152L to be used (in the cooking step 1) is identified by illuminating (continuously lighting, blinking, etc.) the key identification unit 21 in accordance with the advance notice information 1 (202) acquired from the communication unit 51; and
(2) a confirmation step SP3 of transmitting selection information A (202) after the input key (151KP) specified by the key specifying unit 21 is operated;
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

With this configuration, the recipe data CD stored in the external communication terminal 200 can be reliably acquired by the cooking appliance 1 and used for actual cooking.
Furthermore, the notification means 90 (display unit 16) of the cooking appliance 1 can notify the second specific input key 151KP that should be operated in advance in response to the operation of the user US by the notification unit 90 (light emitting operation of the light emitting unit 21M of the key identification unit 21) using advance notice information 1 (201) from the communication terminal 200. Therefore, the user US can be guided to correctly perform input operations on the shared operation unit 15M during operation, thereby preventing operation errors by the user US and improving usability.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, similarly to the cooking appliance 1 according to the first disclosure, after the main power switch 20 is turned on, during the initial standby period TP,
(1) Provide common information to the user US during standby.
(2) After the voice input mode is selected, recipe data CD relating to the cooperative cooking mode KM1 (including recipe data for the control menus of the combined cooking mode KM2 and the single cooking mode KM3) can be received.
By controlling the timing of receiving recipe data CD from the outside in this way, recipe data CD for another cooking menu will not be received inadvertently while selecting a cooking mode or setting control conditions.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the input key 151KP for setting the function also serves as the second specific input key. In other words, it also serves to obtain recipe data CD for cooking using the central operation unit 15M, which avoids increasing the number of operation keys (operation units) on the input operation unit 15 and prevents a decrease in operability for the user US.

In this embodiment 2, similar to the heating cooker 1 of embodiment 1, the restriction unit 55 is configured to restrict the acquisition of new recipe data CD until the cooking process of the acquired recipe data CD is completed.
That is, when one recipe data CD is selected with the second specific input key 151KP, a reception restriction period TZ1 is set, and the process of acquiring recipe data CD for another cooking menu cannot be started.

This prevents the inadvertent reception of another cooking menu (including the control menu for the combined cooking mode or the control menu for the single cooking mode) during coordinated cooking, and allows the cooking menu of the received recipe data CD to be executed stably.

Furthermore, it is possible to prevent problems with the operation of the control device 40 and to prevent misunderstandings or confusion on the part of the user US, which may occur if recipe data CD for a different cooking menu is inadvertently received during the cooking process. This improves usability for the user US.

Furthermore, in this second embodiment, if the operation to acquire the recipe data is initiated while the standby initial screen 16MH is displayed, the display automatically switches to the reception operation display screen 16MM, as described in Figures 72 and 73.

Furthermore, multiple progress marks 16F are displayed on the reception operation display screen 16MM according to the progress of the reception operation, so the user US can easily understand that the operation to obtain recipe data CD is in progress, which has the effect of preventing unnecessary misunderstandings and operational errors.

In addition to, or instead of, displaying the progress mark 16F, the audio notification unit 51 may provide an audio notification. Furthermore, the progress marks are not limited to those that change shape or number over time as shown in Figures 72 and 73; for example, they may also be in a form in which the display color changes.

In addition to the above, in this second embodiment, the same practical effects as those of the first embodiment can be obtained for the same components as those of the first embodiment.

Embodiment 3.
FIG. 78 is a time chart showing the operation between the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal 200 used in the cooking system of embodiment 3 in a chronological order. FIG. 79 is an enlarged plan view showing the operating states of the central display unit 16M, central operation unit 15M, and central heating status display unit 17 of the cooking appliance 1 shown in FIG. 78. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking appliance 1 shown in FIG. 78. FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) 200 shown in FIG. 78. FIG. 82 is a time chart showing the operation of the cooking appliance 1 shown in FIG. 78 in a chronological order. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking appliance 1 shown in FIG. 78 in a chronological order. Note that parts that are the same as or equivalent to the configurations of embodiments 1 and 2 described in FIGS. 1 to 77 are designated by the same reference numerals.

Referring to Figure 78.
78, steps SF1 to SF2 show the operation of the communication terminal 200. Steps SF3 to SF9 show the operation of the cooking appliance 1.
The memory unit 220 of the communication terminal 200 or the heating cooker database 217 stores identification information 167 corresponding to a cooking menu (e.g., "hamburger") and corresponding information KID that identifies a "specific input key" corresponding to each cooking menu.
In addition, in the case of the linked cooking mode KM1 having multiple cooking steps, the recipe data CD of the multiple cooking steps that make up one cooking menu is stored together with the identification information of each cooking step (for example, the unique number of the cooking step).
Therefore, based on the advance notice information 1 (201), the terminal display unit (terminal display screen) 216 displays the cooking menu identification information and a first screen 216A showing the image display unit 235. Note that this correspondence information KID is not necessarily required, because the specific input key that needs to be operated can be identified from the cooking menu identification information in the data held by the cooking appliance 1 without transmitting this correspondence information KID.

When the confirmation key (icon) 237 (see 237A in Figure 60 (A)) for the cooking menu is pressed on the communication terminal 200, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 transmits to the cooking appliance 400 the preview information 1 (201) that it has obtained and generated from the memory unit 220 or the cooking appliance database 217 (step SF2). In other words, it transmits the data of the first part M1 indicating the contents of cooking process 1. Note that Figure 78 shows that the information stored in the memory unit 220 or the cooking appliance database 217 includes the identification information for the cooking menu, the corresponding information KID for the specific input key, and the identification information for the cooking process.

The operation of the cooking appliance 1 begins at the next step SF3.
Step SF3 is the stage at which advance notice information 1 (201) is received via the communication unit 51.
Step SF4 is a step for determining the advance notice information 1 (201) in order to perform processing equivalent to the above-mentioned "key identification step SP2A" (see FIG. 63).
In this determination step SF4, the identification information corresponding to the cooking menu (for example, "hamburger") and the correspondence information KID that identifies the specific input key corresponding to that cooking menu are compared with the data in the database stored in the storage device 41. As a result, it is determined that the information included in the transmitted notice information 1 (201) is correct based on the information held by the cooking appliance 1, and the process proceeds to step SF5. The cooking appliance 1 stores the acquired notice information 1 in the storage device 41 in order to store it in association with the subsequent reception of recipe data CD.
Also, whether or not the specific input key to be operated has been operated is checked against the operation history information stored in the storage device 41 .

Step SF5 is a processing step for performing a process equivalent to part of the "notification step SP2B" (see Figure 63). In response to the determination result of step SF4, step SF5 generates information identifying the specific input key (e.g., 153M) and displays it on the display unit 16 (e.g., central display unit 16M). For example, as shown in Figure 78, the operation support information 175 indicates in text that it is the specific input key 153M. The light-emitting unit 21M also flashes to indicate this.

The next step SF6 is a processing step for carrying out a process corresponding to part of the above-mentioned "notification step SP2B" (see FIG. 63).
Step SF6 is the stage where the user US presses a specific input key (e.g., 153M) displayed in step SF5. This operation is detected by the input operation unit 15. For example, when the input key 153M is operated on the central operation unit 15M, as described in the first embodiment ( FIG. 11 ), the input key identification unit 15A and the input signal analysis unit 52 determine that an input signal corresponding to the input key 153M has been provided to the control device 40 (input processing unit 70) (step SF7).

As described above, when the correct specific input key (for example, 153M) that should be input is operated, the limiting section 55 generates a signal for setting the reception limit period TZ1 for the recipe data CD.
As described in the first embodiment, the restriction unit 55 has a function of restricting acquisition of recipe data CD. The restriction unit 55 has a function of restricting acquisition of preview information (201) of another cooking menu from the point in time when the data acquisition unit 53 acquires the preview information 1 (201) (of cooking process 1) via the communication unit 51 and operates a specific input key (e.g., 153M) as a response signal during the standby period before starting cooking in various cooking modes (including the linked cooking mode KM1) (i.e., before “cooking process 1”).

In other words, if a specific input key is operated in step SF6, any subsequent transmission of another notification information (201) will not be treated as a normal signal. However, if, for example, input key (cancel) 152M on central operation unit 15M is pressed on the cooking appliance 1 immediately after step SF6, steps SF3 through SF7 are all canceled, and new notification information 1 (201) can then be transmitted from communication terminal 200. Furthermore, once the (final) cooking step of one cooking menu is completed, notification information 1 (201) for new recipe data CD can be obtained from the communication unit 51. As another variation, notification information 1 (201) for new recipe data CD can be obtained from the communication unit 51 once the (first) cooking step 1 of a cooking menu is started.

In the next step SF8, if a specific input key (for example, 153M) is operated in step SF6, the display unit 16 corresponding to the input operation unit 15 having the specific input key displays that the operation of the specific input key has been accepted. For example, as shown in Fig. 79, the operation support information 175A displays in text that the operation of the specific input key 153M has been accepted.
In the next step SF9, the selection information A (202) of the specific input key is transmitted to the communication terminal 200. This step corresponds to the above-mentioned "confirmation step SP3" (see FIG. 63).
As shown in FIG. 78, counting the elapsed time of the time limit TX starts from the stage of step SF4, which will be explained in FIG.

Next, we will explain Figure 79.
FIG. 79 is an enlarged plan view showing the operating states of the central display unit 16M, central operation unit 15M, and central heating status display unit 17M of the cooking appliance 1 shown in FIG.
79 shows an example in which the specific input key is 153M. The fact that the specific input key 153M needs to be operated is displayed on the central display section 16M corresponding to the central operation section 15M.
FIG. 79 shows the stage before the start of cooking process 1 in the cooperative cooking mode KM1.
Immediately after receiving the advance notice information 1 (201), the necessity of operating a specific input key is displayed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78, operation support information 175 is displayed in text, such as "Please press the flashing reception key." Note that the audio notification unit 50 may also be used to notify the user by voice.

In synchronization with the display of the operation support information 175, as shown in FIG. 79, the light-emitting unit 21M corresponding to the specific input key 153M flashes, highlighting the presence of the specific input key 153M with light.

Thereafter, when the user US presses the specific input key 153M, the central display unit 15M starts displaying operation support information 175A such as "RECEIVE COMMAND ACCEPT" in white letters. In addition to or instead of such a display, the audio notification unit 50 may start notifying the user.
These displays and audio notifications allow the user US to visually confirm after the fact that the operation of transmitting the selected information 202 by operating the specific input key 153M has been reliably performed.

Next, FIG. 80 will be described.
FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking appliance 1 shown in FIG.
FIG. 80 corresponds to FIG. 38 of the first embodiment, but differs from FIG. 38 in that it includes a step for determining whether or not a specific input key has been operated, and this difference will be mainly described below.
Step SL20 is the stage at which advance notice information 1 (201) is received during connection with the outside (communication terminal 200). That is, this is the stage at which advance notice information 1 (201) announcing the provision of recipe data CD for a specific cooking is transmitted from the communication terminal 200 that has been registered and set in advance. Judgment is then started on the content of advance notice information 1 (201), as described in step SF4 of Fig. 78.
The control device 40 starts measuring the elapsed time from this point.

In the next step SL21, it is determined whether or not the user US has operated a specific input key (for example, 153M). If the specific input key has been operated, the result of step SL21 becomes "Yes" and the process proceeds to step SL22.
In step SL22, it is determined whether the target recipe data CD has been received from the communication terminal 200. If the target recipe data CD has been received, the answer in step SL22 is "Yes", and the step of obtaining the recipe data CD is completed.

If a specific input key (e.g., 153M) is not operated in step SL21, the process proceeds to step SL23. In step SL23, a determination is made as to whether a preset time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SL21. However, if the time limit TX has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SL24. Step SL24 is "automatic shutdown process 3," which automatically shuts down the main power supply, similar to step SM6 described in embodiment 1 (Figure 33). The time limit TX in step SL23 is, for example, 10 minutes.

Also, if recipe data CD is not received in step SL22, the process proceeds to step SL23. In step SL23, as described above, it is determined whether the time limit TX has been exceeded. If the time limit TX has not been exceeded, the process returns to step SL21. However, if the time limit TX has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step SL24. In other words, "automatic shut-off process 3" is performed, which automatically shuts off the main power. Note that the time limit TX in step SL23 is, for example, 10 minutes, as described above, but if step SL23 is reached via step SL22, a time other than the time limit (10 minutes) may be set.

Next, we will explain Figure 81.
FIG. 81 is an explanatory diagram showing the display operation of the communication terminal (information processing terminal) 200 shown in FIG.
Since this FIG. 81 corresponds to FIG. 60 of the first embodiment, the following description will focus on the differences from FIG.
81(A) shows a state in which the user US has already found and displayed recipe information for one desired cooking menu. 234 is a character display section indicating the type of information displayed on the first screen 216A. 237 is a confirmation key (icon) for selecting one cooking menu displayed on the first screen 216A.

When the user US touches the confirmation key (icon) 237 (237A) for the cooking menu on this first screen 216A, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 of the communication terminal 200 receives the input from the touch operation and switches the display from the first screen 216A to the second screen 216D as shown in Figure 81 (B) without transmitting the advance notice information 1 (201).

The second screen 216D of the third embodiment is a pop-up screen that is automatically displayed immediately after the confirmation key (icon) 237 of the cooking menu is touched, and appears so as to overlap the first screen 216A.
The display area of this pop-up screen 216D is slightly smaller than that of the first screen 216A, but is displayed so as to cover the image display section 235 and cooking process information 236 shown in FIG. 81(A).

Next, FIG. 81(B) will be described.
In Fig. 81(B), 242 is an image diagram (schematic diagram) that clearly shows the appearance of the cooking appliance 1. As shown in Fig. 81(B), heating port marks (figures) 242L, 242C, and 242R indicating the three heating ports 4L, 4C, and 4R are displayed. Also, a heating chamber mark (figure) 242G indicating the heating chamber 6 is displayed.

Of the heating port marks (shapes) 242L, 242C, and 242R, the heating port marks (shapes) 242L and 242R corresponding to the left heating port 4L and right heating port 4R are displayed in a reddish color, unlike the heating port mark (shape) 242C for the center heating port 4C. The reason for highlighting only the two heating port 4L and 4R in this way is to allow the user US to intuitively understand that either of the two heating port 4L and 4R can be used in future cooking (using recipe data CD).

243L is a left selection mark (icon) that, when touched by the user US, sends a signal to select the left heating port 4L. When this is touched, advance notice information 1 (201) sent from the communication terminal 200 includes information that the left heating port 4L will be used (selected). In other words, advance notice information 1 (201) includes corresponding information KID indicating that input key 152L of the left operation unit 15L is the "specific input key" to be operated, and can be provided to the cooking appliance 1. Note that, when setting information B for cooking process 2 is obtained by touching 243L, advance notice information 2 is sent.

243R is a right selection mark (icon) that sends a signal to select the right heating port 4R. When this is touched, advance notice information 1 (201) sent from communication terminal 200 includes information indicating that the right heating port 4R will be used (selected). In other words, advance notice information 1 (201) includes information (corresponding information KID) indicating that input key 152R of right operation unit 15R is the "specific input key" to be operated, and can be provided to cooking appliance 1.

Even if the communication terminal 200 does not (cannot) immediately transmit the corresponding information KID, the cooking menu identification information and cooking process identification information are transmitted together, and the communication terminal 200 may generate advance notice information 1 (or advance notice information 2) by adding data indicating "left/right identification information" indicating right heating port 4R or left heating port 4L to the identification information. For example, in response to touching the left selection mark (icon) 243L, the central processing unit 212 or remote control information generation unit 219 of the communication terminal 200 may generate advance notice information 1 (or advance notice information 2) based on the cooking menu identification information and the "left/right identification information."

Since only one of the left selection mark (icon) 243L and the right selection mark (icon) 243R can be selected, if the left selection mark (icon) 243L is touched first in the state shown in Figure 81 (B), the left heating port 4L will be selected. However, if the right selection mark (icon) 243R is touched immediately after this, the selection of the left heating port 4L will be canceled and the right heating port 4R will be selected. The same rule applies even if the order is reversed, with only the most recent selection operation being valid and recognized by the central processing unit 212. Data indicating the results of the selection operation of the left and right heating port 4L, 4R is also stored in the memory unit 220 or the cooking appliance database 217.

246 is an operation guidance display unit, and in Figure 81 (B), the text "Please select one" and the words "left" and "right" are displayed adjacent to the left and right selection marks 243L and 243R. If the left and right selection marks 243L and 243R are operated, the pop-up screen 216D automatically disappears after a few seconds (called the "grace time"), and the user returns to the original first screen 216A or proceeds to the second screen 216B. However, if the pop-up screen 216D does not automatically appear and disappear like the one shown in Figure 81 (B), an input key (icon) 247 for clearing the screen may be provided. Note that the left selection mark 243L and the right selection mark 243R may be touched multiple times during the grace time, and information about the last touched mark is transmitted from the communication terminal 200 as a confirmation signal when the grace time has elapsed.

As is clear from the above explanation, if there are multiple heating elements, i.e., multiple heating nozzles 4L and 4R, that can be used for a specific cooking menu, selecting that cooking menu on the communication terminal 200 and pressing the input key (selection key) 237 (Figure 81 (A)) will not result in the transmission of advance notice information 1 (201). In other words, since the central processing unit 212 in the communication terminal 200 knows that cooking can be done with either the left or right heating nozzle 4L or 4R for that cooking menu, one of the features is that the user US is prompted to select between the heating nozzles 4L and 4R, and the result is transmitted to the cooking appliance 1 by operating the left and right selection marks 243L and 243R shown in Figure 81 (B).

Next, we will explain Figure 82.
FIG. 82 is a time chart showing the operation of the cooking device shown in FIG. 78 in chronological order.
TM1 to TM8 indicate timings.
As is clear from Figure 82, in the heating cooker 1 of this embodiment 3, the linked cooking mode KM1 is an operating pattern that has the cooking process 1 in which heating and cooking is performed at a first location (above the top plate 3) by the first heating means HM1, the cooking process 2 in which heating and cooking is performed at a second location (inside the heating chamber 6) by the second heating means HM2, and a heating pause process (heating pause period P3) between the cooking process 1 and the cooking process 2.

Furthermore, when the cooking process 1 is started using the data of the first portion M1, the control device 40 notifies the user through the notification means 90 during the cooking process 1 that preparations for acquiring the data of the second portion M2 are to be made (TM4), and when either the first specific input key 152L, 152R or the second specific input key 153M is operated during the heating pause period P3, the process for acquiring the data of the second portion M2 can be started. This is one of the features of the configuration.

FIG. 82 will now be described in detail.
82, "Acquisition notification 1,""Progress notification 1,""Progress notification 2," and "Acquisition notification 2" are operations performed by the display unit 16 of the notification means 90. Also, "Progress notification 1 to communication terminal" and "Progress notification 2 to communication terminal" are notifications sent by the control device 40 to the outside (communication terminal 200) via the communication unit 51.

FIG. 82 shows a case where recipe data CD for a cooking menu in cooperative cooking mode KM1 is acquired from the communication terminal 200 and cooked using the recipe data CD.
The "acquisition notification 1" at timing TM1 notifies that the first portion M1 containing the setting information for cooking process 1 has been acquired.
When the user US starts the cooking operation (TM2), cooking step 1 begins. In Fig. 82, cooking step 1 is performed by the first heating means HM1.

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the time TM2, "progress notification 1" is automatically issued. For example, a notification such as "5 minutes have passed since the start of heating" is issued.
Furthermore, when the elapsed time A from the point in time TM2 exceeds a predetermined time, a "progress notification 2" is automatically issued. For example, a notification such as "Cooking process 1 will soon be completed" is issued. The "progress notification" may also be issued by detecting the elapsed time from the point in time when the temperature of the heated object has reached a target temperature (e.g., 180°C).

The "progress notification 2" is also sent to the communication terminal 200 via the communication unit 51 as the "progress notification 1 to the communication terminal."
In the "progress notification 2", the notification means 90 notifies the user that preparations for acquiring the data of the second portion M2 are to be made. The audio notification unit 50 may also issue an audio alert. This progress notification 2 is performed for the purpose of smoothly acquiring the data of the second portion M2 from the communication terminal 200 during the heating pause period P3. In other words, it urges the user US to prepare so that cooking process 2 can be started immediately during the heating pause period P3.

Cooking process 1 ends at TM5, but this end can also be determined by the user US pressing input key 153L or 153R (on left and right operation units 15L, 15R). Cooking process 1 may also end automatically based on the amount of time that has elapsed since TM2 (timer cooking).

If the data for the second portion M2 is acquired during the heating pause period P3, an "acquisition notification 2" is issued at timing TM6. This acquisition notification 2 notifies the user that the data for the second portion M2, including the setting information for cooking process 2, has been acquired.
Then, cooking step 2 can be started at step TM7. After that, when cooking step 2 is completed, the series of integrated cooking modes KM1 ends at step TM8. After this, cooking step 3 may be performed after another heating pause period P3. In this case, the data for the third portion M3 (not shown) related to cooking step 3 may be acquired during the immediately preceding pause period P3.
At the stage TM8, when the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is completely completed, a "progress notification 2 to the communication terminal" is performed, and the completion of cooking can be known on the communication terminal 200 even if the user is in a remote location.

Next, we will explain Figure 83.
Fig. 83 is a flowchart showing the operation of the cooking appliance 1 shown in Fig. 78 in chronological order. The operation of the cooperative cooking mode KM1 is explained in more detail with reference to Fig. 82. The operation of the control device 40 from the start of cooking step 1 to the heating pause step is shown.

In the cooking appliance 1 of this third embodiment, when the appliance is on standby before starting cooking, the function setting key 151KP on the input operation unit 15 can be operated to switch to the "function setting" mode and set to "external notification mode." Therefore, as explained below, this function is convenient even when the user cannot always be in front of the cooking appliance 1 and be present to cook.

Figure 82 shows the basic operation program from the start of cooking process 1 to heating pause period P3 when the "external notification mode" is selected. This program is also stored in the memory device 41 of the control device 40.

When a command to start cooking process 1 is received from the input operation unit 15, the "external notification mode" is activated (step SW1). Note that this external notification mode may be activated from the stage where the first part M1 of cooking process 1 is acquired from the communication terminal 200.
Cooking step 1 is started, and measurement of the elapsed time (TN1, TN2) from the start of cooking step 1 is also started (step SW2). This step corresponds to step TM2 described in FIG.

The display unit 16 also displays the start of cooking process 1, and the audio notification unit 50 also notifies the user that cooking has started (step SW2). Furthermore, because the "external notification mode" is selected, the communication unit 51 transmits information indicating the start of cooking process 1 to the outside (step SW3).

Here, because communication terminal 200 has been pre-registered as the external notification destination for cooking appliance 1, information about the start of cooking appliance 1 is received via cloud server 300. Furthermore, if communication terminal 200 is located near cooking appliance 1 (e.g., inside the same kitchen), cooking appliance 1 transmits information about the start of cooking process 1 to communication terminal 200 via wireless communication 330BT.

Thereafter, the presence or absence of abnormal operation during cooking process 1 is checked (step SW3), and the presence or absence of exceeding the elapsed time TN1 is checked (step SW6).
These steps SW4 and SW5 are repeated at short intervals, and if an abnormality is detected, the notification means 90 notifies the abnormality detection (step SW6). As part of the processing in this "external notification mode," the external cloud server 300 is also notified, and the communication terminal 200 is also notified of the occurrence of the abnormality.

If it is determined that the elapsed time TN1 has been exceeded ("Yes" in step SW6), the process proceeds to step SW7, where progress information 1 is notified on the display unit 16 and the audio notification unit 50 (step SW7). At the same time, the progress information is sent externally. This progress information also reaches the external cloud server 300 and communication terminal 200.

In the next step SW8, it is determined whether the elapsed time TN2 has elapsed. If it is determined that the elapsed time TN2 has elapsed ("Yes" in step SW8), the process proceeds to step SW9. The notification in step SW9 is made by the display unit 16 and the audio notification unit 50. At the same time, the display unit 16 and the audio notification unit 50 advise the outside world to start preparations to acquire recipe data for the second part M2 related to cooking process 2. This step SW9 corresponds to step TM4 in Figure 82.

Step SW10 determines whether a command to end cooking process 1 has been received from input operation unit 15. This step corresponds to step TM5 in FIG.
If it is determined that cooking step 1 has ended ("Yes" in step SW10), the process proceeds to step SW11, where the completion of cooking step 1 is notified by display unit 16 or audio notification unit 50 (step SW11). At the same time, information about the completion of cooking step 1 is sent to the outside. This completion information also reaches external cloud server 300 and communication terminal 200. If communication terminal 200 is displaying first screen 216A, second screen 216B, or third screen (see FIG. 77), the completion of cooking step 1 may be displayed on these screens with the latest information added, such as in a pop-up screen (see FIG. 81).

In step SW11, for example, the central display unit 16M notifies the user that cooking step 1 has finished and prompts the user to provide data for cooking step 2 to the cooking appliance 1.

When the user US transmits the data of the second part M2 for executing the cooking process 2 on the first screen 216A of the communication terminal 200 using the input key 237B, the advance notice information 2 (201) regarding the cooking process 2 is then sent to the heating cooker 1 (step SW12).
Then, in step SW13, the contents of the advance notice information 2 are analyzed, and in the next step SW13, a specific input key to be operated is extracted from the recipe data storage unit 42 and displayed on the display unit 16.

As can be seen from Figure 83, step SW10 is followed by heating pause period P3, during which the heating operation is paused. During this period, the user can remove the food from the heating chamber 6 and transfer it to a heated object (such as a pot) placed above the left heating port 4L or right heating port 4R. For other cooking menus, the food must be moved from either the left or right heating port 4L or 4R into the heating chamber 6. The length of this heating pause period P3 can be freely determined by the user until the user gives the command to start cooking (cooking step 2) (however, a long pause, such as 30 minutes or more, will result in an error and the linked cooking mode will be automatically canceled).

The user can use this heating pause period P3 to check the results of cooking process 1, obtain recipe data CD for cooking process 2, and consider the control conditions for cooking process 2. If necessary, at this point they can check the ingredients stored in the refrigerator 331 (see Figure 67) and ask for the residents' opinions.

If the user presses input key 151M after step SW13 (if cooking process 2 is performed in heating chamber 6), heating pause period P3 immediately ends and cooking process 2 begins.

Summary of embodiment 3.
As is clear from the above description, in this third embodiment, the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure is disclosed as follows.
That is, one embodiment of the cooking device 1 according to the first disclosure is as follows:
an input operation unit 15;
a first heating means HM1 and a second heating means HM2;
a communication unit 51 for wireless communication with the outside;
Notification means 90;
a control device (40) that executes cooking using the recipe data (CD) acquired via the communication unit (51);
The control device 40 separately acquires, for the recipe data CD, a first portion M1 that sets a cooking process 1 that uses one of the heating means and a second portion M2 that sets a cooking process 2 that uses another of the heating means,
The control device 40
(1) a communication establishment step SP1 of establishing a communication state with a specific communication terminal 200;
(2) a notification step 1 (SP2A) in which, after the communication establishment step SP1, the notification means 90 performs a specific notification A (regarding the necessity of operation, the existence of a specific input key to be operated, etc.) of the input operation unit;
(3) after the notification step 1 (SP2A), a notification step 2 (SP2B) in which the notification means 90 performs a specific notification B (regarding the necessity of operation, the existence of a specific input key to be operated, etc.) of the input operation unit in accordance with advance notice information 2 (201) regarding the second part M2 acquired from the communication unit 51;
(4) A confirmation step 1 (SP3A) of transmitting selection information (202) when the specific input key notified in the notification step 1 is operated;
(5) a confirmation step 2 (SP3B) of transmitting selection information 2 when the specific input key notified in the notification step 2 is operated;
To carry out
This is a configuration characterized by the above.

With this configuration, the cooking appliance 1 can reliably acquire the external recipe data CD and use it for actual cooking.
That is, the user can know the specific input key to be operated on the side of the cooking appliance 1, and by operating the key, the process can proceed to the "confirmation operation" for acquiring the recipe data CD. This prevents the user US from making an operational error and improves usability.
Furthermore, recipe data CD for a cooking menu with multiple cooking steps can be reliably obtained for each cooking step through receiving the advance notice information 1, advance notice information 2, etc. and the "confirmation operation" (transmission of selection information A and selection information B), which is expected to improve the operability of the heating cooker 1, which can handle a wide range of cooking using multiple cooking steps.

In the third embodiment, the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1 according to the first disclosure has the following configuration.
That is, the control device 40 of the cooking appliance 1
(1) When the advance notice information 1 (201) regarding the cooking menu is acquired from the communication unit 51, a key identification step SP2A (see step SF4 in FIG. 78 ) is performed to extract the specific input keys 153M, 152L, and 152R to be operated based on the correspondence information KID.
(2) a notification step SP2B (see step SF5 in FIG. 78 ) of notifying the notification means 90 of information capable of identifying the specific input key extracted in the key identification step SP2A;
(3) a step of determining whether the specific input keys 153M, 152L, 152R notified by the notifying means 90 have been operated (see step SF7 in FIG. 78);
(4) When it is determined that the specific input keys 153M, 152L, 152R notified by the notifying means 90 have been operated, a confirmation step SP3 (see step SF9 in FIG. 78) of transmitting selection information A (202) is executed in sequence.

As described above, this configuration allows the display unit 16 to accurately display the specific input keys that should be operated in advance in response to the operation of the user US. Furthermore, by guiding the user US to operate the specific input keys in the confirmation process SP3, it is possible to prevent the user US from making operational mistakes and improve usability.

Furthermore, in the cooking system of the third embodiment, the communication terminal 200
(1) In response to an input from the user US, one cooking menu item corresponding to specific recipe data CD is selected from the range of the first menu information and the second menu information and displayed on the terminal display unit (first screen 216A) (see step SF1 in FIG. 78 and FIG. 81(A)),
(2) When the cooking menu displayed on the first screen 216A is confirmed, the second screen 216D (pop-up screen) is displayed (see FIG. 81(B)).
(3) The second screen 216D displays input keys 243L and 243R (which also serve as selection marks) for selecting either the left heating port 4L that can be used with the first specific input key 152L corresponding to the first menu information or the second menu information displayed on the second screen 216D, or the right heating port 4R that can be used with the first specific input key 152R, and an operation guidance display unit 246 that requests a touch operation of the input keys 243L and 243R,
(3) When a transmission command is received at the time when the touch input operation of the input keys 243L and 243R is completed, the specific recipe data CD relating to the cooking menu displayed on the first screen 216A is transmitted to the cooking appliance 1.
The configuration was characterized by the following.

With this configuration, the recipe data CD stored in the external communication terminal 200 can be reliably acquired by the cooking appliance 1 and used for actual cooking.
Furthermore, the notification means 90 (display unit 16) of the cooking appliance 1 can present specific input keys 152L, 152R, 153M of the input operation unit 15 that should be operated in advance in response to the operation of the user US, according to the data (corresponding information KID) in the storage device 41. Therefore, in the case of a cooking menu with one cooking step, the notification is made by advance notice information 1 (201) from the communication terminal 200, and the operation of the confirmation step SP3 by the user US can be guided to the correct input operation unit 15.

Furthermore, when there are multiple cooking processes, such as in the cooperative cooking mode KM1, the notification means 90, such as the display unit 16 of the cooking appliance 1, can notify the user US of the specific input key that they should confirm each time using the advance notice information 1 and advance notice information 2 (201) from the communication terminal 200.

Furthermore, corresponding to the display unit 16 of the cooking appliance 1, the second screen (pop-up screen 216D) of the communication terminal 200 is configured to display input keys 243L, 243R which also serve as selection marks for selecting either the left heating port 4L corresponding to the first specific input key 152L or the right heating port 4R corresponding to the first specific input key 152R, and an operation guidance display unit 246 which requests touch operation of these selection marks 243L, 243L.
These configurations can prevent the user US from making operational mistakes in both the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal 200, and can also improve usability.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, as explained particularly with reference to FIG.
In the cooking device 1, at least one of the heating means HM1 to HM3 is configured to be able to perform heating operations independently of each other in the plurality of heating ports 4L and 4R,
On the other hand, in the communication terminal 200, the second screen 216B (pop-up screen 216D) is configured to display input keys 243L, 243R (which also serve as selection marks) for selecting one of the plurality of heating nozzles 4L, 4R.

Furthermore, the second screen (pop-up screen 216D) is configured to simultaneously display an operation guidance display section 246 that prompts the user to touch the input keys 243L, 243L. This allows the cooking appliance 1 to know which heating port the user intends to use before transmitting the recipe data CD.
That is, by touching input keys 243L and 243L, data indicating whether the right heating port 4R or the left heating port 4L is selected is included in advance notice information 1 and advance notice information 2 and is provided to cooking appliance 1 by correspondence information KID. As a result, the corresponding specific input key is identified in cooking appliance 1 and displayed on display unit 16.
These configurations can prevent the user US from making operational mistakes in both the cooking appliance 1 and the communication terminal 200, and can also improve usability.

In addition to the above, in this embodiment 3, the same components as those in embodiments 1 and 2 can achieve practical effects equivalent to those achieved in embodiments 1 and 2.

Other embodiments.
In order to explain the circuits, parts, and components of the devices that make up the cooking appliances 1, 400 and the communication terminal device 200, data and information have been described with symbols (1, 2 or A, B) such as recipe data CD1, recipe data CD2, selection information A, selection information B, etc., but these may be substantially the same data. For example, one piece of recipe data (e.g., hamburger steak recipe data CD) that is initially stored in the cooking appliances 1, 400 and recipe data (e.g., hamburger steak recipe data CD) obtained from outside via the communication units 51, 426 may have the same content.

Furthermore, the communication terminal 200, such as a smartphone or tablet terminal (small, portable personal computer), does not necessarily need to provide the recipe data acquired from the cloud server 300 to the cooking appliances 1, 400; the communication terminal 200 itself may generate and store the recipe data. Furthermore, the relationship between the communication terminal 200 and the cooking appliances 1, 400 does not necessarily require direct communication to transmit the advance notice information 201 and selection information 202; wireless communication may be performed via a relay device or other access point. Therefore, for example, even if it is stated that "selection information for the sender of the recipe data is transmitted," this does not mean that the sender is limited to the communication terminal 200.

Furthermore, in the composite cooking mode KM2, selecting the composite cooking mode KM2 basically selects a control menu (for example, a heating operation pattern called "defrost"), and does not select recipe data CD intended for a specific food to be cooked. However, the user US can also use the cloud server 300 to select recipe data CD intended for one food to be cooked in the composite cooking mode KM2 that can be applied to the cooker 1, and have the cooker 1 acquire this using the communication terminal 200. The same applies to the single cooking mode KM3.

In the above explanation, for the sake of simplicity, reference numerals have been used to indicate corresponding components and signals, but these reference numerals should not be interpreted as indicating that the components and signals are different from one another. In some cases, different reference numerals have been used for the sake of explanation, but this does not mean that the data, components, or functional content are different from one another simply because of the difference in reference numerals.

The circuits, parts, and device components illustrated in the above embodiments 1 to 3 are conceptual functional components and do not necessarily have to be physically configured as illustrated. Furthermore, the functions of the control device 40, heating control unit 43, first heating means HM1, second heating means HM2, third heating means HM3, memory device 41, main control device 480, sub-control device 440, etc., in particular, can be distributed or integrated, and the specific form is not limited to that illustrated; all or part of them can be functionally or physically distributed or integrated in any unit depending on the function, operating status, etc.

The functions of the control device 40 and heating control unit 43 are realized by processing circuits. The processing circuits that realize each function may be dedicated hardware, or may be processors that execute programs stored in memory. The same applies to the main control device 480 and sub-control device 440.

When the processing circuit is a processor, the functions of the control device 40 and heating control unit 43 are realized by software, firmware, or a combination of software and firmware. The software and firmware are written as programs and stored in the storage device 41, which is memory. The processor realizes the functions of the control device 40 and heating control unit 43 by reading and executing the programs stored in the storage device 41. The same applies to the main control device 480 and sub-control device 440.

These programs cause the microcomputer to execute the control procedures of the control device 40 and heating control unit 43. The storage device 41 is typically a non-volatile or volatile semiconductor memory such as RAM, ROM, flash memory, EPROM, or EEPROM.

Furthermore, some of the data and programs in the recipe data storage unit 41 shown in FIG. 10 may not be stored in the cooker 1 but in an external recording medium (such as a storage server). In this case, the cooker 1 accesses the external recording medium (storage server) to obtain the necessary data and program information.

Furthermore, the operating programs of the control device 40, first heating means HM1, second heating means HM2, and third heating means HM3 may be updated with appropriate modifications and improvements at the request of the user US or the manufacturer of the cooking appliance 1. In this case, the modified and improved programs may be obtained, for example, via the communication unit 51.

One of the heating parts (IH coils 9L, 9M, 9R) of the first heating means HM1 that heats and cooks food on the top plate 3 may be replaced with a gas combustion burner. In this case, a gas flow valve is configured to be controlled by the control unit.
Also, a part or all of the second heating means HM2 or the third heating means HM3 may be replaced with a gas combustion burner or an induction heating source.

In the first to third embodiments, the input operation unit 15 has been described primarily as a "contact input" operation unit in which the user US touches input keys to issue input commands, and a pressure (push button) operation unit. However, the input operation unit may also be a "non-contact input" operation unit that inputs by detecting the movement of the user US's fingers or hand without contact.

Furthermore, the input operation unit 15 may be changed to a voice input method that recognizes and inputs the voice of the user US. In the case of the voice input method, a microphone and a voice receiving unit that receive the voice of the user US and convert it into a voice recognition signal correspond to the input operation unit.
Alternatively, a mechanical switch such as a contact type or a pressure type may be used in combination with the voice input method.

Furthermore, the input operation unit 15 in embodiments 1 to 3 may issue commands to the cooking appliance 1 via an input terminal device equipped with a voice input function, such as a smart speaker or an AI speaker.

In the first embodiment, the nutritional component data DD is described as being displayed on the central display unit 16M, but it may also be displayed on a display screen in another position (for example, the right display unit 16R, the left display unit 16L, or the right heat display unit 17R) depending on the display screen of various cooking menus.
In addition, although the first embodiment has been described as displaying the standby initial screen on the central display unit 16M, if another display unit is provided, as in the second embodiment, the standby initial screen 16MH may be displayed on that display unit. For example, on the right display unit 16R for the right heating port 4R, the standby initial screen 16MH may be displayed immediately after the input key 153R is operated. This can also be applied to the left display unit 16L.

In addition, in embodiment 1 (Figure 24), the two types of ingredients, major food ingredients and nutritional ingredients, were displayed on two screens, food ingredient display screen 16M1A and nutritional ingredient display screen 16M1B, but these two screens may be displayed together (on one screen).

In addition, the user US can press function setting key 151KP to enter function setting mode and limit the displayed nutritional components and food ingredients to specific nutritional components. Furthermore, the user US can press input key 180 to switch to voice input mode 2 and enter the information by voice, narrowing the range to specific nutritional components and food ingredients.

Furthermore, when all heating and cooking processes are completed or during heating pause periods P3 and P5 in the integrated cooking mode KM1, either the food component display screen 16M1A or the nutritional component display screen 16M1B, or both, may be displayed automatically or in response to a command from the user US.

The smart speaker or AI speaker can wirelessly exchange information at any time with a support server equipped with voice translation and search functions in a network environment, such as cloud server 300, and can acquire the voice (natural language) spoken by the user US near the cooking appliance 1 as a voice signal, which the support server converts into a command signal from the user US, ultimately generating a command signal for the cooking appliance 1. Therefore, even if the user US is near the cooking appliance 1 but has both hands occupied preparing food or handling ingredients, limiting the frequency with which they can directly touch the input operation unit 15, they can conveniently operate the cooking appliance 1 using natural speech (voice).

In embodiments 1 to 3, the input operation unit 15 was used to select the various control menus and control conditions displayed on the first specific screen 16M1, second specific screen 16M2, and third specific screen 16M3. However, touch-sensitive input keys may also be provided on the display screens of the central display unit 16M or the left and right display units 16L and 16R, which are display means.

For example, the aforementioned Patent Publication No. 5833699, which proposes composite cooking, proposes a technology in which a composite cooking display screen is displayed, the names of composite cooking menus are displayed on the display screen, and the user US can select a menu by directly touching the menu selection section with their finger.

Therefore, the first specific screen 16M1 and the second specific screen 16M2 may display the menu of dishes available in the combined cooking mode KM2 and the linked cooking mode KM1, the names of the dishes to be cooked (a type of identification information), etc., and the user US may directly touch the display portion (also called the "icon" portion) with their finger to select the linked cooking mode menu, etc.

In the first embodiment, the communication unit 51 receives command signals and recipe data CD transmitted from outside the cooking appliance 1, and the cooking appliance 1 transmits various operation signals and command signals to the outside (operating status data OS). However, it is also possible to transmit information indicating the progress of cooking step 1, cooking step 2, such as the start and end of cooking step 2, each time the information is transmitted. This configuration allows the user US to access this progress information (operating status data OS) via the communication terminal 200, etc., improving convenience.

In addition to the cooking appliance 1, a home gateway having the function of receiving search results data for the refrigerator 331 inventory may be installed as an information management device, and the cooking appliance 1 and the refrigerator 331 may be connected via a wireless communication means (LAN) or a wide area network such as the Internet, allowing the cooking appliance 1 to obtain inventory information for the refrigerator 331 and use it for cooking.

Furthermore, the cooking appliance database 217 and the remote operation information generator 219 are not necessarily required as components of the communication terminal 200, such as a smartphone. For example, functions equivalent to the cooking appliance database 217 and the remote operation information generator 219 may be provided in, for example, the first server 321 or the second server 322, and each time the communication terminal 200 receives input (including voice input), it may transmit this to the cloud server 300, such as the first server 321, and obtain the necessary response information from the cloud server 300.

In the past, the cooking appliance 1 received recipe data CD and other data from the information processing terminal 200, first server 321, etc. directly or via a wireless router, but the cooking appliance 1, 400 may also receive the data via another relay device. For example, the remote control of another home appliance (e.g., a water heater) installed in the kitchen may be used as the relay device. Such remote controls are conveniently usually connected to a power source at all times. In this case, it is desirable for the relay device to have a built-in storage device (e.g., flash memory) that temporarily stores various data, including commands transmitted from the information processing terminal 200, first server 321, etc. The relay device is then configured to temporarily store various data transmitted from the cooking appliance 1, 400 in the storage device (e.g., flash memory).

Furthermore, in the first embodiment, the central processing unit (CPU) 212 of the communication terminal 200 reads out correspondence information KID capable of identifying a specific input key (e.g., 153M) corresponding to the confirmed cooking menu from the storage unit 220 or the cooking appliance database 217, and generates the "advance notice information (201)." However, such correspondence information KID may not be stored on the communication terminal 200 side.
In other words, if the cooking device 1 (400) stores the corresponding information KID in, for example, the storage device 41 or storage means 440R, 480R, etc., it can compare the information with the cooking identification information contained in the received advance notice information (201) and determine the specific input key (e.g., 153M) to be operated on the cooking device 1 (400) side.

The embodiments disclosed herein should be considered in all respects to be illustrative and not restrictive. The true scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

The cooking appliance and cooking system disclosed herein can be widely used not only in kitchens of ordinary homes, but also in kitchens in public facilities, stores, etc.

REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 1 Cooking appliance 2 Main body 3 Top plate 4 Heating port 4L Left heating port 4C Center heating port 4R Right heating port 5 Exhaust port cover 6 Heating chamber 7 Door 8 Handle 9 IH coil 9C Center IH coil 9L Left IH coil 9R Right IH coil 10 Open/close detection unit 11 Microwave oscillator (magnetron)
12 Radiant heat heating means 12a Upper radiant heat heating means 12b Lower radiant heat heating means 13 Infrared sensor 14 Thermistor sensor 15 Input operation unit 15L Left operation unit 15M Central operation unit 15R Right operation unit 16 Display unit 16F Progress mark 16L Left display unit 16M Central display unit 16M1 First specific screen 16M1A Food ingredient display screen 16M1B Nutritional ingredient display screen 16M2 Second specific screen 16M3 Third specific screen 16MA Guidance screen 16MH Common screen (initial screen during standby)
16MM Receiving operation display screen 16R Right display section 17 Heating power display section 17L Left heating power display section 17M Center heating status display section 17R Right heating power display section 20 Main power switch 20A Main power switch operation button (key)
21 Light-emitting unit 21L Light-emitting unit 21M Light-emitting unit 21R Light-emitting unit 22 First display area 23 Second display area 24 Third display area 25A to 25C Display information 26 Light-emitting control unit 27 Light-emitting element (light-emitting element group)
28 Fourth display area 29A-29B Display section 29C-29D Candidate display section 30 Group of temperature sensors 30A Temperature sensor 31 Infrared transmitter 32 Bottom wall 33 Installation space 35 Infrared transmitter 40 Control device 41 Display data storage section 42 Recipe data storage section 43 Heating control section 50 Audio notification section 51 Communication section (wireless communication module)
52 Input signal analysis unit 53 Data acquisition unit 54 Permission condition determination unit 55 Restriction unit 56 Audio signal receiving unit 57 Power supply circuit 58 Audio signal analysis unit 59 Human detection sensor 60A Display text 60B Two-dimensional information (two-dimensional code)
60C Two-dimensional information explanation 60E Caution display 60H Recommendation 60N Common information during standby 60P Acquisition operation support information 70 Input processing unit 90 Notification unit 151L to 155L Input keys 151M to 159M Input keys 151R to 155R Input keys 160 Control menu identification information 161 Control menu identification information 162 Control menu identification information 164 Reference information 165 Additional information 166 Additional information 167 Identification information 168 Identification information 169 Identification information 170 Operation support information 171L Heating unit identification unit 171R Heating unit identification unit 172 Process information 173 External recipe identification unit 174 Reception operation display unit 174A Reception support information 174F Non-permission display 174S Reception operation start information 175 Operation support information 175A Operation support information 176 Operation support information 176A Operation support information 177 Reception start information 179 Auxiliary information 179D Display information (voice input mode)
180 Input key (voice input only mode selection section)
190 Icon 200 Communication terminal (smartphone) (information processing terminal)
201 Notification Information A
202 Selection information A (confirmation information A)
203 Preparation Information A (Preparation Signal A)
210 Transmitter/Receiver 211 Communication Control Unit 212 Central Processing Unit (CPU)
213 ROM/RAM
214 Speaker 215 Touch operation unit 216 Terminal display unit (terminal display screen)
216A First screen 216B Second screen 216C Third screen 216D Pop-up screen (Second screen)
217 Cooking appliance database 218 Orientation detection unit 219 Remote operation information generation unit 220 Storage unit 221 NFC input/output unit 222 Voice input unit 223 Notification data 224 Remote control data 225 Display operation unit 226 Food ingredient/nutritional ingredient data 230 Recipe data acquisition unit 231 Recipe data transmission unit 232 Terminal side recipe selection unit 233 Food ingredient data acquisition unit 234 Character display unit 235 Image display unit 236 Cooking process information 237 Confirmation key (icon)
238 Input key (icon)
239 Character display section 240 Input key (for sending)
241 Cancel input key 242 Image diagram (schematic diagram)
242C Center heating port mark 242G Heating chamber mark 242L Left heating port mark 242R Right center heating port mark 243L Left selection mark 243R Right selection mark 244A to 244C Display unit 245 Identification information (cooking menu name) display unit 246 Operation guidance display unit 247 Input key for clearing the screen 248 Recommended information 249 Elapsed time information 300 Cloud server 301 Recipe data providing server 302 Recipe database 310 Light emitting element for microwave (LED)
311 Grill light emitting element (LED)
312 Light emitting element for oven (LED)
313 Light emitting element (LED) for central IH
314 High temperature warning light emitting element (LED) group 314a Heating chamber high temperature warning light emitting element (LED)
314b IH high temperature warning light emitting element (LED)
321 First server 321A Input/output unit (input/output interface unit)
321C Control unit 321P Food component database 321R Memory unit 322 Second server 322A Input/output unit (input/output interface unit)
322C Control unit 322R Memory unit 326 Food ingredient information server 330BT Wireless communication 330WF Wireless communication 331 Refrigerator 332 Menu screen display unit (icon)
333 Input key (icon)
340 Wireless Router (Access Point)
507A Auxiliary information display section A
507B Auxiliary information display section B
525 Transmission information display section 543 Error notification section CD Recipe data CD1-CD2 Recipe data DD Food ingredient information NW Network OS Operation status data TB Acquisition period TB1 Recipe data acquisition period TB2 Acquired recipe data cancellation period TB3 Acquired recipe data change period TX First time limit (first limit period)
TZ1 Recipe data reception restriction period US users.

Claims (13)

an input operation unit;
A heating means;
a communication unit that wirelessly communicates with the outside;
A notification means;
a control device that executes cooking using recipe data acquired from an external source via the communication unit,
the control device acquires the recipe data in two stages, a first part for setting a cooking step 1 by the heating means, and a second part for setting a cooking step 2 by the heating means;
The control device
(1) a notification step 1 in which the notification means performs a specific notification A that identifies the input operation unit related to the first part;
(2) after the notification step 1, a notification step 2 in which the notification means performs a specific notification B that identifies the input operation unit related to the second part;
(3) a confirmation step 1 of transmitting selection information A when the input operation unit notified by the specific notification A is operated;
(4) a confirmation step 2 of transmitting selection information B when the input operation unit notified in the notification step 2 is operated;
To carry out
The input operation unit has a plurality of specific input keys,
the control device starts a reception restriction period of the recipe data from the time when the specific input key is operated, and the reception restriction period ends when both the first part and the second part are acquired or when a cooking operation is started;
A heating cooker characterized by the above. 2. The cooking device according to claim 1, wherein the specific notification A and the specific notification B are visual information or audio information that identifies at least one of the specific input keys. 2. The cooking device according to claim 1 , wherein when the specific input key is operated and the recipe data is acquired, the control device notifies the user of information indicating that the recipe data has been acquired by the notification means. 2. The heating cooker according to claim 1, wherein, when the recipe data cannot be acquired after the specific input key is operated, the control device notifies the notification means with at least one of a non-reception display indicating an unacquired state and reception support information indicating a cause or countermeasure. The specific input key has a function of selecting a voice input mode,
2. The cooking device according to claim 1 , wherein the control device is in a standby state in which it accepts input from outside in a voice input mode when it receives a command to acquire the recipe data by the specific input key. The heating cooker according to claim 1, characterized in that, when the control device receives a command to acquire the recipe data, it determines whether the permission conditions are met, and if the permission conditions are not met, it does not acquire the recipe data. the heating means includes a first heating means and a second heating means,
2. The heating cooker according to claim 1, wherein the control device has a function of executing a coordinated cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven to perform one cooking operation. an input operation unit;
A heating means;
a communication unit that wirelessly communicates with the outside;
A notification means;
a control device that executes cooking using recipe data acquired from an external source via the communication unit,
the control device acquires the recipe data in two stages, a first part for setting a cooking step 1 using the heating means, and a second part for setting a cooking step 2 using the heating means;
The control device
(1) a notification step 1 in which the notification means performs a specific notification A that identifies the input operation unit related to the first part;
(2) after the notification step 1, a notification step 2 in which the notification means performs a specific notification B that identifies the input operation unit related to the second part;
(3) a confirmation step 1 of transmitting selection information A when the input operation unit notified by the specific notification A is operated;
(4) a confirmation step 2 of transmitting selection information B when the input operation unit notified in the notification step 2 is operated;
To carry out
The input operation unit has a plurality of specific input keys,
The specific input key has a function of setting a voice input mode depending on an operation state ,
The input operation unit has a start key for instructing the start of cooking and a stop key for instructing the end of cooking,
When a command to start cooking is issued from the input operation unit using the start key, the voice input mode is cancelled .
A heating cooker characterized by the above. an input operation unit having a specific input key A and a specific input key B;
A heating means;
a communication unit that wirelessly communicates with the outside;
A notification means;
a control device that executes cooking using the recipe data acquired via the communication unit,
the control device acquires the recipe data in two stages, a first part for setting a cooking step 1 by the heating means, and a second part for setting a cooking step 2 by the heating means;
The control device
(1) after the notification means notifies that the recipe data relating to the first part can be acquired, when the specific input key A is operated, the process proceeds to a step of acquiring setting information A of the first part;
(2) proceeding to a step of acquiring setting information B for the second part when the specific input key B is operated after the notification means notifies that the recipe data for the second part can be acquired;
The input operation unit has a plurality of specific input keys,
the control device starts a reception restriction period of the recipe data from the time when the specific input key is operated, and the reception restriction period ends when both the first part and the second part are acquired or when a cooking operation is started;
A heating cooker characterized by the above. a cooking device having a plurality of input operation units and a communication function;
a communication terminal connected to the cooking appliance by wireless communication,
The communication terminal
(1) The first screen and the second screen are displayed sequentially on the terminal display unit;
(2) The first screen displays recipe data relating to the selected food in the order of a first display portion relating to cooking step 1 and a second display portion relating to cooking step 2;
(3) When the first display portion displayed on the first screen is selected, the display is switched to the second screen displaying information specifying the input operation unit to be used in the cooking process 1;
(4) The second screen displays input keys for transmitting setting information A related to the cooking step 1 of the recipe data,
(5) When the input key is operated, the setting information A related to the cooking process 1 selected on the first screen is transmitted to the cooking device.
A heating and cooking system characterized by the above. a cooking device having a display unit, a plurality of specific input keys provided in an input operation unit, and a communication function;
a communication terminal connected to the cooking appliance by wireless communication,
The communication terminal has a recipe selection unit that displays recipe data related to the food to be cooked on a terminal display unit,
The communication terminal
(1) The first screen and the second screen are sequentially displayed on the terminal display unit;
(2) The first screen displays the recipe data of the food to be cooked that is the target of the recipe data in the order of a first display portion relating to cooking step 1 and a second display portion relating to cooking step 2;
(3) The first screen displays an input key for transmitting advance notice information 1 to notify the user that the cooking process 1 displayed on the first screen has been selected;
(4) When a transmission process is performed using the transmission input key, the display is switched to the second screen,
When the cooking appliance receives the advance notice information 1, the cooking appliance displays information specifying the specific input key corresponding to the cooking process 1 on the display unit, and when the specific input key displayed on the display unit is operated, the cooking appliance issues selection information A;
When the communication terminal receives the selection information A, the communication terminal becomes capable of transmitting setting information A related to the cooking process 1 to the cooking appliance;
A heating and cooking system characterized by the above. a first heating means and a second heating means;
an individual operation unit dedicated to one of the heating means;
a common operation unit for the first heating means and the second heating means;
a communication unit that wirelessly communicates with the outside;
A notification means;
a control device that executes cooking using the recipe data acquired via the communication unit,
the individual operation unit has a first specific input key,
the shared operation unit has a second specific input key,
The control device
(1) a notifying step of identifying one of the first specific input key or the second specific input key and notifying the identified one by the notifying means;
(2) a confirmation step of transmitting selection information specific to the first specific input key or the second specific input key, when the first specific input key or the second specific input key specified by the notification means is operated;
Execute the following in sequence.
the control device has a function of acquiring the recipe data necessary for executing one cooking menu in two stages, a first stage for setting a cooking process 1 using the first heating means, and a second stage for setting a cooking process 2 using the second heating means;
the control device transmits the selection information in response to an operation of the first specific input key or the second specific input key specified in the notifying step;
Furthermore, the control device starts a reception restriction period of the recipe data from the time when the first specific input key and the second specific input key are operated, and the reception restriction period ends when a cooking operation is started.
A heating cooker characterized by the above. an input key for selecting a combined cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven simultaneously, or one of them is driven first and the other is automatically driven later ;
13. The heating cooker according to claim 12, further comprising an input key for selecting a combined cooking mode in which the first heating means and the second heating means are driven to perform one cooking operation, and at least one of the input key for selecting the combined cooking mode and the input key for selecting the combined cooking mode has a function for setting the input key to a voice input mode.